Home

12 Microsoft Windows XP

1. The Security tab of the aeniei 8 72 Administrators JONLAPTOP Administrators Select Users or Groups Folder Properties dialog f CREATOR OWNER box Jon ONLAPTOP Jon giec this object type EB SYSTEM Fi 10 32 CF Users JONLAPTOP Users igure 10 The Select Users or Permissions for Administrators Allow Deny r Full Control Groups dialog box ag Read amp Execute H older Contents ae OK Cancel Figure 10 33 te 1 _ v 32 or click Advanced to The Advanced Select For special permissions or for advanced settings search for the user click Advanced Users or Groups dialog account and or group box E Figure 10 31 Select Users or Groups Select this object type Users Groups or Builtin security principals From this location TAN Common Queres Name RDN mini or j pemeran Jr LOGON henticated Users i booa E PT BATCH Explore Search Sec Wid permissions to shared folders and printers can be a little confusing at first so thk a computer running Windows XP as the Pentagon That s right the headquarters for re hited States military Visitors can walk right into the Pentagon s lobby and there are even a N of low security areas of the Pentagon To work in most areas of the Pentagon you need a apy Create Shortcut Rename Aecurity clearance however And to gain access to the top secret rooms of the Pentagon A where the government conceals the wreckage of crashed UFO s and files on who
2. MOUSE 1CODL 0 ceeeecceeesceeceeeeceeeees 168 Copy command cceeecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 68 COPY command DOS 119 copying TSS a le scieeeetce 100 TOP PY disksins 209 10 6 oy a oe te Ot ree 96 text and information e eee 68 CELEO ene ere eee ES 27 Cut command sessir 68 cutting a e L EE E E A E ances 100 10 6 E EE EEEE A T E 96 text and information c e eee 68 D date PENI file BY siacccccvesuasaansacervandesaterss 110 sort files Dy ccascticursgaataretacavesseacassaweses 106 sorting files by cceeccccceeeeeeeeeees 106 Your Organization s Name Here Index 301 302 Index e Date Time Properties dialog box 152 date time adjusting 00000000000005050 152 default printer cc ccccccceeeeeeeeeees 226 defragment hard disk ccccceceeeees 213 DEL Command DOS 00 119 Delete KEY anaron 27 61 deleting Eta P E EE 269 TING S ec na 98 LOVACES E EE ET 96 Recy leB Merece tatuata 102 DEN a EEA E N EAE T our det 60 mip PMCS sacs atin aa a a 214 NEWER ES eias n a R 214 delsectins TILES oi bier t nd aes pE 108 desktop Shortcuts adding to ccceeeeeeee 140 wallpaper adding to 0000 158 Detali Vale W catia ite o 106 Device Manager ocni oana 234 diale DOK CS acen a a Eei 56 COMBO DOKES eaea 56 MS CDOKCS is dxicashitiec diver E 56 text DORG S none diplay screen resolu
3. Street Vehicles Windows Media Video Files WMV cmos So far you have made a project a s of clips that you want to turn into a movie This lesson will explain how to open ct preview it and save it as a movie You re becoming a regular Steven Spielberg 1 Open Windows Drover by clicking the Start button and selecting All rrogramese ccossories Windows Movie Maker The Windows 2 Click the and open ie Maker appears utton navigate to where your video projects are saved project you want to preview The vided ips for the project appear on the storyboard At this point you can make edits anges to your project For now let s preview your project and save it as a m e 3 on any blank spot on the storyboard and click the Play button r project plays in the Movie Maker screen just like a movie The other blue buttons nderneath the screen allow you to do a variety of things as shown in Table 7 12 NOTE As the project is playing the clip that is on screen will be highlighted with a white border in the storyboard Now we are going to save the project as a movie Click the Save Movie button The Save Movie dialog box appears as shown in Figure 7 24 Y Movie Maker Screen Buttons Go ahead and play with the buttons 4 5 In the Setting text box choose a quality setting Higher quality settings make larger movie file sizes Do not select a higher setting t
4. V O S se Start Ej Document WordPad Calculator Figure 2 18 When you have everal windows or programs open you can have Windows automatically arrange then instead of manually resizing and pushing them around yourself Windows ganize your windows in two different ways by tiling and cascading This lesson w you both methods and how they work Ino demonstrate how to tile and cascade windows we need to open yet another pr Make sure the WordPad and Calculator programs are running These programs should still be running from the previous lesson If they re not open them by clicking the Start button and selecting them from the All Programs gt Accessories menu The third window we ll load for this exercise is the My Pictures window Click My Pictures under the Start menu You can find the My Pictures icon on the right side of the Start menu When you double click My Pictures its contents appear in their own window You re ready to have Windows arrange your windows 2 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Two Working with a Window 47 Click an empty area on the taskbar with the Right mouse button A shortcut menu appears where you right click Be careful and make sure you right click an empty area of the taskbar otherwise the wrong shortcut menu will appear Your shortcut menu should look like the one in the margin or in Figure 2 16 NOTE Sometimes especially when you have a lot of w
5. Features Include W Find text in document time date stamp and word wrap Notepad Features Dont locie Formatting of any kind can only work with text files under 64K gv Found Under All Programs Accessories gt Notepad Your Organization s Name Here 182 Microsoft Windows XP vx ee Lesson 7 3 Calculator Figure 7 3 Mellel rice Edit View Help The Calculator program in a moa Standard mode Figure 7 4 The Calculator program in scientific mode sete Soo AOS Figure 7 3 The Calculator accessory is one of the more pies included with Windows You use the Calculator just like you would use a ca r that s not on your computer The only difference between the two is that psa Fein the calculator s keys with your fingers you click them with your mouse You can ao use the number keys or the numeric keypad on your keyboard to enter numbers into Efalculator program Here s how to open the Calculator program 1 Click the Start butt f amp and select All Programs gt Accessories gt Calculator The Calculator pf ram appears as shown in Figure 7 3 If you want try making some calculations wi alculator The Calculator program can be used in one of two modes stan scientific Standard mode is adequate for most of us but if you re an engine teacher student or number freak you might want to use the Calculatgy s sCientific mode 2 Seleg Mifw gt Scientific from the
6. O Quick Reference To Open a File or Folder e Double click the file or folder To Move a File or Folder e Drag the file or folder to the desired location in either pane of the window To Copy a File or Folder e Hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while you drag the file or folder to the desired location in either pane of the window To Create a New Folder 1 Click the disk or folder where you want to put the new folder 2 Click Make a new folder in the File and Folder Tasks menu 3 Type a name for the folder and press lt Enter gt To Delete a File or Folder e Select the file or folder and press the lt Delete gt key Click Yes to confirm the deletion To Rename a File or Folder e Right click the file or folder select Rename from the shortcut menu type the new name and press lt Enter gt Your Organization s Name Here 1 18 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 4 16 Using MS DOS ct C WINDOWS System32 command com Figure 4 35 MS DOS running inside a window Figure 4 36 The DOS prompt drive you re amp re in The current rrent folder s Figure 4 35 In the old fashioned days of computers before th Qywas Windows there was MS DOS MS DOS which stands for Microsoft Disk Oper System didn t have any windows pointers or icons you ran programs change ers and copied files by typing difficult to remember commands Windows has been ar or a long time so t
7. wa For Help press F1 te Figure 3 9 isn t much to explain u have to do is type ts start Os start 1 Open wage by clicking the Start button then All Programs Start button Accesgori s and then WordPad The WewP d Program screen pops up Let s enter some text Cli ide the WordPad screen and type the following text 9 29 01 ao FNow we re going to write a letter ss the lt Enter gt key twice ordPad inserts a new paragraph or new line each time you press the lt Enter gt key X Type the following text To the La Fanci Nails Company QY As you type notice that the insertion point the small blinking vertical bar moves to Ny indicate where you are typing Ky 5 Press the lt Enter gt key twice and type the follow text I bought a set of your press on nails last month and I was extremely displeased with them While pressing my La Fanci Nails on I went to pet my poodle Pizzy and my hand and nails stuck to her shaggy little pelt That was in August we re still glued together This lesson explains oO cre ate a document using the WordPad program Actually there and 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Working with a Windows Program 59 The press on nail glue should not have been so strong Pizzy s barking is driving me mad Please reconsider the strength of your product Make sure you press the lt Enter gt key twice to add a blank line between the two paragraphs D
8. Figure 4 7 amp l l l Your compu r ores related files together in folders just like you do with your file cabinet In the pre esson you learned how to use My Computer to view the contents of your comput open a disk drive and display its contents In this lesson we ll go a little bit Furth MY show you how to open a folder W Qy XP gives you your very own a special folder named My Documents as a nient location to store all your files Here s how to open the My Documents folder and AS other folder ry A Click the Start button and select My Documents My Documents The contents of the My Documents several files and subfolders appear in the window The My Documents folder contains several folders or subfolders If you think about it you probably do the same thing keep several subfolders inside a larger folder in your own file cabinet 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 93 2 Double click the My Pictures folder The contents of the My Pictures folder appear in the Window Notice the Address bar displays the current folder you are in My Pictures Instead of clicking the Up button several times to jump back through several levels of folders you can click the Address bar to quickly jump to the root directory of any of drive on your computer NOTE This is where the comparison we ve been using between a file cabinet and a computer begins to break
9. Found Under Programs Accessories System Tools Character Map Your Organization s Name Here 190 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 7 9 Play a CD and Copy from it with Windows Media Player R Windows Media Player Cer Figure 7 13 Fie View Play Tools a O E The Copy from CD tab Stereolab Emperor Tomato Ketchup amp Stop Copy 9 Get Names G A Details let s you copy music from Playing Length Copy Staus Artet Compose ZIRE an audio CD onto your EFE vha Silks Stereolab Laetitia Sadier Tim Gane ROCK Rock AMG computer s hard drive a H e ar These tabs let4 Aa aire Figure 7 14 you access FEE was different tunet AS sro a gt This area The Now Playing tab eee of the EEE 8 Penig Stereolab ROK ANG displays a list of l INGOWS v 13 4 32 Pen ing EPP RO Rock shows you a graphical D k sounds that are Media Player EZ on the CD To representation of the See Table 7 9 play a specific song double click the song music that you play Tabs on the Windows Media Player for their description Figure 7 13 Volume Click these buttons to play pause stop and skip to the next or previous song Windows Media Player 1 Click the File View Play Tools Help ai RN E S a Tomato Ketchup EPRA Minimize button IC OW Or amp er iY Emperor Tomato Ketchup omato Ketchu PI Sacie to play music aying to see TRNA Cybele s Reverie 4 42 ying Noe etronomic Jnderground e l wa
10. Open the Windows folder in the Local Disk C folder for which you The Windows folder contains the most vital program files on your computer the ones want to create a that make Windows XP operate Since you need to be extra careful when you re shortcut and select opening the Windows folder you have to tell Windows XP to display the contents of Create Shortcut from the Windows folder by clicking the words Show Files the shortcut menu 3 Click Show Files in the side panel Windows XP displays the contents of the Windows folder Now you need to find the Notepad program 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Five Customizing the Taskbar and Desktop 141 Find the Notepad program There are a lot programs and files in the Windows folder so you will have to scroll Other Ways to Create a quite a bit to find the Notepad program Make sure the contents of the Windows folder Shortcut are being ponies alphabetically by name or you may never find it e Right click an empty Using the right mouse button drag the Notepad program from the area of any folder or the Windows folder to an empty area on your desktop as shown in Figure Windows Desktop and 5 19 select New gt Dragging items with the right mouse button causes a shortcut menu to appear with Shortcut from the copy move and create shortcut options Qoru menu Enter e path and name of Select Create Shortcut s Here from the shortcut menu amp The Calculator shortcut appear
11. Solitaire DER Close button T as Score 27 Time 497 NYY oan move items around your computer screen by dragging and dropping them with the Mouse To drag and drop something you 1 Move the mouse pointer over the object you A want to move then click and hold down the mouse button 2 While you are still holding down the mouse button move the mouse until the pointer is over the place you want to put the object then 3 Release the mouse button This will probably be the most entertaining lesson in the book because your assignment is to Start button master dragging and dropping by playing a game of Solitaire Microsoft included Solitaire with Windows to help people improve their mouse skills You ve probably noticed that a lot of people never stop practicing these skills with Solitaire Here s how to open Solitaire 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter One The Fundamentals 23 You may have trouble 1 e Click the Start button mastering drag and Remember the Start button is located in the bottom left corner of your screen The drop right away Don t Windows XP Start menu appears get discouraged this Point to the word All Programs is a tricky task for beginners Just keep practicing and you ll improve 2 The All Programs menu pops out to the right 3 Point to the word Games Another menu the Games menu pops out as shown in Figure 1 10 4 Click the word Solitaire You re finally there The S
12. essages that you haven t completed yet Your Organization s Name Here 262 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 9 10 Composing and Sending E mail Eatsa Lotsa igure 9 24 a Figure 9 SE o e To Enter the recipient s of the ness The New Message 7 Cc Send a copy of the message ese recipients window 69 To Subject Enter the subject of AfeNgessage Figure 9 25 TE The New Message toolbar Aria E Formatting Toolbar U Loy font and paragraph d formatting to your m mS nd to insert lines pictures and hyperlinks to Wags S Y all are invited to a no silverware spaghetti feast at my grandma s house on Saturday Here s what y all need to lt bring 1 a garbage bag to wear as a bib Body Type Ae ail message here as you processor 2 a bottle of moonshine or two for grandma would usin 3 bread or a salad Hope you can come Grandma makes the BEST spaghetti lotsa tabasco sauce and pork hocks RSVP to me ASAP Figure 9 24 Send the message to Encrypt the Outbox Cut message Encrypt Offjine Setasa Digitally sign Work priority message offline Outlook Express button Here s a quick explanati on how to compose and send an e mail message 1 Ifit s not opened start Outlook Express by clicking the Outlook Express on on the taskbar s Quick Launch toolbar The Outlok Express program appears Create Mail 2 Clic Create Mail button on the Outlook Express toolba
13. 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 1 23 e To Copy a File or Folder Hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while you drag the file or folder to the desired location in either pane of the window e To Create a New Folder Click the disk or folder where you want to put the new folder right click any empty area in the window and select New Folder from the shortcut menu Type a name for the folder and press lt Enter gt e To Delete a File or Folder Right click the file or folder select Delete from the shortcut menu type the new name and press Yes Using MS DOS e To Use the MS DOS Prompt Click the Start button and select All Programs Accessories Command Prompt AY e To Exit from the MS DOS Prompt Type EXIT and press lt Enter gt KG Quiz o 1 Computers store information on which types of disks ct that apply A Floppy disks Q B Hard disks a C Compact discs CD ROMs D Removable disks 2 Drives are named with one letter Most G have a floppy disk called A and a hard disk called C True or Fals 3 The purpose of your computer s oe ote O Select all that apply A Lose your important files B Store related files and programs me place C Make it difficult to delete thin s you really know what you re doing D Organize related files and infgr rmation on your computer 4 TXT DOC and BMP aR are all examples of A Three meanin
14. Number of copies Specifies the number of copies you want to print Your Organization s Name Here 68 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 3 10 Cutting Copying and Pasting Text Figure 3 17 Ei Letter WordPad File Edit View Insert Format Help The steps involved in Ce 64 amp SBR B cutting and pasting text Aa 10 M Westen N J Ie 1 Select the text gy Q you want to cut and Ne e Cut button on the anward Toolbar Th or object is removed from its Subject Glue Crisis C E onl th To the La Fanci Nails Company bought a set of your press on nails last month and was very displeased with original cOn them While pressing my La Fanci Nails on went to pet my poodle Pizzy and my hand and nails stuck to her shaqay little pelt That was in July M E Letter WordPad Sall w File Edit View Insert Format Help rs DDE 64 Arial U For Help press F1 2 Move the insertion point to where you want to place the aa cut text or object E the La Fanci Nails Company bought a set of your press on nails last month and was very diaig them While pressing my La Fanci Nails on went to pet my pq Ei Letter WordPad PB File Edit View Insert Format Help Cel hk Arial v a 3 Click the Paste button on a the Standard Toolbar to cue tae S paste the cut text or object bought a set of yours on nails last month a
15. If you want you can copy songs from your CD to your computer s hard drive 3 Make sure you are in Windows Media Player Full View not Skins View and click the Copy from CD tab on the Windows Media Player iaskbaa A list of the CD s songs appears Choose the songs you want to copy amp 4 Check each of the songs you want to copy to your hard drive ang tig Copy Music button Then lean back and wait The Windows Media Player copies the selected songs on the CD to you uter s local disk Cool You can access copied songs by clicking the MediagJ tab If you enjoy watching lava lamps or kaleidoscopes you re going 49 lov the Now Playing tab which displays a visualization of the song that is cup playing 5 Click the Now Playing tab The Now Playing tab appears as shown in Figure 7 14 In ou didn t notice the visualization actually responds and changes to the rhythm itch of the song that is currently playing The Windows Media Player comes wi zens of different visualizations To change the visualization click the buttons Since the Windows Media Player can play files from if dozens of different formats it has quite a few controls and options The most eo of the Windows Media Player s controls are the tabs located on the left side of the ws Media Player The following table describes what each tab does Table 7 9 Tabs on the Windows Button Description Now Playing Displays a graphic l representation of
16. Print You can save your WordPad file ee You can save your WordPad file as a text file rich text file text Using the Help Vie as a text file rich text file text Fi ure 3 27 file for MS DOS or Unicode file for MS DOS or Unicode g These formats provide greater These formats provide greater flexibility when working with flexibility when working with j l other programs Documents other programs Documents The displayed help topic that use multiple languages J that use multiple languages should be saved as rich text should be saved as rich text files files Figure 3 25 Ef WordPad amp Hide Back Contents Index Search 0 WordPad To change a font type Ga WordPad overview style or size A Common tasks Select the text th A sebe you want to chan Create a bulleted list On the Fo dick Font Indent a paragraph Change the alignment of a paragra Click th tions you Set or remove tab stops in paragra want Print Create Connections with Other Docum amp No Using the Help Viewer e You ca cify the font r new text by changing t settings before gin to type u can select all text at nce by clicking Edit and then clicking Select All Figure 3 27 When you ae how to do something in Windows or a Windows based program don t despair rograms come with a built in help feature Help is one of the greatest and sadly t used feature
17. Printer information Comment Status Ready Figure 10 14 Connecting you computer to a network printer isn t much different from installing a local printer to yay puter In fact if you already know how to install a local printer to your computer Still AN w to do it if you want the step by step procedure 1 ake sure you re logged on to the network Obviously you won t be able to install a network printer if your computer isn t connected to the network Open the Printers folder by clicking the Start button and selecting Printers and Faxes The Printers and Faxes folder appears _ Click the 4 Add a printer item in the Printer Tasks panel The first page of the Add Printer Wizard springs onto your screen Click Next The Add Printer Wizard may ask how the printer is connected to the computer whether it s a local printer or a network printer n probably install a network printer without even having to look a this lesson Chapter Ten Networking with Windows XP 283 5 Select A network printer or a printer attached to another computer option and click Next to continue Next the Add Printer Wizard asks you how you want to find and connect to the network printer You have several choices Find a printer in the directory If you re on a domain that uses Windows 2000 s Active Directory chances are you re not you can easily search the entire network for a specific printer Connect
18. Sound Recorder The Sound Recorder program appears as shown in rie Try recording a sound 2 Click the Record button talk briefly into you pmputer s microphone and then click the Stop button As you record your voice a waveform should in the Sound Recorder windows ssories as shown in Figure 7 6 If you don t see a wa m your microphone is shut off or is plugged into the wrong jack in your sound Or there is something wrong with your soundcard maybe you don t have one 3 Click the Play button to play O Take some time to explore Soun er s menus Under the File menu you can save a recorded sound or open a pr amp yously recorded sound The Effects menu lets you do some cool things with your f amp cprdings like adding echo to it reversing it or adjusting its volume 4 Close the Sound Reef program e sound you just recorded Table 7 4 Sound Recof E a a voice annotations or other sounds and save them to your Yeord voice annotations or other sounds and save them to your computer ra aS Re a oa Figure 7 5 The Sound Recorder ram Figure 7 6 Sound Record displays a waveform when it plays or records something _ Record button Sion DETON gt Play button Quick Reference To Open Sound Recorder e Click the Start button and select All Programs gt Accessories Entertainment Sound Recorder To Record a Sound 1 Click the L Record butt
19. and 12 point are the most commonly used font sizes Changing the font size is similar to changing font types S apes Format Font Pee a amp from the menu select 7 Make sure the To the La Fanci Nails Company line is still selecte S the font options you A list of font sizes appears dialog box and click 8 Select 14 from the Font Size list lt OK The font for the selected line is enlarged to 14 point So far you ve been using the Formatting toolbar to change the type e of fonts Another method of adjusting the type and size of fonts is to use Pe dialog box which you can open using the menu Since not all Windows pro have a Formatting toolbar you should know how to format fonts Eo method 9 Select Format Font from the menu The Font dialog box appears as shown in Figure 3 19 Ya are options for changing the font type and size as well as other form WF ions After you ve surveyed the Font dialog box you can close it witho lip the Cancel button 10 Click Cancel to close the Font dialog without making any changes king any changes by clicking gt Quick Reference Table 3 1 Examples of Font Types an Common Font Types AN fosehange rent Size e Select the point size from Ari Paral 8 poit t Ana ee IAA oct the Font Size list on Comic Sans MS Arial 10 point the Formatting toolbar Or Arial 12 au e Select Format Font mem a avi 1 on ae dialog box To Change Font Type e Selec
20. 2 Close the dialog box that appears then open the Windows Media Player 3 Click the Copy to CD or Device tab open All Audio and then select your music 4 Click Copy Music Your Organization s Name Here 1 96 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 7 19 Take a look at all of the different skins available in the Skin Chooser tab This skin is heart Windows Media Player icon We Apply Skin Apply Skin button Mode button Quick Reference To Change Windows Media Player Skins 1 Insert a blank CD into your CD R or CD RW drive 2 Start the Windows Media Player and click the Skin Oo Chooser tab 3 Choose a skin and cli the Apply Skin button To Alternate Between Skin Mode and Full Mode e Click the Mode button Lesson 7 14 Give your Windows Media Player a New Skin Windows Media Player File View Play Tools Help eis I J ______________ CC MED je Apply Skin More Skins Click Apply Skin to open the skin Default Media Player e Atomic a i e eMe y E a from CD S S Media Library Radio Tuner gt Optik yi Copyto CD padio or Device i Roundlet Rusty spla Too Windows Classic Windows XP Chooser y Figure 7 9 ayer is its ability to change skins In other words omize it to fit your personality Windows Media s and colors mda Player by clicking on the Media Player icon in Chooser tab If the Skin Ch
21. If a Web page is taking too long to display on your competeiiscreen you can stop loading the page and try again later Here s how to stog transmitting a page Click the Address bar type www microso m and press lt Enter gt Quick Reference After a second or two before the Micros me page completely loads click the Stop button on the t You can also try refreshing a sluggish or di reasons to refresh a Web page Kew To Use a Hyperlink eb page There are basically two e Click the hyperlink with th pointer e To attempt to view a Web page ke ON loading To Go Back to the e To update a Web page that information that is constantly changing Previous Page such as headline news storf qor financial information e Click the Back button on Click the Refresh button On the toolbar the toolbar Another way you can retu eviously visited Web sites is to use the Address bar To Stop the Transfer of which remembers every address that you ve manually typed into it Information Click the Addres ist arrow e Click the Stop button on A list of the Web a s you ve previously entered appears below the address bar the toolbar Select the http w yahoo com site from the list To Refresh a Web Page You return to o0 Web site e Click the Refresh button A on the toolbar To Return to a Web Address you Typed in the Address Bar e Click Address bar s arrow and select the Web address Your Organization s Name Here
22. Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 1 4 A Look at the New Windows XP Interface The current user name appears at the top of the Start menu amp Internet Internet Explorer th Microsoft Word 97 Microsoft Excel i HyperSnap Dx 4 E Fireworks 4 O Microsoft Access SES amp Dreamweaver 4 This area displays the programs you use most often If a program doesn t appear here you can find it under All Programs Lists all the programs that are installed on your computer om DY aw You ve probably already not the Start menu in earlie as My Computer a for launching ap The new Windqys with the Star exercise in Items ip t men 1Sa the Start button gt My Documents O My Recent Documents gt ce My Pictures My Music PL My Computer my network AN gt cont e Ww onect To _ 2 gt Faxes and Support Search I Run Log Off Shut Down The ri the Start me s you quick ac your documents it Yee system settings an also find three important icons here at were found on the Desktop in previous versions of Windows My Documents Provides a convenient location to save your files My Computer Provides a convenient location to save your files ae My Network Places Provides a convenient location to save your files d that Windows XP s Start menu is drastically different than ions All the icons that were formerly stored on the desktop such oc
23. watch your movie after it has been created click Yes when you get to step number 9 Oe would like to Quick Reference To Open a Project 1 Open Windows Movie Maker 2 Click the Open button to navigate to where your projects are saved and double click the project you want to open To Save a Project as a Movie 1 Click on a blank spot on the storyboard and click the Play button 2 When your project is done playing click the Save Movie button 3 Choose a setting and a title and click OK 4 Choose a file name and a location for your movie to be saved in 5 Click Save wait for your movie to be created and then click No Your Organization s Name Here 202 Microsoft Windows XP Chapter Seven Review Lesson Summary N Q WordPad e WordPad is a simple word processor that supports font and ara Kine The default file format for WordPad is Word 6 0 DOC files e Start WordPad by clicking the Start button and selecting All gS Accessories gt WordPad Notepad e Notepad is a simple text editor that can open and sO ASCII files that are smaller than 64K No formatting of any kind is supported e Start Notepad by clicking the Start button a ting All Programs Accessories gt Notepad Calculator Q e Calculator is an on screen cal e Start Notepad by clicking th rt button and selecting All Programs Accessories gt Calculator e You can switch betweQ
24. 1 Select the cell range D5 D17 and click the Comma Style button on ae Style the Formatting toolbar a utton xcel adds a Nunareds Separator e comma and two decima aces to the selected ce Clear step by step instructions rene Semen ere enone eae guide you through the exercise When you need to click something it appears like this ET 2001 CustomGuide com Introduction 9 e When you see a keyboard instruction like press lt Ctrl gt lt B gt you should press and hold the first key Ctrl in this example while you press the second key B in this example After you ve pressed both keys you can release them e There is usually more than one way to do something in Windows The exercise explains the most common method of doing something while the alternate methods appear in the margin Use whatever approach feels most comfortable for you e Important terms appear in italics the first time they re presented e Whenever something is especially difficult or can easily go wrong you ll see a NOTE careful e Our exclusive Quick Reference box appears at the end of every lesson You can us review the skills you ve learned in the lesson and as a handy reference when to know how to do something fast and don t need to step through the sample e Formatting a Worksheet Click cell A4 and type Annual Sales The numbers in this column should be formatted as currency Press lt Enter gt to confirm your e
25. 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Working with a Windows Program 57 Select Font from the Format menu The Font dialog box appears as shown in Figure 3 7 The Font dialog box is one of the most complex dialog boxes in the WordPad program and contains several types of components you can fill out You have to go to or select a control before you can use it You can do this by clicking the control with the mouse or by pressing the lt Tab gt key to move to the next control or lt Shift gt lt Tab gt to move to the previous control until the blinking cursor appears in it or it becomes highlighted First let s look at text boxes Look at the Font text box as shown in Figure 3 7 Text boxes are the most common component of a dialog box and are nothing more than the fill in the blank box you ve undoubtedly already used in many types of paper forms Text boxes are incredibly easy to use just select and type in the text you want You ve just filled out the text box nothing to it The next stop in our dialog box is the List Box You can find a list box directly beneath the Font text box A list puts several options together into a small box Sometimes list boxes contain y options that they can t all be displayed at once and you must click the list o croll Make sure the Font text box is selected and type Arial bar to move up or down the list See Figure 3 8 for an illustration of a scr Ox Click and hol
26. CustomGuide com Customizable Print On Demand Courseware 1502 Nicollet Avenue Suite 1 Minneapolis MN 55403 USA Tel 888 903 2432 www customguide com Courseware Evaluation A FREE Preview of Our Complete Courses EVALUATION USE ONLY NOT TO BE USED FOR TRAINING Terms and Conditions This version of CustomGuide s courseware is for preview evaluation purposes only and must under no circumstances be used for training purposes or distributed as user reference Viewing this content indicates your acceptance of these restrictions and any violation will be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law This material is copyrighted by CustomGuide Inc No part of this publication may be reproduced transcribed or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of CustomGuide Inc A Note About Print Quality These evaluation materials are saved in Adobe Acrobat format and print reproduction quality will be less than perfect The original CustomGuide courseware comes in Microsoft Word 97 2000 format and will print in at a much higher quality Please Show This Material to Your Training or IT Department It Could Save Them a Lot of Time and Money Microsoft Windows XP Your Organization s Name Here This Course Covers e Windows basics How to start your computer use the mouse a
27. N Windows asks where you want to save the image by presenting you with the Save As dialog box as shown in Figure 9 18 2 Navigate to the drive and folder where you want to save the image gj the image a different name if you want and click OK 4 Windows saves the image to the specified drive and folder The procedure for downloading and saving programs and other files i is almost the same as downloading and saving an image Here s how KO 3 Find the file you want to download right click it and selec e Target As from the shortcut menu ing this will our computer As You can usually also simply click a file you want to download sometimes open the file in Internet Explorer instead of savin with images you have to specify where you want to save th 4 Navigate to the drive and folder where you wantetoPpave the file give the file a different name if you want and click O Windows will download the file and save it to the nd folder you specified It may take several minutes or several hours to do the file depending on the file s size and how fast your connection to the Inte is Windows displays a dialog box that shows the progress of the download a in Figure 9 19 NOTE Make sure you remember whexgyou Save your downloaded files Many people download software wi thinking about where they re saving it only to be unable to find t nce it s finished downloading It makes sense to create and use qa called Downlo
28. d My Documents 4 My Recent Documents gt cd My Pictures amp My Music PL My Computer a My Network Places i Control Panel ea Connect To _ 2 Printers and Faxes Figure 1 7 mouse button Click the Start button to open the Windows XP Start menu Figure 1 6 Figure 1 8 Double click the My Computer icon to open it and display its contents Help and Support P Search 77 Run A Log Off A Shut Down Recycle Bin Close button File Edit View Favorites Tools C i C kl ed 7 nO Key Folders X Ju e Address Recycle Bin z Recycle Bin ol B i CONNLOG TXT INET Jeff QBW Microsoft 2 Empty the Re FrontPage E Ree all items a fe O New Office Open Office Sample Music Document Document you control your television set using a remote control you control Windows by using use and keyboard A mouse is a palm sized device that lets you point at select and e objects on your computer screen The mouse is linked to the pointer on your computer COpricca wen you move the mouse on your desk the pointer moves on the computer screen hink of the mouse as an electronic extension of your hand This lesson will show you how to KY perform the two most basic mouse actions clicking and double clicking 1 Rest your hand on the top of the mouse then move the mouse and watch Pointer as the arrow moves across the screen The arrow also called the cursor or pointer foll
29. fi If you re this far 1 ook you should already have a good sense of how to work with a Windows pro ost of the lessons in this chapter are the guided tour type and only a few of heny usual step by step exercises Don t worry these programs are all very simple and eao use so you shouldn t have any trouble figuring them out ree Programs lt 9 programs are what they do and if they ll work for your purposes M Prerequisites e How to use the mouse to click double click drop and drag and right click How to start programs in the Start Menu How to use menus toolbars and dialog boxes How to view and navigate through the contents of your computer disk drives and folders 180 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 7 1 WordPad Figure 7 1 Mrs Claus WordPad File Edit View Insert Format Help A simple word processor the WordPad accessory Dai Slo allows you to create letters Bl U Eire as Lae eae l a Poe Be po Bs and documents T 3 12 28 02 Subject legal services Dear Mrs Claus am a lawyer and am writing you to let you know that am offering 259 f of my marriage annulment services understand that you and Mr Santa Claus have beer agrried for hundreds of years but are you really fulfilled in making elf clothes and stables Are you happy living in Mr Claus s big red shadow Just think with my special legal offer you could end up with h
30. hard drive and will auto or folder errors Remember that you cannot have any files fro program cannot begin 5 lly fix any file isk open or the Click Start The files and folders on the C drive are checked and SQeres is displayed NOTE Try not to touch Windows while Error checkiy is running No it won t hurt anything but any time you make any c to your computer while Error checking is running Error checking starts Wil over again NOTE If Error checking reports any byt perform a thorough test that 1 atte of an imminent hardware failu ge and then run a thorough E sectors only available if you ood sign Bad sectors are often a sign ckup everything on the disk immediately cking test every few days If more bad sectors appear the driv ely fail shortly You shouldn t continue using floppy disks that have ba ggctors Click OK to close the Re fits window and click OK to close the Properties window That s all there is to sg prcresking You can also use Error checking on floppy disks which are notog or developing disk errors If you re checking a floppy disk make sure you Ny ct the thorough test option S K amp Check Now Quer Now button Quick Reference To Use Error checking 1 Open My Computer 2 Right click the disk you want to scan select Properties from the shortcut menu and click the Tools tab 3 Click the Check Now button 4 Specify if
31. i Up One Level button Click to move up one folder QY If necessary follow your instructor s directions to select the appropriate drive and folder where your practice files are located KY 3 Find and double click the Open Me file The Open Me file opens in the NotePad program the program it was created in as Open Me shown in Figure 4 12 You could review make changes to and then save the Open Me file if you wanted at this point Click the Notepad program s close button to close the program and the Open Me file gt The Notepad program closes 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 99 You ve already learned how to rename and delete a folder so the next few steps should be really easy for you because you rename and delete a file in exactly the same way Select the Open Me file Now we can rename the Open Me file using the File and Folder Tasks panel Select Hl Rename this file from the File and Folder Tasks panel type Text File as the new name for the folder then press lt Enter gt The Open Me file is renamed Text File Click the Text File to select it and then press the lt Delete gt key A dialog box may appear asking you to confirm the file deletion Click Yes to delete the selected file The Text File is deleted and disappears from the window Deleting a file isn t quit dangerous as deleting a folder is but you should always conside
32. paper clip V To Print a Message e Follow the above steps to read the message then select File Print from the menu or press lt Ctri gt lt P gt Click OK to print the message Your Organization s Name Here 268 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 9 13 Replying to a Message Re Figure 9 31 Fie Edit View Insert Format Tools Message Help O You can reply to a 3 A 0 amp 9 amp A ow amp A press fills in the nd subject fields Send Paste Undo Check i Attach Priority j Q message Out AgS To a C oe I m busy verrrrrry busy after work today Type your reply here Original Message From Emily To Jason Sent Monday November 19 2001 10 52 AM A copy or quote of the original message is included to help the reader know which message you are replying to Howdy Jason Figure 9 31 Sy Reply All You can reply to a message just like you goWid answer a letter This lesson explains how to Reply to All do it utton Q 1 Findand open the me you want to reply to Q You learned how to op d read messages in the previous lesson Next you need to Reply decide who you ragon to You have two choices Reply to Author e Reply to bw Sends the reply only to the author of the message button e Replyt Sends the reply to everyone who received the message 2 Click the A window a ption you want to use Reply to Author or Reply to All ars w
33. s Name Here 1 86 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 7 6 Creating Pictures with Paint Fi 7 8 The width of The height of W untitled Paint ge the picture the picture File Edit View Image Colors Help The Attributes dialog box Subut Figure 7 9 ight le _ Defaut You can move a pasted object in Paint by dragging and dropping ee Specify if the Specify the picture should units of be in color or measurement black and used in the white picture Figure 7 8 ae In the previous lesson you were intf amp duced to the Paint program in this lesson you ll get your hands dirty and actually a simple drawing in Paint Creating pictures in Paint is Ellipse tool easy simply click the too ant and your mouse pointer turns into that tool To draw a rectangle for example in A rectangle button tool and then click and drag a rectangle in the Paint area of the wg i 1 Make su Paint program is open To make a perfect Pietures can be just about any size Here s how to change a picture s dimensions circle or square click or e the corresponding amp gize shape tool and hold P 2 Image Attributes from the menu down the lt Shift gt key while you drag the Ry The Attributes dialog box appears as shown in Figure 7 8 Here you can pointer specify how Ww large you want your picture to be and if it should appear in color or black and white Ko Click the Inches option in the Units section set the
34. the object click and hold down the mouse button drag the a e cawn your computer s screen oett to a new place and then release the mouse button ar K 2 While you re still holding down the mouse button drag the object to the desired location on the screen 3 Release the mouse button Your Organization s Name Here 24 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 1 7 Using the Mouse Right clicking Figure 1 12 o Click Right Clicking Right click Figure 1 13 digs ies ait release the rig The right mouse button mouse button Shortcut menu for the Recycle bin Figure 1 14 Figure 1 12 The right mouse button Shortcut menu for the clock Toolbars _ __ Figure 1 15 Date Time Type Local Disk l _LUSTOMIZE NODNCEDONS File system NTFS The Local disk C g HB Used space 2 095 329 280 bytes Properties dialog box a5Cade Windows I Free space 12 998 025 216 bytes E WINdOWS Norzon tan Capacity 15 093 354 496 bytes Show the Desktop Q ED l Disk Ch Task Manager Drive C Allow Indexing Service to index this disk for fast file searching hg Lock the Taskbar W C Compress drive to save disk space Propertes B AN A Ay Figure 1 14 Figure 1 15 and double cRng and it s the mouse button you will use over 95 percent of the time when you work click You ica the left mouse button is the primary mouse button used for clicking cy indows So what s the right
35. 1 Establish a connection to the Internet Depending on how you connect to the Internet this may be an unnecessary step as Windows Update usually connects to the Internet for you If you use America Online however you will need to establish an Internet connection before starting Windows Update 2 Click the Start button and select All Programs gt Windows Update The Windows Update page appears in your Web browser as shown in Figure 8 31 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer 231 Follow any on screen instructions Windows XP may need to update the update program simply follow the on screen instructions to do this Click the Scan for Updates area of the Web page and follow the on screen instructions The Windows Update program will search and inventory the software and drivers that are installed on your computer and based on that information will retrieve any updated files The updated files are categorized some files are critical updates which you should probably download and install and other files are there just for fun such as additional desktop themes e Click Add to download an available update The update is added to the list of downloads to your computer AS Remember since you re on the Internet all these files are going to take a while Oy download Try not to download too many updates at once you can always ssh Windows Update service again l
36. 1 Click the file to select it and click Move this file from the File and Folder Tasks menu 2 Select the folder where you want to move the file and click OK Or 1 Select the file click Edit from the menu bar and select Move to 2 Select the folder you want to move the file to and click OK To Copy a File 1 Hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while you drag the file to the desired location you might have to open another My Computer window Or 1 Click the file to select it and select Copy this file from the File and Folder Tasks menu 2 Select the folder where you want to copy the file and click OK Or 1 Select the file click Edit from the menu bar and select Copy to from the menu 2 Select the folder where you want to copy the file and click OK Your Organization s Name Here 102 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 4 16 Restoring files and emptying the Recycle Bin Figure 4 17 The Recycle Bin shortcut menu a Recycle Bin cona n deleted files Z Recycle Bin does not contain deleted files is Lesson 4 8 Restoring a Deleted File and Emptying the Recycle Bin tf Recycle Bin File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ky Po lt s Ba Search i Folders Address w Recyde Bin You can also restore a file by right clicking it and selecting Restore from the shortcut menu Empty the Recycle Bin Recycle Bin Tasks ck Empty the Recycle Bin New
37. 4 Under the Insert menu point to and click the Date and Time option The Date and Time dialog box appears as shown in Figure 3 3 presenting you with several different date and time formats you can insert You ll learn more about dialog boxes in an upcoming lesson 5 Click the OK button The Date and Time dialog box disappears and the current date is inserted into the WordPad document Take a close look at the WordPad menu notice how every word in the menu has an underlined letter somewhere in it For example the F in the File menu is underlined Pressing the lt Alt gt key and then pressing the underlined letter in a menu does the same thing as clicking the menu with the mouse 6 Press the lt Alt gt key then press the lt F gt key The File menu appears Once a menu is open you can use the arrow keys on aS computer s keyboard to navigate through the menus or press any other nce letters in the menu wh 7 Press the Right Arrow Key lt gt gt The next menu to the right the Edit menu opens If you opened a menu a ne your mind it s easy to close it without selecting any commands Just cl piywhere outside the menu or else press the lt Esc gt key 8 Click anywhere outside the menu to close the menu witty selecting any commands NOTE The procedure for using menus and the general Roan of the menu is usually similar in most Windows programs So N aster the menus in one Windows program you will be
38. C osan Hide inactive icons You can resize the taskbar so it can display more information Figure 5 7 Position the pointer over the top edge of the taskbar and drag until the task bar is the size you want along locatQgi pre S S om of the screen ready for use Still some people think the taskbar should be different more convenient location on the screen Others don t like how the ever kbar always occupies a half inch of valuable desktop real estate at the bottom of the his lesson will show you how to move the taskbar to a new location on the screen o change the size of the taskbar and how to hide the taskbar to give you more room on screen ou will probably have to unlock the taskbar before you can move it Here s how KY 1 Right click the taskbar and uncheck Lock the taskbar from the shortcut menu Now you re free to move the taskbar to a new location on the screen 2 Position the mouse over a blank area of the taskbar and hold down the mouse button Move on to the next step and let s move the task bar to a new area on the screen 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Five Customizing the Taskbar and Desktop 1 31 11 12 Drag the taskbar to the left of your screen and release the mouse button as shown in Figure 5 6 An outline of the taskbar appears to show where you re moving the taskbar By dragging and dropping you ve moved the taskbar to the left side of t
39. Click the Color quality drop down list and select High 24 bit If your Color quality is already set to High then select Medium 16 bit or Highest 32 bit NOTE If only one option appears in the Color quality drop down list your video card is not properly installed You ll need to reinstall the video drivers software that came along with your computer or video card 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Six Customizing Windows 163 4 Click Apply A dialog box appears asking you confirm the changes you ve made to the display settings 5 Click OK to confirm the display setting changes Windows may have to restart the computer to change the display setting A dialog box will appear asking you if you like the new display settings Here again click Yes if you want to keep the new settings and No if you want to switch back to the original color depth If you don t do anything Windows assumes you don t like the new resolution setting or your monitor can t display the new resolution and switches back to the original display settings 6 Click No to return to the color depth setting For a more complete description of the various color depth settings you can use NS Table 6 5 Common Color Depths The maximum color depth or simultaneous Ry of colors you can display at once depends on how much memory is installe video card Most video cards have enough memory to display at least 16 bit tion Table 6 5
40. Double click to open an item single click to select Figure 6 24 Windows gives you the option to work and view windows in Classic Style or Web Style If you like some aspects of Web but just can t get used to some of the new procedures such as single clicking an 1 open it you can create your own custom style By creating a custom style you can u features from both Classic Style and Web Style For example you could view your deskt folders as Web pages Web Style but still have to double click items to open them c Style In previous versionsgf Windows you were given the option to view windows in Classic or Web style Thi is another guided tour lesson to help you become familiar with creating a Custom StyQeould you ever want to use it 1 he Start button click on the Control Panel select Appearance A Themes and click Folder Options Ore Folder Options dialog box automatically displays the General tab as shown in N Figure 6 24 Refer to Table 6 7 Custom Setting Options for a description of each of QY the options Click Cancel when you re finished Actually you might want to test out some of the custom settings and see if any of them work for you Many power Windows users prefer using their own custom style instead of the styles already designed by Windows 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Six Customizing Windows 171 Table 6 7 Custom Setting Options Option Description Tasks Show
41. Rich Text Format rtf Figure 3 32 By saving your files in rela ers right away you make them easier to find and don t have to do as much file ma ent later This lesson will show you how to save your files in different locations You tals learn how to save files in different file formats 1 Open the File A menu ad program by clicking the Start button and selecting rograms Accessories WordPad from the program The yes program appears 2 AY e Open button on the Standard toolbar pen Dialog box for the WordPad program appears as shown in Figure 3 32 ore we open a file first let s take a closer look at the Open dialog box Notice the olbar that appears near the top of the dialog box as shown in Figure 3 31 If several of the buttons on the toolbar look somewhat familiar they should because they re the same toolbar buttons that you ll find in My Computer and Windows Explorer When you re Opening or saving a file you can navigate through the drives folders and files on your computer just like you do in My Computer and Windows Explorer Navigate to and open your practice folder or floppy disk Your computer stores information in files and folders just like you store information in a filing cabinet To open a file you must first find and open the folder where it s saved 3 The Save dialog box has its own toolbar that make it easy to browse through your computer s drives and fold
42. Select the folder and click rr Move this folder from the File and Folder Tasks menu in the side panel 2 Select the folder or disk where you want to move the folder and click OK To Copy a Folder e Hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while you drag the folder to the desired location you might have to open another My Computer window Or 1 Select the folder and click A Copy this folder from the File and Folder Tasks menu in the side panel 2 Select the folder or disk where you want to move the folder and click OK To Delete a Folder e Select the folder and press the lt Delete gt key Click Yes to confirm the folder deletion Or e Select the folder and click Delete this folder from the File and Folder Tasks menu in the side panel Click Yes to confirm the folder deletion Your Organization s Name Here 98 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 4 6 Opening Renaming and Deleting a File Figure 4 12 A Open Me Notepad Dl Practice J File Edit View Favorites Tools Help File Edit Format View Help Double clicking the Open This is a practice text file Q O A Ps ezO Me file opens it in the Address O C CustomGuide Windows XP Practice g co Notepad program File and Folder Tasks GME w CE Rename this fle gt this file a rade Show Conse i 4 1 Gy Move this file aiii Figure 3 D Copy this file X w S t fil t h a a pe as CARBRAKE Current Homework 3 elect
43. Standard and Scientific modes by selecting View Scientific or Standard from the Cy Sound Recor e Sound Regard is a digital tape recorder you can use if you have a sound card and speakers K computer Sound Recorder saves its recordings as digital WAV files d Recorder by clicking the Start button and selecting All Programs Accessories gt igtedia gt Sound Recorder ecord a Sound Click the Record button and speak into the microphone Click the Stop tton when you re finished Q xo To Play a Sound Click the Play button gy Paint e Paint is a drawing program that can use paint to create and view pictures and graphics The default file format for Paint is bitmap BMP files e Start Paint by clicking the Start button and selecting All Programs Accessories Paint 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Seven The Free Programs 203 Creating Pictures with Paint e To Use a Paint Tool Click the paint tool button The mouse pointer turns into that specific tool e To Change the Size of a Paint Picture Select Image Attributes from the menu Specify the picture size and click OK Play Games e To Play a Built in Game Click the Start button and selecting All Programs Accessories gt Games and selecting the game you want to play amp amp Character Map S e The Character Map program lets you insert special symbols not found on the keyboard suc or e Start Character
44. The three letter extension of a file is normally displayed in Windows XP True or False Homework Open My Computer View the contents of your Local Disk C Create a new folder in the root directory of your Local Disk C e Name the new folder Project Files n S Insert a floppy disk in the A drive and copy the Project Files folder there Delete the Project Files folder from the C drive iO Open the Recycle Bin and find the deleted Project Files folder Do you ge to eae P MDMA retrieve it Open Windows Explorer and view the contents of the A drive Q Use the Windows Explorer View menu to display the contents ty A drive in List view 10 While you re still in List view sort the files in alphabetic 11 Use the Start menu s Search feature to find all the les gy readme txt on your C drive Open one of these files by double clicking 1 O Quiz Answers Q 1 A B C and D Computers can store RP an on any of these disk types 2 True 3 BandD V 4 B File extensions which are o identify the file type 9 B and D My Computer a computer and allow yo 6 True Double clicki 7 C Double click 8 True Right ck displays the iffdows Explorer both display the contents of your nage your computer s files and folders or folder opens it to open it and display its contents an object and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu rties of the object 9 A
45. a network you re using e To connect computers to a network you need a network i operating system and a hub depending on the type Browsing the Network e To Browse the Network Click the Start m select u My Network Places icon and click Entire Network in the Other Places p ouble click the type of network you want to browse and then find and double click the netw ain that contains the computer to want to browse Finally find and double click the conifer that contains the files or folders you want to use then Find and double click the shared da folder e To Map a Network Drive Open etwork Places and find the computer and folder you want to map right click that folder a lect Map Network Drive from the shortcut menu Select a Drive letter from the Drive list aS ck the Reconnect at login check box if you want to permanently map the network fold d Network Drive Open My Computer or Windows Explorer right click ant to disconnect from and select Disconnect Network Drive from the e To Disconnect the network dr shortcut menu Mapping stwork Drive T Network Drive Open My Network Places and find the computer and folder you want to ight click the folder and select Map Network Drive from the shortcut menu Select a Drive rom the Drive list and check the Reconnect at login check box if you want to permanently the network folder o Disconnect a Mapped Network Drive Open My Computer or Windows Explorer right click shortcut
46. amp Share this folder from the File and Folder Tasks panel If you don t know the exact name of the user account s or group s clic Advanced to open the Advanced Select Users or Groups dialog box shown in Figure 10 33 and click Find Now to browse all available accounts and groups Select the user account s or group s and RU OK OK when you re finished Great Now you can grant or deny permissions for the user account or grok and click the Security 5 Select the group or user account whose permissions you o modify tab and then check or uncheck the permissions you want to MA r deny 3 If the user account or Repeat for all the groups and or user accounts group you want to assign permissions to isn t listed click Add otherwise skip ahead to Step 6 4 If you know the name of the user account s or group s enter it them in Table 10 3 Types of Security Permissions R the text box and click OK Permission Description If you don t know the PU COND ty at ee a exact name of the user account s or group s Refer to Table 10 3 Types of Security Permissions for more in on about the different types of permissions Move on to the next step whe ave specified the permissions for all the groups and or user account gt 6 Click OK to close the Folder Properties dialog bp click Advanced to open the Advanced Select Users or Groups dialog box and click Find Now Read amp Execute Users May
47. and then release the mouse button ing and Dropping e To Drag and Drop mouse button Vil location on th Using theeleuse Right clicking To Diy n Object s Shortcut Menu Point to the object and click the right mouse button Ow s from the shortcut menu with the left mouse button se a Menu without Selecting Anything Click anywhere outside the shortcut menu with wy left mouse button or press the lt Esc gt key Pein the Keyboard 4 e To Use a Keystroke Combination Press one key while holding down the other key For example press the lt Tab gt key while you re holding down the lt Alt gt key Exiting Windows and Turning off Your Computer e To Shut Down Windows Save any files you ve been working on exit all your programs click the Start button select Shut Down select the Shut Down option and click OK 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter One The Fundamentals 31 Quiz 1 Microsoft Windows is a an A Word processing program B Database program C Operating System D Graphics program 2 Windows uses only the left mouse button True or False AS 3 Which of the following moves the pointer to another location on screen C A Pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard QY B Moving the mouse until the pointer points to that spot AD C Moving the mouse until the pointer points to that spot and click the left nou button D Moving the mouse until the pointer points to that spot and click th
48. dialog box Click the Play button at the bottom left corner of t ilog box to listen to Start Windows Click Cancel to return to the Sounds and Audio Devices Megprtics dialog box Quick Reference O To Assign a Sound to a WwW Specific Windows Event 1 Click the Start button gt and click Control Panel Sounds Speech and 4 e Audio Devices amp 2 Select Change the Sound Scheme 3 Select the event you want WN to change from the Event Yor list X 4 Click the Browse button and specify the location QY and name of the sound A file you want to assign to KY the event Click the Play button to listen to the selected sound 5 Click OK Your Organization s Name Here 1 68 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 6 10 Adjusting the Mouse Mouse Properties Figure 6 22 Buttons Pointers Pointer Options Wheel Hardware The Buttons tab of the Button configuration i i _ Switch primary and secondary buttons Switch the primary and secondary b Mouse Properties dialog box iittoceyuustepmsyindosad A of the mouse if you are left KA as selecting and dragging Figure 6 23 Double click speed Double click the folder to test OUrsermrg 1 Drag the slider to cnans le click The Motion tab of the ga a tare speed Mouse Properties dialog Speed Slow Fas Double click the folde the box double click spel SS L Tum on ClickLock gt Check the box tagturn On ClickLock a Enables you to highlight or drag
49. ey Know the following memory terminology Term Size Byte A single character such althe letter j or number 8 Kilobyte K or KB 1 024 bytes a typed Megabyte MB or MEG 1 048 578 bytes Sie Gigabyte GB or GIG Several encycl gedia Sets Your Computer Double click the My Computer icon on th computer Double click a disk drive in the My juter window to display the disk drive s contents To View the Properties of somes Right click the object and select Properties from the shortcut menu For ongle icking a hard drive and selecting Properties from the shortcut ows Desktop displays the contents of your menu would display how ace is left on the hard disk Opening a Folde AV Double click open it and display its contents To Move Bagk orUp to the Previous Level or Folder Click the Up button on the toolbar click the Back Jalttow on the toolbar or click the Address Bar on the toolbar and select the appropriate drive or ger Crey and Renaming a Folder N PN reate a New Folder Open the disk or folder where you want to put the new folder Select Make a new folder task from the File and Folder Tasks panel or right click any empty area in the window and select New Folder from the shortcut menu or select File New Folder from the menu Type a name for the folder and press lt Enter gt To Rename a Folder Click the folder to select it select mij Rename this folder from the File
50. m toe CONS VIEW xi cevzcdsasccssossserdersaerceees 106 len alid Menesianos 12 left mouse button ccc eceeeeeeeeeees 20 MSU OX E Siene e e 56 E VOW catty eed ot ar EET E T 106 logging on password changing ccccceeees 288 LOOK tS tusina aai 62 LPT DOP ce sinces siedeatenantarunsvemerieuscdateeeatin 224 PY COS saisuattesianptoatiimnt aauiunteetaermnnat 253 M MAXIMIZING a WINKOW ccccccceeeeeeees 36 MD command DOS 119 megabyte MB crctersacesenctetieneneniadatoes 89 A T Rene ne Teer 52 MIMIMIZING a WINdOW ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 36 TINOUS a 20 Clie lt 0 1 oe eon nee et er nee eee nee eee 20 double click speed change 168 double clicking 0 0 0 ccc eeececeeeeeeeeeeees 20 dragging and dropping e 22 left mouse button 2 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeees 20 POMMED sg iicihandetset aeetscsese See pointers Your Organization s Name Here 304 index PONNE ania een 20 right mouse button cesses 24 right clicking acccc creak spcondedseadienzendestaanss 24 Settings Change cccccceeeeeeeeeees 168 moving DUNC S E E E TN T E 100 TONET u ea A 96 WO W onera 41 MS DOS commands 0 000eeee 119 MS DOS prompt ccccceeeeeeeeees 118 My Compute sista tide ees 90 My COMpPULeD es ntaa 16 My DOCUMENIS eei ena 16 My Network Places cccceseeeeeeeees 16 N MAMI OIL GS eae NE 62 MEUW OFKS oair EE EaR 276 client s
51. press lt F1 gt to open it 2 Click the Index tab to bring it to the front The Index tab appears in front of the Help Window This time let s get some help on how to save files in WordPad 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Working with a Windows Program T T 3 Inthe Type in the keyword to find box type the word Saving The Index topics list box displays all index entries that begin with the words Saving as shown in Figure 3 28 A help topic called Saving Documents is listed see what this topic is about 4 Double click the Saving Text subtopic to open it The Topics Found dialog box appears We need to choose a topic 5 Double click the Create Open or Save a WordPad Document topic Information on saving changes to a document appears in the right pane of the Help window The Search function is another way that you can search for Help topics Search 1s mucf more specific and powerful than either Help s Contents or the Help Index Search n amp allows you to search for specific information 6 Click the Search tab Next you must specify what help you want to look for 7 Inthe Type the word s you want to find box type the wordgave and click the List Topics button Both the words and topics lists are updated to show all help topics Qi the word Save You can refine a help search by typing in more AO rd 8 Inthe Type the word s you want to find box type a ace gt then the words File a
52. re an expert at doing it To replace text select ny the text you want to Place the insertion point immediately in front of the word August in the replace and type the QY first body sentence of the paragraph new text you want lt AS You learned how to move the insertion around using the mouse earlier in this chapter 2 replace it with Actually you can place the insertion point before or after the text you want to select Click and hold down the mouse button and drag the mouse across the word August the words should be highlighted Release the mouse button when you re finished The word August should be highlighted in blue as shown in Figure 3 13 Selecting text with the mouse can be a little tricky at first especially if you re still a novice at using the mouse When you select text anything you type will replace the selected text 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Working with a Windows Program 65 3 Type July The word July replaces the selected text August A quick way to select a single word is to double click the word you want to select 4 Double click the word Trauma in the Subject line 5 Type Crisis The word Crisis replaces the word Trauma You can also use the keyboard to select text if you don t like using the mouse To select text using the keyboard move the insertion point before or after the text you want to select press and hold down the lt Shift gt key whil
53. server Wind 98 NT 200 Peand possibly Ietware N amp O ee a i Figury Workstation Workstation Client Server Network Figure 10 3 QY K so what exactly is a network A network is several computers printers and other devices A hat are connected together with cables This allows the computers to talk with each other and share information and resources usually files and printers Networks vary in size they can be as small as two computers connected to each other by cable or they can span the entire globe the Internet is actually the world s largest network So what are the benefits of networking Plenty e Share Information Networks allow you to share files and programs Before networks people had to save their files on floppy disks to exchange information This wasted a lot of time especially if the computers were located in opposite ends of the building 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Ten Networking with Windows XP 277 e Share Equipment Computers connected to a network can share equipment to reduce costs For example rather than buying a printer for each computer everyone can share one central network printer e Use Network Software Software designed for networks lets people send and receive electronic mail e mail with other users on the network schedule meetings with other users on the network and share databases When you re browsing the Web you re actually usin
54. together Figure 9 2 Web pages are stored on Web servers computers that are permanently connected to the Internet Lesson 9 1 Introduction to the Internet Figure 9 1 The Internet is the largest computer Wetwork in the world It consists of millions of computers all over the planet all connec each another e 60 s when the United States military worried that a nuclear uter systems there weren t many of them back then So it ar apart from each other and connected them with some super fast telephone lines s e computers could talk to each other If a nuclear bomb blew up one computer another puter could instantly take over thus the computer network wouldn t go down YearsPagsed and other organizations such as colleges and universities started The Internet was born 1 bomb could destroy its placed several co connecting omputers to this growing network to share information Although nternet has been around a long time it wasn t until the 1990 s that someone thou wonderful idea called the World Wide Web The World Wide Web is what you ink of when you think of the Internet although it s really just a part of the Internet consists of millions of documents that are stored on hundreds of thousands of ters that are always connected to the Internet These documents are called Web pages pro T you can find Web pages on every subject imaginable from your local newspaper to e line ca
55. you can open and pp 8 7 p just like another drive on your computer which is much faster than having to e through the network again and again to find it First you need to open the shared drive Older you want to map A 1 Click the Start button and select My Network Places from the Start My ka y Places The My Network Places window appears displaying all the computers on the network as shown in Figure 10 9 2 Select Entire Network from the Other Places panel Windows XP displays all the types of networks to which your computer is connected For example your organization may have both a Novell network and a Microsoft network If this weren t confusing enough often computer may be and often are connected by several different types of networks 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Ten Networking with Windows XP 281 Double click the type of network you want to browse Windows XP displays all the network domains and workgroups to which your computer 1s connected Double click the network domain or workgroup that contains the computer to want to browse Since most large organization may have dozens of network domains and workgroups you will need to know the name of the network domain or workgroup where the computer you want to browse resides Ask your helpful network administrator amp When you double click a network icon it displays all the computers connected to the network Find and double click
56. 11 55 AM Seniors N Paris RES Nap Image 7 13 1999 12 35 PM E E Seniors s ext Document 8 18 1999 11 35 AM Figure 4 22 While in Details view click the column heading you want to use to sort the items Click the column heading again to sort the items in reverse order When you work with files and folders or o computer you may find that you need to change how you view information ongs screen This lesson will show you how to change the appearance of items using one of lt ww modes Thumbnails Icons Tiles List or Details te Experiment to find the view that best for you You ll also learn how to change the order in which files and folders are sgrted You can sort the contents files and folders by name date when they were created type what type of file they are Start button 1 Click the Start utton and select My Computer The My Co indow appears 2 Navigat ME Windowgnormially displays items as icons by default Verif you are viewing your computer s contents as icons by My Computer se g open your Practice folder or floppy disk View Icons from the menu xy display more items in a window at a time by using List view Try switching to iSMVview Now m The items are displayed as small icons in a list Details view displays information Thumbnails gt about each item including the name size type of item and when it was created or last K MYelect View List from the m
57. 252 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 9 5 Search the Web MSN Search Kirby Puckett Microsoft Internet Explorer Figure 9 10 Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q x amp x E A Psh Jg Favorites QP Media E2 R ee Addres s http search msn com results asp FORM sCPN amp RS CHECKED amp un docav 1 amp g 22Kirby 20Puckett 22 Search Companion Search the Web for You can search the Web with Internet Explorer s integrated search function ee Mspeling Correction Type your question below For a Figure 9 11 Eang use complete 5 of ab 56 ta Kirby Puckett Who is Kirby Puckett You can search the Web PEREAT with Yahoo Sample question Get the Top 10 Most Popular Sites for Kirby Puckett Find a federal agency 1 Puckett Kirby MSN Encarta You may also want to Encyclopedia provides a brief career overview for this slugging champio htto encarta msn com ind Concise asp 7ti 06DACO00 iD Search this computer fo a ws flee Sports illustrated Cooperstown Calls Puckett amp Winfield Article chronicles the celebration for major league baseball oi Winfield and Kirk induction into the Baseball Hall of Fame httpo sportsillustrated cnn com baseball mlb news 2001 amp S 3 Puckett Kirby CBS SportsLine Read all about this Baseball Hall of Famer and his ancy vinnesota Twins in The Online Library htto cbs sportsline com u baseball bol ballplayers yckett_ Kirby htm lt M Fi
58. 3 64MB A HyperSnap DX 4 5 49MB j5 iambic TinySheet4 for Palm Computing Platform O Figure 8 17 Confirm File Deletion a 3 P j Are you sure you want to completely remove som its components O Figure 8 18 You ve finally finished thaga ure game you ve spent 100 hours on and since you no longer need the game you de Wle to reclaim the 200 megabytes it occupies on your hard drive So how do your or erase a program that you no longer need from Windows You ll learn how 1 son Before Windows oving programs from the computer was a very messy process so messy in fact that most people never removed programs they no longer needed The unused programs jusjgeat ere taking up valuable space on the hard drive Times have changed and removing m ograms is a breeze with Windows XP The following steps should remove all but tham Qelligerent obsolete programs from your computer 1 R the Control Panel by clicking the Start button and selecting ontrol Panel Add or Remove Programs window automatically selected as shown in Figure 8 17 Hopefully most of the Q The Add or Remove Programs window appears with the Change or Remove Programs caang or Remove rograms programs installed on your computer should appear somewhere on this list in alphabetical order 2 Find and select the program you want to remove from your computer and click the Remove button Be absolutely sure you want to remove the program as it will be com
59. 4 Closing a Window Lesson 2 5 Moving a Window Lesson 2 6 Sizing a Window 5 Lesson 2 7 Switching Between Wigdows Lesson 2 8 Tiling and Cascadi Chapter Three Workin Lesson 3 1 How to Use Lesson 3 2 How to U Lesson 3 3 Fillin Lesson 3 4 Enter Lesson 3 5 EGER arian E EEE EEA AAE EEEE ANETTES EEEN Lesson 3 6 Page Vata Ope mon a TE suredir EE A ERNEA EEN eee 62 Lesson 3 cting Replacing and Deleting Text cc ccccccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 64 Lesson om OI cess ese rudna EE E tease nn eesti EAEEREN 66 B cicss os We ese al eg 61018110 8a ly cee eee pee ee eee eee 67 Lesson 3 10 Cutting Copying and Pasting Text ccccccccecececceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 68 Lesson 3 11 Changing the Font Type and Size ccccceessecsseseseessssesssesesssssssssssessseseeaees 70 Lesson 3 12 Using Bold Italics and Underline c cece ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetssssessessesesssseeaes 72 Lesson 3 13 Changing Paragraph Alignment cccccccesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseeaaes 73 Lesson 3 14 Getting Help by Contents 00 0 ccccccsccecccceccceceeeceeeeeceeceeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeees 74 Lesson 3 15 Getting Help with the Help Index and Search ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 76 4 Microsoft Windows XP Y Chapter Five Customizing the Taskbar a N xo Lesson 3 16 Saving and Opening Files in Different Locations cceceeeeeeessttteeeees 78 Chapter TRES REVIEW merreni
60. 510 Modem Unknown Siera Wireless Standard PCMCIA Card Modem 5 1 2535 0 Standam Er This driver is digitally signed Tell me why driver signing is important d new hardware gadget to your computer you need to make sure Windows nd operate it Windows communicates to your computer s hardware ng a small piece of software called a driver A driver is like a computerized ual that tells Windows how to communicate and operate all the hardware your computer Anytime you XP can talk it er you install a new piece of hardware to your computer such as a modem or network you need to install the driver for that particular piece of hardware If you re lucky the Found New ce of hardware is a Plug and Play device and Windows XP will automatically notice that Hardware icon Ov installed a new component to your computer and step you through the installation process Plug and Play devices are specially designed devices that Windows can automatically If Windows XP detect and setup to work with your computer making them a breeze to install When you re automatically detect purchasing a new toy for your computer try to purchase a Plug and Play device a new device the Found New Hardware If you re not so lucky Windows won t automatically detect the new hardware device and icon will appear in the you ll have to install the driver yourself This lesson will help you install a hardware device notific
61. 95 1 599 Mileage 35 0 2 5 Jan 99 Mileage 35 0 11 20 1 5 99 Airfare VISA 5 Jan 99 Airfare VISA 1 299 00 1 312 00 17 99 Lodging Check 7 Jan 99 Lodging Check 69 00 0 75 30 17 99 Meals AMEX y 7 Jan 99 Meals AMEX 8 50 0 9 17 17 99 Taxi Cash 0 22 M2 7 Jan 99 Taxi Cash 22 00 22 00 1 8 99 Incidentals YISA 4 8 Jan 99 Incidentals VISA 1 8 99 Postage Cash 0 8 Jan 99 Postage Cash 1 10 99 Mileage I 10 Jan 99 Mileage 1 11 99 Other VISA 11 Jan 99 Other VISA 1 12 99 Cell Phone Call 12 Jan 99 Cell Phone Call Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 In this lesson you will learn how to apply number formats Applying number formatting changes how values are displayed it doesn t change the actual information in any way Excel is often smart enough to apply some number formatting automatically For example if you use a dollar sign to indicate currency such as 548 67 Excel will automatically apply the currency number format for you The Formatting toolbar has five buttons Currency Percent Comma Increase Decimal and Decrease Decimal you can use to quickly apply common number formats If none of these buttons has what you re looking for you need to use the Format Cells dialog box by selecting Format gt Cells from the menu and clicking the Number tab Formatting numbers with the Format Cells dialog box isn t as fast as using the toolbar but it gives you more precision and formatting options We ll use both methods in this lesson
62. Atal Main Window or Document For Help press F1 Figure 2 4 Located in every window are severaPlittle buttons menus and controls that you use to control the program and window Be they appear in every Windows program you re going to have to learn what these lit tons menus and controls are and learn how to use them Here s the good news jan CON can find your way around a window for one program you ll be familiar with the wj for most programs since this window menu button concept appears in just abo Windows program There are no exercl s or homework for you in this lesson it s just here to help you become familiar with th parts of a window All you have to do is look at Figure 2 4 and then refer to Table 2 1 P ra Window to identify what you re looking at And dan Eyy you ll get a chance to play with some of these buttons and menus later on 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Two Working with a Window 37 Table 2 1 Parts of a Window Title bar Displays the name of the program or window Minimize button Minimizes a window hiding it from your screen but keeping it running in your computer s memory ready for quick use You can minimize a program you re not using so that it is still running but is out of sight Maximize Restore Depending on the size of the window this button toggles between maximize button and restore Here s what each one does Maximize Enlarges the win
63. B an ny of these will bring you back to the previous level or folder 10 C symbol next to a folder in Windows Explorer means the folder con subfolders 11 True 12 A C and D You can use any of these methods to select multiple files and folders 13 C You can easily save a file in a different location by opening the drive and or folder where you want to save the file and clicking Save 14 False File extensions are normally hidden in Windows XP Your Organization s Name Here Chapter Five Customizing the S Taskbar and Chapter Objectives V Prerequisites e How to use the mouse to click double click Move size and hide the Taskbar Adjust your computer s volume drop and drag and right click Customize the Start Menu e How to use menus Work with the Quick Launch Toolbar toolbars and dialog boxes Open recently used files enon Start a program with the Run co navigate through the contents of your Add shortcuts to the Desktop AY computer disk drives fol Start a program when Wi tarts URLAR How to create move copy and delete files and folders When you turn on your computer ndows loads and eventually pops to life on your screen the first things you see a esktop and taskbar Not only are the desktop and taskbar the first things you see you start Windows they never leave your computer at all unless you shut it off N That s because the taskbar and desktop are two of the most
64. Browse to and select the file you want to add to the playlist Listen to Internet Radio Stations e To Listen to an Internet Radio Station Start the Windows Media Player and click the Radio Tuner tab Double click the radio station you want to listen to Your Organization s Name Here 204 Microsoft Windows XP X G Copy Music to a CD or Portable Device e To Copy Music to a CD or Other Portable Device Insert a blank CD into your CD R or CD RW drive close the dialog box that appears and open Windows Media Player Click the Copy to CD or Device tab open All Audio and then select your music Click Copy Music Give Your Windows Media Player a New Skin e To Change Windows Media Player Skins Start Windows Media Player and cligithe Skin Chooser tab Choose a skin and click the Apply Skin button e To Alternate Between Skin Mode and Full Mode Click the Mode Windows Movie Maker Requirements e Know common video sources Camcorder VCR DVD Player rA or TV Broadcast to your computer Cables a e Know what things you will need in order to record a video x Connector and Minimum Computer Requirements Recording a Video with Windows M O e To record a video Start windows Movie Maker e Record button choose the quality setting and the record time limit and click t button and the Record button again e To Stop Recording a Video Before the Time Limit is Finished Click the Stop button underneath the video s
65. Client server networks are more NO r to administer and much more powerful than peer to peer networks That s wh y are used to connect computers in most businesses The disadvantages of client networks are that they require special expensive software such as Wind gys XP Server or NetWare and they are more complicated to install and configure tha o peer networks Only Windows XP Professional supports client server n g Figure 10 1 shows the basic parts in a ne rk The following table explains what they are Table 10 1 Network Compon amp Network Interface A netw erface card is a device that plugs into your computer and Card NIC 4 connects each computer to the network and allows your computer to her computers and devices on the network Cables sples are the wires that physically connect the computers printers and other Fquipment on a network A hub is a device where all the cables on a network connect similar to a power Strip Network Operating Your operating system must provide networking capabilities Windows XP and Software Windows XP have peer to peer networking capabilities Windows XP Professional and NetWare have client server capabilities Your Organization s Name Here 278 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 10 4 The My Network Places window gives you access to folders and files on your computers Figure 10 5 The available types networks Figure 10 6 The availab
66. Company Subject Glue Crisis bought a set of your press on nails last month and was very displeased with them While pressing my La Fanci Nails on went to pet my poodle Pizzy and my h g Cael 44 amp Ben B __ Wo ai To the La Fanci Nails Company Subject Glue Crisis bought a set of your press on nails last month and was very displeased with them While pressing my La Fanci Nails on went to pet my poodle Pizzy and my hand and nails stur g Please reconsider the strength of your product Figure 3 22 This paragraph is left aligned This paragraph is left aligned This paragraph is left aligned This paragraph is left aligned This paragraph is left aligned This paragraph is left aligned This paragraph is left aligned This paragraph is left aligned This paragraph is center aligned This paragraph is center aligned This paragraph is center aligned This paragraph is center aligned This paragraph is center aligned This paragraph is center aligned This paragraph is center aligned This paragraph is center aligned Figure 3 23 This paragraph is aligned right This paragraph is aligned right This paragraph is aligned right This paragraph is aligned right This paragraph is aligned right This paragraph is aligned right This paragraph is aligned right This paragraph is aligned right Right Align This paragraph is justified This paragraph is justified This paragraph is justified This par
67. Controls on the Volume Control Dialog Box Volume Volume Control Adjusts the overall playback volume of the sound card Wave Adjusts the playback volume level of digitally recorded sour as wav files N SW Synth Adjusts the playback volume level of your sound care pusic synthesizer and MIDI files Adjusts the recording volume level for a microp 7 CD Player Adjusts the playback volume level computer PC Speaker Adjusts the n of just the speakers on your computer S Re S 2 Y u re playing and audio CD in your and Audio Devices click Sounds and Audio Devices and check the Place volume icon on new AS Quick Reference To Adjust Your Computer s Volume e Turn the dial if you have one on your computer s speakers Or e Go to the Start Menu and click All Programs gt Accessories gt Entertainment gt Volume Control and adjust the volume To Turn the Volume Off 1 Open the Volume Control dialog box 2 Click the Mute All check box underneath the Volume Control Your Organization s Name Here 1 56 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 6 4 Changing Windows Colors and Appearance Display Properties Effects F igure 6 T 8 Use the following transition effect for menus and p i ade effec v The Ap pearan ce ta b of the S the a method to smooth LS Display Properties dialog Inactive Window ClearType z A box and the defau
68. Countdovm the top Alte ative ck hi music you would like to Play 56k Added to M ation Pop Shop Christina My P il Ki listen to here ya Pi Play 28k P to My Stations eee ee WTC P NPR National Public Radio or Device Skin Chooser D Radio Free Virgin Liquid Lounge Recently Played Stations A 3 to fl Billboard Radio F Pay 28k Ade iton ations 3 When you finish your search and find a station you d like to listen to double click the station Figure 7 17 Windows Media a Player icon You can use the Windows Oo to listen to radio stations from around the world that are broadcast or i Sen e Internet Quick Reference l Start the Wingo Media Player by clicking the Media Player icon and click the uner tab To Listen to an Internet Windows ompt you to establish a connection to the Internet at this point apenas The Radio Tun i tty self explanatory Just follow the instructions in Fi 7 17t 4 Start the Windows Media e Radio Tun is pretty self explanatory Just follow the instructions in Figure 7 17 to search fora Station and then double click the radio station to listen to it Player and click the Radio Tuner tab You cap CH the station drop lists in the Radio Tuner tab to fit your needs To see further 2 Double click the radio optiog N e stations click on the arrows on the right side of each station name just like station you want to liste
69. Customize to further customize the behavior of the 5 Click OK Start menu Click OK when you re finished X e Classic Start Menu Use a Start menu that has the same look and behavior as earlier versions of Windows Or Select the Start menu style that you want to use You can further customize the Start menu such as what it shows or hides by clicking the Customize menu although most of the Start menu options listed under the Customize button are rather inconsequential That s it you can now use the classic Start menu that you ve grown to know and love 6 Click OK 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Five Customizing the Taskbar and Desktop 1 29 Lesson 5 2 Using the Windows Classic Desktop Os 5 3 desktop in Windows XP style Figure 5 4 The desktop in Windows classic style Figure 5 5 B nor O s oom D Bo The desktop in Windows fy start 6 as RS yh 10 01 oot BOS ail Classic style X Inactive Window Active Window Windows and buttons AY v Sele pthe design of your Windows and buttons d Color scheme Yo oose from Windows XP Style and Default blue v W s Classic Style Font size Normal Quick Reference Figure 5 5 To Switch Between o Desktop Styles Hate the bold new look of WS XP Don t worry it s easy to give Windows back the l l 5 1 Right click a blank area look and feel of early mor us looking versions
70. Double click a file to open the file in the program that created it e To Rename a File Click the file to select it select mij Rename this file Tasks panel enter the file s new name and press lt Enter gt Or right clj from the shortcut menu type a name for the folder and press lt Ent by clicking the file to select it selecting File gt Rename from reg folder and pressing lt Enter gt Q Copying and Moving a File Q e You can copy and move files the same as you copy Gyre folders e this file from the File and Folder Tasks ve the file and click OK e Move a File Click the file to select it and click menu select the folder or disk where you wa e Copy a File Drag and Drop Method desired location you might have to ope another folder n the lt Ctrl gt key while you drag the file to the er My Computer window if you want to copy it to e Copy a File Click the file to cele ick A Copy this file from the File and Folder Tasks menu select the folder or disk where in to move the file and click OK e To Copy a File or Folder MS oppy Disk Right click the file or folder and select Send To gt 3 Floppy A from they cut menu Restoring a De File and Emptying the Recycle Bin aN d File Double click the Recycle Bin to open it Click the file to select it and r this file from the Recycle Bin Tasks menu Or right click the deleted file and from the shortcut menu e To Restore click BS se
71. E the check box o You can add or remove components of Windows XP of the component will be installed To see what s ipgiud E The Windows Setup tab of h Subcomponents of Accessories and Utilitjes the Add Remove To add or remove a component click the checkbox A shaded p anais y qra Programs Properties pt ofthe component wi be sled To see what s included in a component click amp dialog box Components eZ s C Fax Services 37MB E Figure 8 20 v P indexing Service 0 0MB E ER A ZB rtemet Explorer DOME ws accessories an anc s for er j BP intemet Information Services 1S 157MR_ le 4 m PPan Description Includes Windows Accessories and Utilities for your computer rae Themes component i 119643 MB Total disk space required 0 0 MB l ok Cancel category Space merre 11964 4 MB o Figure 8 19 Windows XP is normally not installed wit e components that come on the Windows XP CD This prevents programs you don t n m taking up hard disk space on the computer For example if your computer doesn thav a modem it doesn t make much sense to install any communication components So A are these optional Windows components Take a look at Table 8 2 Windows Contes This lesson will show you how you can add and remove these optional Windows cor ponents to and from your computer 1 Open the Contro by clicking the Start button and selecting Control Pan Add or Remove Programs and click the A
72. File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Qx gt Pi JO Search E Folders Fiz ddress c WINDOwS ma z Copy Here Move Here Use the right mouse button to Cancel drag an object to display a shortcut menu with various options including Create Shortcut Here ig Start O G fa WINDOWS Figure 5 19 The Start menu makes it cana fa nd and open your programs However sometimes the 5 seconds or so it takes togyadeWirough the menu can still be too long for opening programs or files you use frequentl rtcut is a quick way to start a program or open a file or folder without having to t actual location Shortcuts are especially useful for programs files and folders you uently All of the Programs in the Start Menu are actually shortcuts that point to the progam files located elsewhere on your computer Shortcuts only point to Shortcut to files or folders Sognoving renaming or deleting a shortcut does not affect the original Notepad Yi ll TE program or e any way You can tell the difference between a shortcut and original file Shortcuts have a small because t tcut displays an arrow Z arrow 1 in the corner This geil show you how to add a shortcut to the desktop 1 pen My Computer Other Ways to Create a wy To create a shortcut you need to find the program you want the shortcut to point to In Shortcut Q this exercise create a shortcut to the Notepad program e Right click the file or
73. Files Root Folder Hard Disk A root folder or directory is the first folder from which all the other folders branch When you double click the C Hard Drive icon the window shows the contents of the root folder of the C drive As Lesson 4 9 A Closer Look at Files and Folders f Practice File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q sax 7 E ro Search jy Folders E Addr ddress C CustomGuide Windows XP Practice Letter to Sue T j I File and Folder Tasks xtension ally hidden from ew these three characters tell Windows what type of file it is and what type of icon to assign to it File Name Can be up to 255 characters although older MS DOS pro ay will only see the re characters su S Letter 1 txt aS Make a new folder Publish this folder to the Web E3 Share this folder Practice File Folder Date Modified Tuesday November 20 2001 3 26 PM fei a WordPad EXeE file is located in File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Qx a JO search Folders Ez Address C CustomGuide Windows XP Practice DO D Trade Show v EJ co al Canada Meetin Homework Open Me txt 3 doc In the C drive File and Folder Tasks In the Windows folder Make a new folder Publish this folder to the Web In the Accessories folder __ Arne WordPad EXE file So its path name would be C Program Files Accessori
74. Folder Restore all files B Restore this item in the Recycle we Bin Other Places Document gt Delete Figure 4 16 g ma l Explore Create Shortcut Froper ties Figure 4 17 Just like a wastebas t the Recycle Bin stores all of the files and folders you have deleted If you change your mind and decide you need a deleted file it s easy to find and retrieve it This lesson will ou how to open the Recycle Bin and see what s inside restore a previously deleted wO empty the Recycle Bin to free up some space on your hard disk 1 abies the Recycle Bin to open it e Recycle Bin opens and displays all the files you have recently deleted If you Find and select the Current Budget file You can restore a selected file by selecting Restore this item from the Recycle Bin Tasks panel Let s try it Select Restore this item from the Recycle Bin Tasks panel Restoring a file pulls it out of the Recycle Bin and puts it back in its original location Close the Recycle Bin window Now make sure the Current Budget file is in its original location Ka K accidentally delete a file or folder you can retrieve it from the Recycle Bin 3 4 5 Verify that the Current Budget file has been retrieved to the Desktop Okay you can delete the Current Budget file from the Desktop again and this time we won t restore it 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 103 One final
75. Lesson 7 16 Recording a Video with Windows Movie Maker Figure 7 22 The Record Dialog Box ES Audio device SigmaTel Audio Change Device Record Audio only Video device lt none gt Record time limit 2 00 00 Create clips Record Setting Medium quality recommended vi Elapsed 0 00 00 Audio for CD quality 96 Kbps stereo Record buttons 91hrs 37 min available on drive C gt Digital Video Figure 7 22 Camera Play button You just recorded your pet ferret s 3rd birt Say party on your camcorder Now how can you edit out the part where your ferret bit andma First you need to record that video from your camcorder onto your compyt s lesson teaches you how to do just that Stop button 1 Make sure your ca der or other video source is connected to your Quick Reference computer Also mature your video is rewound to the point where you want to begin gecorfing To Record a Video with Lo z Windows Movie Maker Let s start Win ovie Maker Tiaa e a o ine 2 Click the Sutton and select All Programs Accessories gt your CD R or CD RW Window le Maker drive The WSS Movie Maker Appears Now we can record your video 2 Start Windows Movie 3 Clic BRecord Record button Maker gh cord dialog box appears as shown in Figure 7 22 3 Click the Record button 4 Kose the quality setting that you want to use in the Setting box 4 Choo se the quality Oo video will take u
76. Maintenance The Printers and Other Loo oFF shut down Hardware window A Figure 6 1 Figure F Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Printers and Other Hardware DE Ay Q x 0 a pe Search j Folders FFF SS G Printers and Other Hardware 2d Printers and Other Hardware Pick a task View installed printers or fax printers Add a printer or pick a Co 0 ael icon Ce Game Controllers lt a Keyboard e Mouse im Phone and Modem Options z Scanners and Cameras p Figure 6 The Ch bis anel is the place to go when you want to change the various settings of your compW arfnd Windows Since this chapter deals entirely with configuring your computer yo seeing a lot of the Control Panel in the upcoming lessons That s why this lesson is a troduction to the Control Panel No exercises here just a guided tour of the Control to help you become familiar with it Control Pane Control Panel E Other Wavs to Open the The Control Panel appears as shown in Figure 6 2 If you ve used earlier versions of y p Microsoft Windows yov ll notice that the Control Panel in Windows XP is quite Control Panel l l l l _ different from earlier versions The window is categorized by topic so it is easier to e Open My Computer find the option you want to change Click on one of the categories to view all the click Other Places in Control Panel options under a topic the blue side panel and click C
77. NO to format characters in a document by changing their font type and font size This lesson making the text darker and he bold slanted italics or by adding underlining show you how to emphasize text in a document by Select the text a Fanci Nails located in the first body paragraph in your document You can ma elected text stand out by formatting with Italics Click the ics button on the Formatting toolbar The se Steg text La Fanci Nails appears in italics Notice that the Italics button is push n on the Formatting toolbar indicating the text is formatted with Italics tt as easy to format characters with bold or underline formatting Mect the line Subject Glue Crisis w format the selected text with bold formatting Click the Bold button on the Formatting toolbar The selected text appears in bold To remove the bold style repeat step 4 Make sure the Subject Glue Crisis is still selected then click the Bold button on the Formatting toolbar The bold style is removed from the selected text You can apply italic and underline formatting from text by using the same method except you would click the Italics or Underline button 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Working with a Windows Program 73 Lesson 3 13 Changing Paragraph Alignment E Letter WordPad E Letter WordPad File Edit View Insert Format Help File Edit View Insert Format Help Dae 464 amp BBX To the La Fanci Nails
78. Network Drive My Network Places Figure 10 9 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help File Edit View Favorites Tools Help The My Network Places Q Back gt Ri K Search Key Folders EK Back gt S P Search gt Fold window displays all the Address my Network Places Address 3 Desktop computers on your Network Tasks Network Tasks se n etwork 2 Add a network place Jon on Server lg Add a network place Q Search e i aros View network connections Make Available Offine Synchronize Figure 10 10 Other Pi Other Places GD Add to Zip er Places Scan with Norton AntiVirus gly Network To map to a network drive A E GB Entire Networ right click the folder and My Computer Hien oa select Map Network Drive F DR Create Shortcut from the shortcut menu Properties Figure 10 11 Figure 10 9 Click Entire Network to view all the computers on your network The Map Network Drive pe dialog b s ialog DOX 9 Windows can help you connect to a shared A and assign a drive letter to the connection s th gt access the folder using My Computer _ Specify the drive letter for the conne that you want to connect to Drive R Select a drive letter for the network folder Example OQ Checking this option will reconnect you to the Connect usi Wggpifferent user name network folder the next time you start your i computer igure 10 11 Fig A o Swe a network folder has been mapped and assigned a drive letter
79. Outlook Express S Inbox ab nas taa R a i messages i highlighted folder are folder Clic ble click the Y t to read Folders om Figure 9 30 63 Outlook Express we o Administrator A parrer Local Folders Emily Address U Messa A h m Outlook Express s Inbox G Inbox Blan Hoh address unin Yournextprojecs ne Yer in bold an ce ete ae ee eee losed envelope A aos s gt clip indicates an SE lt E Drafts From Dan High To hed message A Calendar Subject Your next projects Good Moming Do you have tutorials to teach how to type in Russian and English Excel 2000 Access 2000 and Word 2000 in the Russian language The contents of the selected message appear in this area 13 message s 0 unread Figure 9 29 Compose anew Reply to all the recipients Send or receive a Find a contact E mail message of a message message or message Create Mail aply Reply All Reply to the author Forward ata Delete the Open the of a message to con else message address book Figure 9 30 S This lesson explain receive and read your e mail messages with Outlook Express Youll find it s a lot to retrieve and read e mail messages than it is to sort through and read postal mail envelopes to rip open no scribbled handwriting to decipher no junk mail to go through well that s not quite true Unfortunately the online world is plagued with junk maf fled Spam just like the postal world Oh well al Inbo
80. Recyde Program events e E Windows Displays the events Close program Critical Battery Alarm Critical Stop assign sounds Default Beep Figure 6 21 Sounds Windows XP Eror Click her your own O file Figure 6 20 Select a preset C to hear the sound from the selected sound scheme selected sound Computers still have a long way to before they can talk to you but they can give you simple audio feedback as long a your computer has a sound card and speakers This lesson shows you how to assign so ads to events performed on your computer An event is an action performed by you or a oe ae For example when you press an incorrect key the computer sometimes utters a si ep If you have a sound card you can choose to play a sound rather than a borin Ori you press an incorrect key You can also assign a sound to when you start o indows 1 Ope Co n e Control Panel by clicking the Start button and click on the anel icon ntrol Panel opens 2 the Sounds Speech and Audio Devices icon e Sounds Speech and Audio Devices window appears as shown in Figure 6 20 This window displays the events to which you can assign sounds and the sounds you and Audio Devices Ww Click Change the sound scheme from the Pick a task heading e can associate with the events NOTE Remember when Windows offered a plethora of sound schemes to choose from Now instead of
81. Seder Beeni Options fi Service Partner Referrals install and then click Home Windows Catalog Office Update Windows Update Worldwide Download Windows Update Welcome to Windows Update C Welcome Get the latest updates available for your computer s operating system e software and hardware F igure 8 e 3 2 E Pick updates to install G critical Updates 0 Windows Update scans your computer and provides you with a selection of updates tailored just for you C Windows XP 5 GI Driver Updates 0 The Microsoft Windows Scan for updates U pd ate Web page Select O Review and install updates th e softwa re you wa nt to i Options pet ener ay updates for you i C View installation history In stal d n d th e n cl ick C Personalize Windows Update raias A collect any form of personally ie Read our privacy statement Download 2001 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Terms of use Accessibility F Microsoft Windows Update Microsoft Internet Explorer Sec File Edit View Favorites Tools Help a Q sex Q x a A JO search Jg Favorites Media g2 r te wy lan 33 Address http v4 windowsupdate microsoft com en default asp e v Go Links 4 All Product S port Search microsoft com Guide y e Microsoft pae Sene Windows Update Microsoft Home Windows Catalog Office Update Windows Update Worlo ide Windows Update Wi no EY ates ae Windows Gl Welcome Pick MS P updates V
82. Strikeout L Underine Color MM Black Sample AaBbYy2z Script Westem gt This is an OpenType font This same font will be used on bot CS printer and your screen Sample Area wt Combo box Figure 3 7 Scroll Up Button LA Click here to scroll up cates your current position in the list you can also click and drag the scroll box to scroll up or down Scroll Down Button Click here to scroll down Figure 3 8 Some commands Memore complicated than others are For example saving a file is a simple process all yo have to do is select File gt Save from the menu or click the Save button on the Standard Rr Other commands are more complex Whenever you want to do somethin ively complicated in Windows you need to fill out a dialog box Filling out a dialog ot much different than filling out a paper form Dialog boxes usually contain seve s of controls including My boxes ist boxes Check boxes Combo boxes also called drop down lists e Buttons This lesson will give you a quick tour of a more complicated dialog box and show you how to use the various dialog box components you will come across 1 Select Format from the menu The Format menu appears Look at the items listed in the Format menu Font Paragraph and Tabs are followed by ellipses Whenever you see a menu item followed by ellipses it means that there is a dialog box lurking just behind the menu
83. Task Scheduler and delete the task just as you would a file or folder Your Organization s Name Here 2 1 8 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 8 7 Installing New Software F Add or Remove Programs Figure 8 14 H Run Installation Program 4 Currently installed programs Sort by Name v The Add or Remove Change or ENEE Pe EN i Click here for support information Used occasionally Prog rams window aaa LastUsedOn 1 3 2002 Ji i To change this program or remove it from your Figure 8 1 5 computer dick Change or Remove Caii j5 AvantGo Client b3d Projector Windows searches your soe floppy d rive and CD ROM a Code Jedi Shadow Plan for PalmOS drive for the program you mepe f A HyperSnap DX 4 want to instal B iambic TinySheet4 for Palm Computing Platform Figure 8 16 The installation program Figure 8 14 for every software program is different but Sago Gia 40 Setup most of them work the AvantGo Client 4 0 Setup same way AvantGo Client 4 0 Setup Welcome to the InstallShi izard for AvantGo Client The InstallShield yantGo Client on A your computer To c be cf Next we Cancel Most x ams come with specific instructions that explain their own installation better than SS ever could Still if you ve misplaced the instructions or never had them to begin Ww example if you ve downloaded a program off the Internet this lesson will help you most programs disk dr
84. Try not to place programs in the Startup menu unless you really them Oo Quick Reference lt To Start a Program Automatically when you amp Load Windows amp e Add the program file or Oo folder to the StartUp RAN folder in the Programs QA Menu To get to the StartUp folder right click D the Start button click Open and double click V the Programs folder Your Organization s Name Here 144 Microsoft Windows XP Chapter Five Review Lesson Summary Using the Windows Classic Start Menu AS e To Change Start Menus Right click a blank area of the Windows anh select Properties from the shortcut menu click the Start Menu tab and select the St u style that you want to use If you want click Customize to further customize the behav ive Start menu Click OK when you re finished Q Using the Windows Classic Desktop s e To Switch Between Desktop Styles Right click 4 on the desktop select Properties from the shortcut menu and click the Appearance Sec a style from the Windows and buttons list and click OK Q Moving Sizing and Hiding mane e To Lock Unlock the Start Menu Right clf the taskbar and select Lock the taskbar from the shortcut menu Qy e Move the taskbar by postion NG Point over a blank area on the taskbar and clicking and dragging the taskbar to the tga bottom left or right of the screen e Change the size of the ta y positioning the pointer over the top edge of the taskbar until the po
85. Your Organization s Name Here 236 Microsoft Windows XP Chapter Eight Review Lesson Summary Formatting a Floppy Disk AS Formatting a floppy disk erases any previous files stored on it and S disk so that you can save information on it y ak Start To Format a Floppy Disk Insert the floppy you want to form Computer or Windows Explorer right click the floppy drive an menu Select the formatting options you want to use and ck floppy drive open My t Format from the shortcut Copying a Floppy Disk oO To Copy a Floppy Disk Insert the source floppy ant to copy into the floppy drive open My Computer or Windows Explorer right click the drive and select Copy Disk from the shortcut menu and click Start Follow the on screen lons and insert the source and destination disks as prompted Using Error checking to On Disk Errors Defragmenting To Use Error checking oper MD mputer right click the disk you want to scan select Properties from the shortcutggenu and click the Tools tab Click the Check Now button specify whether you want to do Xx rd or Thorough scan and click Start ard Disk To Defragme ard Disk Open My Computer right click the disk you want to defragment select Properti from the shortcut menu and click the Tools tab Click the Defragment Now button and gn Start Freein Space on your Hard Disk Disk Cleanup to Free Space on Your Hard Drive Open the Start menu select All
86. a screen saver until this password is typed correctly selected screen saver e 7 Click the Wait box and type 15 IN n You can also click the Wait box up arrow until the number 15 appears Now hac saver will appear when you don t use your computer for 15 minutes RN Instead of using a screen saver if you have an Energy Star compliant monty you can conserve power by switching the monitor to a low power standby m Ka en have the monitor turn itself off if the computer hasn t been used for a while 8 Click the Power button in the Monitor Power section The Power Options Properties dialog box appears 9 Click the Turn off monitor list arrow and select A minutes This setting will cause your monitor to turn itself off whe omputer hasn t been used for 30 minutes To turn the monitor back on simpl s a key on the keyboard or move the mouse you don t need to push the mo s on off switch 10 Click OK Q amp Aan logo You can easily change the amount of time it takes before Windows displays the Wraki fol a EnergyStar Quick Reference To Set Up a Screen Saver 1 Right click a blank area on the desktop and select Properties from the shortcut menu 2 Click the Screen Saver tab 3 Click the Screen Saver list and select a screen saver 4 Optional Specify how much time must elapse before Windows displays the selected screen saver in the Wait box and click the On resume passwor
87. a tiie tO SNOW a Fi File and Folder Tasks or k Print this fie E open right click a file to display Figure 4 12 Sere a list of things you can do Open With Scan with Norton AntiVirus to it You can rename a file by selecting the Send To gt file and clicking Rename this file from the File and Folder Tasks panel uS py Create Shortcut Delete or by right clicking the file and shyt Rename selecting Rename from the shortcut k Properties font Sy 4 13 In the past few lessons you ve leagail about folders how to open rename move copy and delete them In the next coup a essons we ll be working with the files that are stored in those folders Working Mo is very very similar to working with folders So similar in fact that the procedures fo g renaming moving copying and deleting a file are exactly the same as opening aming moving copying and deleting a folder Start button 1 Click the aQyutton and select My Computer The My 2 Navigatg to and open your Practice folder or floppy disk gd Every x co My Computer AS r window appears amp window has its own toolbar that make it easy to browse through your s drives and folders Two controls on this toolbar are particularly helpful okin Practice Address List Click to list the drives on your A computer and the current folder then select the drive and or folder whose contents you want to display
88. advanced options Search Options Quick Reference Use the Search Companion to Find a File Select Search from the Start menu Click the type of file you want to search for Enter part of the file name or text within the file You can also search for files using the drop down lists at the bottom of the dialog box Click Search to start searching for the file s Your Organ ization s Name Here 1 1 2 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 4 13 Managing the Search Companion F i g ur e 4 p 30 Search Companion Search Companion Search Companion Which character would A The character shortcut TE dialog box Figure 4 31 Click Back and Next to S You rang browse th rou g h the What would you like to do different character options Choose a different animated ange rere sc Turn off the animated oa character Courtney will be your Don t show balloon tips Figure 4 32 aA Tow Gude Kkbak ua ins i ai Change preferences dialog box Oo Figure 4 29 Figure K Based on the Microsoft Office Rot Search Companion is an animated character n Figure 4 32 which entertains and does tricks perform your search Whether your prior experience with animated characters has been c armed or annoyed this lesson will teach you how to manage these new darlings a ectinical world 1 Click the Sta enu and select Search to open the Search Companion r to help you with your next search He s
89. ams Accessories System Tools Disk Cleanup Check the files you want to te and click OK ou can also free up hard disk space by removing programs and Windows components that you xo don t use KY Scheduling Tasks The Task Scheduler automatically runs specified programs when you tell it to To Schedule a Task Click the Start button and select Program Files Accessories gt System Tools Scheduled Tasks or open My Computer and double click the Scheduled Tasks folder Double click the Add Scheduled Task icon select the program you want to schedule from the list click Next select an interval when you want to run the selected program from the listed options and click Next Specify when you want the program to run click Next and then Finish 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer 237 You can delete tasks from the Task Scheduler just like you would a file or folder Installing New Software To Install Software Find the Program s disk or disks and insert it or the first disk into the disk drive Click the Start button and select Control Panel Add or Remove Programs Click the Add New Programs button click the button where the program is located and then click Next Windows should automatically install your software Follow the on screen instructions to install the program If Windows can t find the setup file click Cancel close the Control Panel open My
90. box press lt Tab gt and type your new password again in the Confirm New Password box Click OK to close the dialog box and click Cancel to close the Windows XP Security dialog box Your Organization s Name Here 298 Microsoft Windows XP Sharing Your Files and Printer on the Network When you share a folder or printer on your computer you allow other computers on the network to use It To Share a Drive or Folder Make sure that you are logged on to Windows XP with a user account that has administrative privileges Open My Computer find and select the folder you want to share and select te Share this folder from the Files and Folder Tasks panel Click the Shared this folder option and if you want change the name for the shared folder in the Share Name box Optional Click the Permissions button and specify any permissions then oD To Share a Printer Click the Start button and select Printers and Faxes Q e folder you want to share and select ga Share this printer from the Printer Tasks p lick the Shared this printer option and if you want change the name for the shared prin Share Name box Optional Click the Permissions button and specify any permissio click OK Changing Access Permissions to a Shared FANY Sp D Change Security Permissions Make sure that you are logged on to Windows XP with a user N ge By changing permissions to a shared folder or printer yo ine which users have access to the shared
91. change this setting so Windows displays the file name and file ex for example Letter TXT instead of just Letter This is another look but don t touch lesson We ll open the dialog box where you can change how Wey formation is displayed then you can look at Table 6 8 Advanced Folder Options Oo at everything means 1 n the Start Menu click on the Control Panel select Appearance d Themes and click Folder Options from the window he Folder Options dialog box appears Click the View tab The View tab of the Folder Options dialog box appears as shown in Figure 6 25 Refer to Table 6 8 Advanced Folder Options for a description of the more important folder options Click Cancel when you re finished 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Six Customizing Windows 173 Table 6 8 Advanced Folder Options Option Default Description Display file size information in folder tips Display simple folder This displays the size of a file in the folder tips area In Windows Explorer click the folder to display its contents and subfolders All folders are automatically closed when another folder is clicked To hide or display a folder while it s still open click on the plus or minus sign next to the folder view in Explorer s Folders list Display the contents of system folders and Settings and Windows contain files your computer ne run properly and are us
92. click My Network Places and see if your ame is using the same network protocol as everyone else and if the work correct e A and C IPX SPX are TCP IP are both network protocols amp A adding TARO WAC aossen 228 names to address book 06 264 Netw OK printer scssi suisia 282 P E nr ne ene ne eer 224 shortcuts to desktop ccccccceeees 140 SOME Al E AT AT 218 wallpapi ee ee ee ee 158 Address Bar Internet Explorert 249 address book B Backspace key 000eeeeeeee Oi blind carbon copies Bcc 263 BMP bitmap files x gt a 184 DOl erage eee 70 browsing Oy contents of your ae eenia 90 92 He ronieieaiara tes 74 Web pages A E aaron ee 250 buttons tool bgr4tmg cee 54 we ROY ATEA EESE EE 89 C C GHIV eatseuissecceesdunsindneinbanshdensnsdsatnmnonnivs 89 cable Internet connection 0 247 Calculator program ccccceceeeeeees 182 Carbon copies CC ccccceeeeeeeeeees 263 cascade WINKOWG cccccccccescececeeeeeeeees 46 cascading WIndows ccceseccceceeeeeeeeees 46 CD command DOS 08 119 CD ROM ccceeeeeeeeee es 89 center alignment O o T Character Map progran it E ann 189 characters inserting pecial check boxes ep Clicking client server n clipboard Close Prog closing gigi color
93. click the drive folder or file ne you want to open My Computer Notice that My Computer appears in its own window with its own little buttons scroll bars and menus The My Computer window works just like the other windows you ve been working with You can move it resize it and minimize it 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 91 5 6 Double click the C Local Disk icon The contents of the C drive appear in the window What do all those symbols in the window mean Each item you see has an icon or symbol to help you identify what type of item it is We ll take a look at what each of these symbols mean in an upcoming Local Disk C lesson To move back to the previous folder or level click the Up button on the toolbar Click the Up button on the toolbar to move back to the My Computer level 2j You ve moved from the C drive back to My Computer Now that you know the O Up button procedure for displaying the contents of a drive move on to the next step to display the properties of the Local Disk C drive S Right click the C Local Disk icon and select Properties from the shortcut menu aR The floppy drive hums as Windows examines it After a moment the Proper window appears as shown in Figure 4 4 The Properties window displays th unt of used and free space on the disk in megabytes MB and gigabytes GB Refer to the previous lesson if
94. common tasks in folders Specifies that hyperlinks to common folder tasks and other places on your computer are displayed in folders These links appear in the left pane of the folder window Use Windows classic folders Specifies that folder contents are displayed like classic Windows O folders which means that folder contents do not look and work like r Web pages Browse folders K Open each folder in the same Specifies that the contents of each folder open in the same win q window To switch back to the previous folder click the Back tong toolbar or press BACKSPACE Open each folder in its own Specifies that the contents of each folder open in a Ngaa dow The window previous folder content still appears in a different ka so you can switch between the windows Click items as follows Single click to open an item Specifies that you want to open items in fa v4 and on the desktop by point to select single clicking them just as you woulda c eKA link on a Web page To select an item without opening it res eee oe ues Icon titles are underlined gaugrexe links on a Web page consistent with my browser Icon titles areggoerlined only when you point at them Underline icons titles only when point at them Quick Reference Double click to open an item single click to select a clicki it This i To Use Custom Folder Settings Click the Start button and select Control Panel Appearance and Themes Folde
95. copy all the files in the A ivje NEW folder on the C drive If the NEW fol exist on the C drive XCOPY would create the ider DEL path filename le DEL TMP would erase any files in the Ider with TMP file extensions RENAME old name new name ample RENAME LETTER TXT APPROVE TXT would rename the LETTER TXT file to APPROVE TXT CD path O Change the current folder Type to change to the previous parent folder Example cD TEMP would change to the TEMP folder cD would change to the root folder of the C drive Creates or makes a new folder Example mD Docs would create a new folder named DOCS RD folder name Deletes a folder Example RD DOs would delete the DOCS folder st DOS commands e additional options called switches which you specify after the DOS command preceded by a Type after a DOS command to view all the switches or options for the command Quick Reference To Use the MS DOS Prompt 1 Click the Start button and select Run 2 Type COMMAND in the box and click OK To Exit Back to Windows e Type EXIT and press lt Enter gt Your Organization s Name Here 1 20 Microsoft Windows XP Chapter Four Review Lesson Summary Understanding Storage Devices Folders and Files Using My Computer to See What Qy Computers store information using files and folders on disks drives ne store information in a file cabinet
96. date it was last modified etc about the file you re searching for Managing the Search Compggion e To change the animated chara rn it off click the character and select Change the animated character or Turn off ated character from the shortcut menu Using the Folders A windows Explorer SY program called in previous versions of Windows e To Display the ders Pane Open My Computer and click the Folders button on the toolbar l next to a folder indicates that all the subfolders it contains are hidden Click the display the hidden subfolders e The folders pane le iew and manage the contents of your computer This was a separate e Aplus sy plus sy e Afli Oro El next to a folder indicates that all the subfolders it contains are displayed Click t s symbol to collapse or hide the subfolders ymbol next to a folder indicates that the folder does not contain any subfolders although it Aay still contain files To View the Contents of a Drive or Folder Click the drive or folder in the left folder pane the amp contents of that drive or folder will appear in the right pane Y e To Adjust the Size of Windows Explorer s Panes Drag the bar separating the two panes to the right or left File Management Using the Folders Pane e To Open a File or Folder Double click the file or folder e To Move a File or Folder Drag the file or folder to the desired location in either pane of the window
97. dialog box e You can address a message using To which sends the message to the recipient you specify required Carbon Copy Cc which sends a copy of the message to a recipient who is not directly involved but would be interested in the message and Blind Carbon Copy Bcc which sends a copy of the message to a recipient without anyone else knowing that they o message Adding a Name to the Address Book AS e To Add a Name to the Address Book Start Outlook Express click the Outlook Express toolbar and click the New Contact button on t toolbar Choose Internet Mail Address and Personal Address and last name in the appropriate fields and enter the recipient in the E Mail Addresses section To add additional aoe ab ess Book button on dows Address Book ype the recipient s first il address in the Add New box the contact click on other tabs then close the Address Book in the New Internet Mail Properties dialog box Click OK uf ages every 30 minutes but you can also Send and Receive button on the Receiving E mail e Outlook Express checks your mail server for ne check for new messages on demand by clickin Outlook Express toolbar e To Receive and Read E mail Messag rt Outlook Express and click the Inbox folder click the Send and Receive button on thes utlook Express toolbar and click or double click the message you want to read e To Open an Attached File oO above steps to read the message then click
98. do Ends your session and shuts down Windows so that you can safely turn off power O Figure 1 17 Now that you ve ed the mouse it s time to move on to the other device that you use to control your compt gy the keyboard The keyboard may seem more familiar and easy to use than the mouse t first but don t be fooled Computer keyboards sneak in some extra keys that you nee ow about This lesson explains what these extra keys on the keyboard are and when them 1 s and hold down the lt Alt gt key press the lt F4 gt key and release both Options X ressing lt Alt gt lt F4 gt closes the currently running program Since you re using the Windows Desktop the Shut Down Windows dialog box appears as shown in Figure 1 17 A We re not ready to shut Windows down just yet we ll cover that in a future lesson KY Follow the next step to back out of the Shut Down Windows dialog box without selecting anything 2 Press the lt Esc gt key Pressing lt Esc gt does the same thing as clicking the Cancel button The Shut Down Windows dialog box disappears and you re back at the Windows desktop Table 1 6 Special Keys and Their Functions describes the lt Alt gt and lt Esc gt keys you just used as well some of the other confusing keys on the keyboard 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter One The Fundamentals 27 Table 1 6 Special Keys and Their Functions Description The lt Alt gt
99. do something in a program you will try using the program s built in Help feature before you reach for the manual or ask one of your computer savvy friends V What s This button Quick Reference To Use the Help Index 1 Press lt F1 gt or select Help from the menu and click the Index tab 2 Type the keyword s that describe the help topic you are looking for 3 Double click the help topic you re looking for To Find a Help Topic 1 Press lt F1 gt or select Help from the menu and click the Search or Find tab 2 Type the keyword s topic you are looking for 3 Double click the Help topic you re looking for To See what a Control in a Dialog Box Does 1 Click the Dialog box What s This button located right next to the close button 2 Click the control you want more information on with the R pointer Your Organization s Name Here 78 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 3 31 The Open Save toolbar Figure 3 32 The Open dialog box for the WordPad program al Lar Open button Other Ways to Open a File e Select File Open from the menu Y K Lesson 3 16 Saving and Opening Files in Different Locations Look In List Select the drive or folder where you want to open or save the file E My Documents Figure 3 31 Return to the Create a last folder Move up o to the na mee Display in different views
100. getting kind of old d someone with new tricks 2 Click the aWimated dog and click Choose a different animated charagfeg The o box shows the characters to choose from as shown in Table 4 7 Search ANE If Microsoft Office is installed on your computer there will be more Search QY Companions to choose from I Click the Next button to scroll through the different characters and click OK to change to a new character QY Rover disappears and the new character pops onto the screen Though this may be an A improvement from Rover you may want to hide the character altogether KY 4 Click the character and click Turn off the animated character from the shortcut menu The character disappears but the Search Companion panel remains If you want to customize the search panel even more start a new search 5 Click the Search button on the toolbar to start a new search and click Change preferences from the dialog box You can perform changes to the animated character here or you can use the advanced preferences 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 1 13 Table 4 7 Search Companions Search Companion Description Rover is a loyal friend who will sniff out what you re looking for Rover is the default Search Companion Need some digital hocus pocus to help you find something Call on Merlin to Merlin demonstrate his awesome wisdom and magical powers Vo oS Courtn
101. in the Change To list and amp w ick the Change button To ignore a word the spell checker doesn t recognize Wy the name of a city click Ignore All 11 Optional To send a file or picture along Mew your message click the Attach button on the toolbar and then ct the file in the Insert Attachment dialog box WR 12 When you re finished with the m e click the Send Message button on the toolbar The message is sent to the Outb r and will be sent the next time you click the Send and Receive button Go taSte 13 if you want to send the message immediately 13 Click the Send and Regn button on the Outlook toolbar Outlook sends all the me new e mail messages Cc that are stored in the Outbox folder and retrieves any n the e mail server Table 9 4 Ways to Add g ss an E mail Message Sends the message to the recipient you specify required Carbon Copy K Sends a copy of the message to a recipient who is not directly involved Description but would be interested in the message Blind Carbon Copy Bcc Sends a copy of the message to a recipient without anyone else knowing that they received the message 0 Attach Attach button S Send Recv Qn and Receive button Quick Reference To Compose a Message 1 Open Outlook Express 2 Click the Create Mail button on the Outlook Express toolbar 3 Type the recipient s address in the To field Or Click the Select recipients fr
102. it what you wanted Yes finished searching Yes but make future searches faster No refine this search and Information in Help and Support Center You may also want to 2 Search the Internet Change preferences You may also want to Use advanced search Change file name or options keywords Indude hidden and g system files Search for all files o type i af as Figure 4 27 Figure 4 28 1 Choose the category 2 Enter information that describes what about the file you searching for NS you re searching for It s just as easy to misplace and ile in your computer as it is to misplace your car keys maybe easier Luckily Microsoft has simplified the search process by introducing the Search Companion to Win s A cousin of the Office Assistant the Search Companion helps you organize your ee asking certain questions such as what you want to search for 1 e picture or file Mich drive to search in and the file name re 4 29 3 Finish the search or refine the search for better results The Search Compaay Q search for files even when you can t remember the exact file name or locations You can search or a file by e The igh any part of the file name e The e file was created or modified Mpe of file such as a Microsoft Word document or graphic file text within the file e Ss size of the file can set one or several of these criterions to search for a file f Click th
103. learn how to perfor bg8ic file management in the folders pane Specifically you ll move a file and crgate a new folder Again although the folders pane looks a little different than the rest y Computer screen all the file management procedures you ve learned work y the same If you ve followed the other lessons this should be one of the easiest lessons the chapter 1 Make sure My Cora er is open with the Folders pane displayed Remember that a have to do to view the Folders pane is click the Folders button on the toolbar O 2 Click no Disk C drive icon in the left Folders pane The contgnts the C drive appear in the right pane of My Computer and it expands in the pene to show its subfolders plus symbol beside the Practice folder to display its contents Cli Or expands and displays all the files inside it and the plus symbol H changes inus symbol Since you can see all the files in the right pane it s much easier to Os and copy files and folders amp y old down the lt Ctrl gt key while you click and drag the Open Me file to the Accounting folder as shown in Figure 4 34 QY It doesn t matter if you drag and drop the Open Me file to the Accounting folder in the A left pane or the right pane they re both the same folder The Open Me file is copied to KY the Accounting folder Move on to the next step and let s see if you can create a new folder while the Folders pane is displayed 3
104. local or network printer Figure 10 13 The Sharing tab of the Printer Properties dialog box Figure 10 14 Select the network printer you want to connect to in the Browse for Printer dialog box 2002 CustomGuide Inc Lesson 10 4 Connecting to a Network Printer Add Printer Wizard Add Printer Wizard Local or Network Printer Specify a Printer The wizard needs to know which type of printer to set up f you dont know the name or address of the printer you gt ir that meets your needs What printer do you want to connect to A Q this option and click Next Name Example server ar Connect to a printer on e n a home or office network K Ge O Select the option that describes the printer you want to use Local printer attached to this computer Find a printer in the directory USE to this printer or to brow p network printer or a printer attached to another computer To set up a network printer that is not attached to a print server e Jy use the Local printer option URL Figure 10 12 Add Printer Wizard Browse for Printer When the list of printers appears select the one you want to use Printer N DESKTOP hp deskjet 990c series Shared printers f Microsoft Windows Network a CUSTOMGUIDE NETWORK hp deskjet 990c series x g Click the next to a computer to view its printers Select the printer to which you want to connect
105. lt Ctrl gt lt X gt S B Pressing lt Ctrl gt lt C Clicking the Cut b n the toolbar D Selecting Edit gt om the menu 7 Unlike cuttin you copy something you can t see it on screen True or False Ry 8 pressi Ze displays Help on what you re doing True or False Homework 1 Either insert your Practice Files CD or navigate to where your practice files are located If you don t know where they are ask your instructor 2 Start WordPad Open the Homework 3 file from your practice files Your Organization s Name Here 84 Microsoft Windows XP 10 11 12 Select File Save As from the menu Save the Homework 3 as Memo on the Practice CD in the D drive or in your practice files Document WordPad File Edit View Insert Format Help eH SR a p gt Bo jet ene alee a on ou Bea a4 North Shore Travel 500 Pine Street Suite 301 Minneapolis MN 55402 TO FROM Sandra Willes Communication Director In less than three months North Shore Travel will introduce its new Discover Caia package There will be a meeting this Thursday at 9 30 A M in the auxiliary cone room to finalize the Discover Canada marketing and princing plans We are behind schedule on this so any additions or changes to the plans shouf e ii by Fridav a5 For Help press F1 Move the insertion point to the end of th g press the lt Spacebar gt and type All Staff Select t
106. maximizing it so that it fills the entire screen You ll also learn how to shuffle windows around sending some to the background and bringing others up to the forefront Let s get started M Prerequisites e How to start and shut down Windows e How to use the mouse to click double click drag and drop and right click 34 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 2 1 Starting a Program Figure 2 1 Melissa Melissa Click on the Start button to E eme 7 GE rene open the menu and then Internet Explorer Internet Explorer point to All Prog rams to S asa Outlook v Sia Outlook open the menu Windows Update p Windows Media Playe Windows Media Playe R D Accessories r fan aa EEEE EA Figure 2 2 amp Tour Windows XP G2 Administrative Tools Common Tour Windows XP b N T Entertainment i D Applications icati an System Tools Click on Accessories to w MSN Explorer T Games w MSN Explorer QJ Address Book open the menu and then click on WordPad to open the program T Startup Se lih ae AT Calculator D Windows Movie Make D Windows Movie Make 3 Internet Explorer Command Prompt SB Microsoft Outlook Newsreader e Notepad Y MSN Explorer Ne 7 W Paint ws Outlook Express p Remote Assistance Remote Assistance Program Compatibility Wizard w Synchronize wel Tour Windows XP a Off Shut Down i I G Windows Explorer a Windows Movie Maker A WordPad Figure 2 3 CMs W
107. menu Quick Reference Th ulator appears in scientific mode as shown in Figure 7 4 If you still To Open the Calculator t sffoer your Trigonometry or Statistics feel free to try out the expanded functions WS ientific mode select All Programs gt close the Calculator when you re finished Accessories gt Calculator gt To Switch Between A ele 72 ea tar Standard and sient Description A computer version of a standard and scientific calculator you can use to make Modes quick calculations on your computer e Select View Scientific Found Under All Programs Accessories Calculator or Standard from the menu e Click the Start button and Crelect View Standard from the menu to return to Standard mode and 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Seven The Free Programs 183 Lesson 7 4 Sound Recorder S Techno Sound Recorder File Edit Effects Help R Techno Sound Recorder E m x File Edit Effects Help SEL Position 0 00 sec eimmo cf om ja Position 17 97 sec Figure 7 6 To use the Sound Recorder program you must have a sound card and speaker Miled on your computer If you want to record something you will also need a micrdp c computer system meets these requirements then you can use Sound Recegder Yke a computerized tape recorder to record voice annotations or anything else Jean think of 1 Click the Start button and select All Programs gt Entertainment
108. new home page e next time you start Internet Explorer the art page Click OK The Internet Options dialog box closes Web page you selected will appear as r list of favorites it can be difficult to find a specific Web page out of all thos ries You can organize your favorites list by creating subfolders to keep relaged Web pages together for example you might create a folder called Travel eee travel related Web pages together and another If you ve added a lot of Web pages folder called Financial t your financial and investment related Web pages Here s how to organize ist of favorites Select Favorites gt The Organize Favo ganize Favorites from the menu ialog box appears as shown in Figure 9 15 We don t need to go in detail here can organize your favorites using the same Windows file management t ues you already know if you don t review the file management chapter TeApeinize Favorite dialog box even provides you with several handy rename and delete files and shortcuts buttons aly ciosg rganize Favorites dialog box N r Favorites Favorites button Other Ways to View Your Favorite Web Pages e Select Favorites from the menu and select the Web page Quick Reference To Add a Web Page to Your List of Favorites e Go to the Web page select Favorites Add to Favorites from the menu and click OK Or e Go to the Web page right cl
109. of Windows Here s how on the desktop and select 1 Right click area on the desktop select Properties from the peoborues romme shortcut menu shortcut m d click the Appearance tab POE The Displ erties dialog box appears as shown in Figure 5 5 The Windows and l a E butt where you can change the look of Windows You have two choices ongli RGpiows XP Style The radical new look and feel for Windows XP with rounded corners big buttons and bright crayon like colors 3 Select a style from the Windows and buttons list e Windows Classic Style The look and feel you re probably used to from 4 Click OK previous versions of Windows with square corners and a no nonsense design 2 Select a style from the Windows and buttons list That s it all there s left to do is close the Display Properties dialog box 3 Click OK Your Organization s Name Here 130 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 5 6 You can position the taskbar at the top bottom left and right of the Lesson 5 3 Moving Resizing and Hiding the Taskbar Taskbar and Start Menu Properties Taskbar Stat Menu Taskbar appearance Lock the taskbar screen Auto hide the DAN Keep the gt er windows s C Group similar gasp amp Fns F igure 5 E 7 eo You can resize the taskbar arn so it can display more information my keep the notification area uncluttered by hiding icons that you e not clicked recently Figure 5 8
110. part of the printer s name as its default share name Click OK to share the print A hand appears under the printg indicating it is being shared and is accessible to other users on the network To stopgghasng a printer all you need do to is repeat Steps 5 and 6 and in Step 7 select the N red option w OA Y an Shared folder Shared printer Quick Reference To Share a Drive or Folder Make sure that you are logged on to Windows XP with a user account that has administrative privileges 2 Open My Computer find and select the folder you want to share and select Share this folder from the Files and Folder Tasks panel 3 Click the Shared this folder option and if you want change the name for the shared folder in the Share Name box 4 Optional Click the Permissions button and specify any permissions then click OK To Share a Printer 1 Click the Start button and select Printers and Faxes 2 Select the folder you want to share and select H Share this printer from the Printer Tasks panel 3 Click the Shared this printer option and if you want change the name for the shared printer in the Share Name box 4 Optional Click the Permissions button and specify any permissions then click OK Your Organization s Name Here 292 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 10 10 Changing Access Permissions to a Shared Folder Figure 10 27 Database Properties Ent
111. picture or graphic you want to use as Xo wallpaper 3 Select how you want the wallpaper to be displayed centered tiled or stretched from the Position list optional 4 Click OK Your Organization s Name Here 160 Microsoft Windows XP ve Lesson 6 6 Adjusting the Screen Resolution E Document WordPad ile Edit View Insert Format Figure 6 13 O a 10 Lower resolution 800 by 600 displays larger images on the screen higher resolutions 1024 by 768 displays smaller images but lets you see more information at once Figure 6 14 800 by 600 pixels The Settings tab of the l Display Properties dialog Figure 6 13 box Display Properties A Themes Desktop Screen Saver Appearance Settings OOOO Figure 6 15 Your desktop has been reconfigured Do you want to keep Click Yes to keep the new these settings resolution click No to switch back to the original resolution setting Se Figure 6 15 Drag the slider to select the display resolution Screen R on has to do with how much information can fit on the computer screen Obvi can t adjust how large or small your computer s monitor is without buying a new at is but you can make all the images on your screen larger or smaller so you can se information at once w Right click a bla
112. plug your new computer into the office network do ODetick the My Network Places to browse the network but there s noti there What could be wrong Select all that apply A The Workgroup name in the Network dialog box fours right clicking My Network Places and clicking the Identification tab 15 incorrect B Your computer s voltage output is too high C Your computer doesn t have the right network ROT installed D Who cares Give the network administrator a calit s their job to fix these kinds of problems Which of the following are peny PU PNO OEIS Select all that apply IPX SPX Oo NASCAR TCP IP NASA GCOS network op 4 Open the Network dialog box by right clicking the My Network Places icon and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu Click the Identification tab to see what the names of your computer and network are Close the dialog box when you re finished J on ay on the network as a network drive don t check the Reconnect at login Your Organization s Name Here 300 Microsoft Windows XP Quiz Answers 2002 CustomGuide Inc False Larger organizations almost always use a Client Server network A B and C Networking has nothing to do whatsoever with electrical consumption D Your friendly Network administrator certainly makes it easier to work with the network but he or she isn t a required part of the network outer 1S A and C You should right
113. previous Web pages e Take you to a different page within the same Web site e Take you to a different page in a different Web site e Take you to a different part of the same Web site 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Nine Exploring the Internet 251 e Allow you to download a file 5 e Send an e mail to a specified e mail address Forward button e Play a video or sound Position the pointer over the What s New icon near the top of the Yahoo page The pointer changes into a t anytime it is over a link Remember links can be either text or pictures Click the What s New icon or text Stop button The What s New Web page connected to the link appears Notice the address bar amp displays the address of the new Web page http www yahoo com new You can easil A move back to the previous Web page e D Click the Back button on the toolbar You re back at the Yahoo home page The Forward button moves forward RN Web pages you have viewed Refresh button Click the Forward button on the toolbar Q You return to the What s New Web page O Just like a metro highway system at rush hour the Internet often BA congested when too many users try to view the same Web site at the same ti R When this happens it may take a long time for the Web page to appear o or you may even get a screen like the one shown in Figure 9 7 Here are trategies to try if you are having problems displaying Web pages
114. really shot president Kennedy you need to have a top secret security clearance Properties Security clearance levels in Windows XP are called permissions By assigning permissions th g Mii to Share a you are restricting what a user can and can t do e Right click the folder and 1 Make sure that you are logged on to Windows XP with a user account that select Sharing and has administrative privileges Security Only user accounts with administrative rights can change a folder s security options 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Ten Networking with Windows XP 295 2 Find and select the drive or folder you want to share click Share this folder from the File and Folder Tasks panel and click the Security tab The Security tab of the Folder Properties dialog box appears as shown in Figure 10 31 Quick Reference 3 Ifthe user account or group you want to assign permissions to isn t listed click Add otherwise skip ahead to Step 5 DE ade cay The Select Users or Groups dialog box appears as shown in Figure 10 32 Here is 1 Make sure that you are where you can enter the name of the user account or group that you want to grant or i logged on to Windows XP deny permission to the shared folder ith a user account that 4 If you know the name of the user account s or group s enter it them in administrative the text box and click OK privileges 2 Find and select the drive or folder you want to share click
115. ri rouse button LA 4 A keystroke combination is O A Pressing two or more keys at the same time like pressing ift gt and lt Tab gt keys at the same time B A way to lock your computer to prevent unauthorized yy To unlock the computer simply retype your keystroke combinatig C Using the keyboard in conjunction with the mouscQp D A type of mixed drink 5 To display a shortcut menu for an object ay the following A Point to the object and press lt Ctrl gt lt P gt B Touch the object on screen with you r C Click the object D Right click the object 6 The lt F1 gt key displays help Cn whatever you re working on True or False O Homework 1 Turn on PANA uter and start Windows XP 2 Find poi Pana click the Start button then close the Start menu without selecting anytlat Fin double click My Computer Shut down Windows by selecting Shut down from the Start menu verifying the Shut down option is selected and clicking the OK button Your Organization s Name Here 32 Microsoft Windows XP Quiz Answers 1 C Microsoft Windows is an Operating System 2 False Windows uses both the left and right mouse buttons 3 B Move the pointer by moving the mouse until the pointer points to that spot 4 A Akeystroke combination is when you press two or more keys at time for example lt Shift gt lt Tab gt D Right click the object e True Pressing the lt F1 gt key displays help on whatever
116. right or left To Delete a Program from the Quick Launch toolbar Right click the program s button on the Quick Launch toolbar and select Delete from the shortcut menu To Hide Display the Quick Launch toolbar e Right click any empty area on the taskbar and select Toolbars Quick Launch from the shortcut menu Your Organization s Name Here 1 36 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 5 6 Opening Recently Used Documents Figure 5 14 Customize Start Menu General Advanced The My Recent O My Documents Start menu settings amp Internet Documents menu keeps a listing of the files you most Fe My Recent Documents gt Budget w Cindy s goodbye letter recently used Figure 5 15 You can choose to clear your list of Most Recently Used Documents fa Notepad th Wo Microsoft Word 97 Microsoft Excel A ee QuickBooks Pro AA Adobe Acrobat 5 0 2 My Pictures c My Music PL My Computer ite Control Panel e Connect To 2 Printers and Faxes Help and Support a Courseware Providers B Junk File Progress Notes Start menu tems E Control Panel Display as a Display as nu Dont em Enable draggi dropping Favori menu a ap HyperSnap Dx 4 tal j9 Search All Programs gt Log Off Q Shut Down Figure 5 14 Windows remembers the files that Hed most recently so you can quickly retrieve them without having to dig through sev
117. ry Min on 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Two Working witha lt Window Rs Chapter Objectives Starting a program Understanding the parts of a window Minimizing maximizing and restoring a win Moving and closing a window Changing the size of a window Switching between several progra O Tiling and cascading windows Ww No doubt about it computers are sophistica d complex machines To make computers easier to use Microsoft designed Windows to oP amp ate how you work at the desk in your office When you work at your desk you spr id everything out grab a piece of paper work on it for a while and then shuffle another PV paper on top of it That s how Windows works except instead of working with you work with windows boxes that contain programs and information You can shuffle these win which is why the main Wi working with a lot of tle difficult to find thi ound the screen just like you shuffle papers on your desk s screen 1s called the desktop Just like your desk if you re at the same time the Windows desktop can become messy and n This chapter expl to manage the windows and programs on your screen First you ll learn how to indow Next you ll discover the parts that constitute a window which are A LOT rft than the ones on your house Then you ll learn how to change the size of a window mimmizing it to a tiny little icon that appears only on the Taskbar and
118. small removablg c about the size of a floppy disk drives because each casset acan usually hold more than 100 MB and is as fast as a hard drive Q Most computers come with a floppy drive a hard drive and a D UM drive Your computer labels these drives with letters as shown in Table 4 1 Common 8mputer Disks Drives Just as liquids are measured in quarts and gallons computg e their information in units called bytes Unlike gallons computers use the metric S kilobyte and 1 000 000 one million bytes make up G byte as shown in Table 4 2 How Memory is Measured Table 4 2 How Memory is Measured N Description Size Byte A byte can store a sif le character A single character such as the letter jor numeral 8 Kilobyte A kilobyte K abut 1 000 bytes 1 024 bytes K or KB 1 024 to b A kilobyte is RE 7 inl A age of double spaced typing Megabyte ak 1 048 576 bytes MB or MEG avn Your Organization s Name Here 90 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 4 2 Using My Computer to See What s in Your Computer Figure 4 3 P My Computer Local Disk C Properties File Edit View Favorites Tools Help General Tools Ha rdware i Sharing Sec i My Computer displays the D BB seh fy Folders Fi lt drives folders Address 4 My Computer wy directories and files that Hard Disk Drives Type Local Disk i System Tasks File system NTFS amp are in your computer PON system i
119. such as H to the ridGyork folder Clicking the Drive list arrow lets 2 Right click the folder and you select from those drive letters tha t currently in use Checking Reconnect at select Map Network login check box will remap the ne older to its assigned drive letter whenever Drive from the shortcut you start your computer If the ect at login check box is left blank then the menu network folder will only be magped to its assigned drive letter until you turn off your 3 Select a Drive letter from computer A the Drive list and check Once a network folder ha mapped it appears as a drive in My Computer the Reconnect at login check box if you want to permanently map the Select a drive lette login check box i the Drive list and check the Reconnect at want to permanently map the network folder l network folder Decide you don t o be mapped to a network folder anymore Then here s how to disconnect a ewnetwork drive To Disconnect a Mapped Open My ceases or Windows Explorer right click the network drive NERON PUNVE you want sconnect from and select Disconnect Network Drive e Open My Computer or from rtcut menu Windows Explorer right click the network drive you want to disconnect from and select Disconnect Network Drive from the shortcut menu Your Organization s Name Here 282 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 10 12 The Add Printers Wizard asks if you want to connect to a
120. the Paste button on the Standard toolbar Or Select Edit Paste from the menu Or Press lt Ctrl gt lt V gt Your Organization s Name Here 70 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 3 11 Changing the Font Type and Size Figure 3 18 Letter WordPad File Edit View Insert Format Help Select a font from the font Deh l amp list Albertus MT Figure 3 19 Albertus MT Lt Antique Olive Compact Antique Olive Roman Apple Chancery Mae l em Sie Seen Slag O Aral uld not have been so strong Pizzy s barking is driving hee er the strength of your product O Anal Black Ty Anal Narow AvantGarde Bodoni Figure 3 18 o her shaggy little pelt That was in July The Font dialog box The currently ew T Select the font type selected font type i a O Bold and or Italic O Arial O kta Select the font type Seaside eer raim Change the size of O a MS 6 the font Special font formatting Fiects effects 3 fares Preview of the Change the color gt k ipt current font of the font s settings Figure 3 19 gt In this lesso working with font ishe oul learn how to change the font or text size and style Although you ll be ge WordPad program the basic procedure for changing the size and type of a sale in all Windows programs ve the insertion point the very end of the document and press Enter gt twice to add a blank line Other Way
121. the AS Qr press Folders describes each of these folders button Although we ll be working in Microsoft Outlook Express throughout the remaining an Other Ways to Start this chapter Outlook Express is by no means the only program you can use to send and Outlook Express receive e mail There are many many different e mail programs available such as ne e Select Go Mail from GroupWise Lotus Notes and even America Online that can also send and receive Internet Explorer s fact if you re connected to the Internet and have a Web browser you don t even cr an e menu mail program at all to send and receive e mail you can do it right from the Wi eb based e mail is usually free and it allows you to compose send and receive e m fey a Web page instead of an e mail program Many people actually prefer using Web d e mail instead of an e mail program because it s free and can be accessed anyw there is a computer with an Internet connection Hotmail shown in Figure 9 22 d by Microsoft who else is the largest Web based e mail program in the world Table 9 3 E mail Folders Description G v Stores the messages you ve rece ey a Temporarily stores any mess at you ve composed that have not been sent Quick Reference Q Stores copies of me To Start Outlook Express p e Click the Outlook Stores messages Mat you ve deleted Express button on the Deleted Items taskbar s Quick Launch toolbar
122. the clock on the taskbar 2 Click the Time Zone tab select the time zone from the list box and click OK Your Organization s Name Here 154 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 6 7 The Advanced Volume control dialog box Media Player icon Lesson 6 3 Adjusting your Computer s Volume ii Volume Control Adjust the Options Help volume by dragging the slider up or Balance Balance Balance Balance P a cee ee a i Volume Volume Volume Volume Control Wave SW Synth CD Player Sigmatel Audio Figure 6 7 If your computer has a sound card that is properly you will be able to listen to sound and adjust the sound s volume If you doatt gready have a volume dial on your speakers this lesson will show you how you can adjust your computer s volume something useful to know if you have someone in your hjrn uses the computer to play loud annoying computer games Let s get some sound rolling an Internet connection and you to listen to sound I to listen to sound from Sgsmou can see the effects of volume adjustment You must have AS card in your computer to do steps 1 and 2 which allow u t have these requirements skip to step 3 you won t be able omputer Launch toolbar on the left of the Windows taskbar lick the Windows Media Player icon The Wj Toys Media Player opens 2 Clic Radio Tuner tab and choose a radio station to play under PS red Stations Windows Media Player looks
123. the computer that contains the files or folders you want to use 4 C The computer s shared folders appear in the window as shown in Figure 10 10 although the folders you see will undoubtedly be different You know what t from here double click the folder you want to open no different than in M Computer or Windows Explorer If nothing appears in the window when double click a computer it either means that computer doesn t have any share s or else your network administrator hasn t given you the rights to view those folders If a shared folder is password protected a password dialog box Q when you i double click the folder Simply type the password and click OK want Windows to remember your password for the network folder check the this password in your password list box and you won t have to retype the rd the next time you try to open the folder NS co i LL Quick Reference If you access the same network folder frequently it makeS s nse to map it and assign it Quick Referenc a drive letter so you don t have to spend as much injing and opening the folder To Map a Network Drive every time Here s how to map a network drive 1 Open My Network Right click the network folder you want to M amp p and select Map Network Places and find the Drive from the shortcut menu computer and folder you The Map Network Drive dialog box appear typ shown in Figure 10 11 You have to want to map assign a drive letter
124. the name of the user account or group that you want to grant er deny permission to the shared folder 5 if you know the name of the user account s or group s enter it t the text box and click OK If you don t know the exact name of the user account s or amie click Advanced to open the Advanced Select Users or Groups i box shown in Figure 10 29 and click Find Now to browse ll av amp ilable user accounts and groups Select the user account s or gr and click OK OK when you re finished Qy t Great Now you can grant or deny permissions for the user or group 6 Select the group or user account whose permissi you want to modify and then check or uncheck the permissions you Want to grant or deny Repeat for all the groups and or user accoun y Refer to Table 10 2 Types of Access for more h O about the different types of access Move on to the next step when you have spe ified the permissions for all the groups and or user account 7 Click OK OK to close the remaining Na og boxes If you no longer want a user group or HR Y ed in the Permissions dialog box you can remove them by selecting their name Remove Table 10 2 Types of Access 4 Users can also be Access Level reate change move and delete files in the folder and may hare folders and change permissions Quick Reference To Change Permissions to a Shared Folder or Printer 1 Make sure that you are ged on to Windows XP a
125. the new user S we Lesson 10 5 Creating a New User User Accounts _ _ Users Advanced Go Users for this computer Use the list below to grant or deny users access to your computer and to change passwords and other settings Add New User Domain JONLAPTOP JONLAPTOP User Name 3 administrator K gi Jon Group Administrators Administrators Remove Properties Password for Administrator To change the password for Administrator click Reset Ae Password Reset Password Figure 10 15 Add New User Restricted user Users can operate the c but cannot install pr Other J Figure 10 17 Aa Users Group d save documents system settings sh r Windows XP based computer with several people you may want to create a unt so that each person can have their own personalized settings on the ach user account contains personalized settings for new com missions These have to be setup by a network administrator Permissions give you cess to some areas of the network while restricting your from others Windows XP even allows you to restrict access to individual files and folders saved on your own computer more about that later Wallpaper and screen colors Each user can decorate their desktop with their own wallpaper and Windows screen colors to suit their own personal tasks e Start menu and shortcuts Each user account has its o
126. the paper clip icon and then click the file y nt to open from the list that appears from the paper clip e To Print a Message Mart above steps to read the message then select File Print from the menu or press lt lt P gt Click OK to print the message Replying to sage e To Reply to Message Find and open the message you want to reply to click the reply option you wan g Reply to Author or Reply to All Type your reply and click the Send button on the to hen you re finished For ing a Message orward a Message Find and select the message you want to forward and click the orward Message button on the toolbar enter the recipient s e mail address in the To field enter N your own comments in the message body area and click the gt Send button on the toolbar A e To Delete a Message Select the message you want to delete and press the lt Delete gt key 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Nine Exploring the Internet 273 Quiz p P A Web server is A The world s largest supercomputer that contains and runs the Internet B A computer that stores Web pages and that is always connected to the Internet C A computer that acts as a gateway between your office network and the Internet D A waiter at a restaurant for spiders A Home page is the first Web page you see when you connect to the Internet True or False Which button on Internet Explorer s toolbar bring
127. the song that is currently playing as shown in Figurg You can select from many different visualizations by buttons Your ty Mepmmercial web site that lets you access the latest music movies and v AN the Internet Internet connection required Copy from CD aiS Ps T copy songs from CDs onto your hard drive layer Media Guide Media Library r gt you organize and listen to media files such as MP3 files that are stored on ur computer s local disk Radio Tuner Lets you listen to radio stations from around the world that are broadcast on the Internet Internet connection required Copy to CD or Lets you copy videos or music onto CDs MP3 players etc Device Skin Chooser Lets you change the appearance of the Windows Media Player Other Ways to Start the Windows Media Player e Click the li button on the Windows Quick Launch toolbar and click the e Click the Start button Oy select Programs gt Windows Media Player Quick Reference To Open the Windows Media Player Click the lil button on the Windows Quick Launch toolbar To Play an Audio CD e Simply insert the CD into your computer s CD ROM drive The CD Player program will automatically play the CD To Change Songs 1 Click the Now Playing tab 2 Use the button controls to stop play pause skip to the previous or next song To Record Songs from a CD to Your Hard Drive 1 In the Copy from CD tab check the son
128. then the cnn www cnn com Excel 2002 ifi FrontPage 2 0 specific Web EN customguide www c FrontPage 2 Print On Demand Courseware a E Outlook 98 page FY Computer trainin nade Sani dailynews yahoo da Outlook 20 2 aa ki ey P meida A kiss www kiss com Poue o00 E microsoft www micr Po _o it 2002 Can t find your way back to thay yall neat 101 Lutefisk Recipes Web site you were looking at yesterday Don t worry Winternet Explorer keeps track of the Web pages you ve visited during the past 20 da can use Internet Explorer s history feature to easily return to any of these sites and th e topic of this lesson 1 Make sure yo 2 Click ogy button on the toolbar to display a list of the Web pages you have r evently visited History button A histg ofall the Web pages you ve visited recently appears in the left side of Inte NX porer The history is grouped chronologically all you have to do it click in or week you viewed the Web page that you want to view again the day or week you viewed the Web page that you want to view ain b browser is open so you re connected to the Internet 3 X f you can t remember the day or week off hand don t worry Finding the Web page you want to view in the history may take a bit of trial and error because who really QY remembers the exact day when they visited a specific Web page When you click a day or week the Web
129. to read all the information from the original puter s memory source disk into y 5 When pro asert the second destination disk and press lt Enter gt computer s configuration Windows may ask you to swap the two es to copy all the information from one to the other opy procedure by following the on screen instructions Figure 8 2 aX Copy Disk dialog box Quick Reference To Copy a Floppy Disk 1 Insert the source floppy you want to copy into the floppy drive 2 Open My Computer right click the floppy drive and select Copy Disk from the shortcut menu 3 Click Start 4 Follow the on screen instructions and insert the source and destination disks as prompted OO O ee Your Organization s Name Here 2 1 O Microsoft Windows XP Figure 8 3 The Tools tab of the C Properties dialog box Figure 8 4 The Checking Disk progress dialog box s Error checking icon Turning off your computer without Lesson 8 3 Repairing Disk Errors Local Disk C Properties X Check Disk Local Disk C PI General Tools Hardware Sharing Security Quota l Check disk options Eror checking Automatically fix file system errors Scan for and attempt recovery of bad This option will check the volume for emors Defragmentation amp This option will defragment files on the volume of a Defragment Now Backup E es This option will ba
130. to this printer If you know the printer name and the S computer or server name you can enter it in the Network path or queue route box like this Computer Name Printer Name More than likely you won t know the printer name and will have to move on to the next step and browse for the A printer on the network Since the most networks don t use Microsoft s Activg amp Directory yet this is the option that you usually use to connect to a BN printer e Connect to a printer on the Internet or on a home on e network If you know a printer s URL and if you have permission p us that S printer you can connect to a printer on the Internet by typing the name Quick Reference To Connect to a Network and the computer or server name like this Computer Name 6 Select the Connect to this printer option and click ie The Browse for Printer dialog box appears as shown in Figure 1 First you will Printer have to specify the network domain or workgroup where the n printer is located 1 Open the Printers folder 7 If necessary click the next to the desired networ ymain or workgroup by clicking the Start to display its computers button and selecting All the computers with shared printers on the network donin or workgroup should Sadit Aas appear all you have to do is select the computer an Pinter you want to which you 2 Click E Add a printer want to connect from the Printer Tasks 8 Click the next to
131. v 10 Anal Dragging a window s edge or corner changes the size of the window 1 Point at the border of 2 Click and hold the the window until the mouse button and Dutton when the pointer changes to drag the border of window is the size at the window you want Figure 2 12 If you ve been following the lessons in this chy you should already know how to change the size of a window or program by minimi aximizing and restoring it This lesson explains how you can fine tune the size o Widow to meet your own specific needs T Th if 1 Make sure the WordPad Aes all appears as a window and doesn t fill the n 7 oer pone entire screen changes shapes over j A window doesn t have NQ iniz fill up the entire screen or minimized the border of a ae adoi appear only as a xO the Taskbar if you want to manually size it 2 Position the mou inter over the right border of the WordPad window until it change9 o a t The two arrow t in the directions that you can drag the window s border in this case left ad you positioned the pointer over the top or bottom of the window the gginter would have changed to a J indicating that you could drag the top or bottor of the window up or down NOTE indows is very picky where you place the pointer and sometimes it can be tricky finding the exact spot where the pointer changes It s there just move N the pointer slowly over the bord
132. want to save your file as here 2 my Pictures File name Document Save as type Rich Text Format RTF Look in list Select the drive or folder where the file you want to open is located in db ERA an Adobe My eBooks Amy Music A My Pictures Displays files located in the selected drive or folder select the file you want to open here My Documents T My Computer The letter file Once ey created something in a program you must save the file if you ever want to use it agaj future When you save a file you re transferring it from your computer s me hich is erased when you close the program to the computer s local disk which is per t and not erased when you close the program In this lesson you will learn how to ile and then open or retrieve it from the local disk Click the Save button on the Standard toolbar The Save As dialog box appears as shown in Figure 3 11 You must give your file a name and specify where you want to save it First tell the computer you want to save the file in your Practice folder 2 Navigate to and open your practice folder or floppy disk Your computer stores information in files and folders just like you store information in a filing cabinet To open a file you must first find and open the folder where it s saved The Save dialog box has its own toolbar that make it easy to browse through your co
133. want to return your ww to that state later In thy on you will learn how to use System Restore Click the Start button and select All Programs Accessories gt WL System Tools System Restore QY The Welcome to System Restore window appears You can select one of two options 4 P e Restore my computer to an earlier time This option lets you undo the changes made to your computer by selecting a restore point on a calendar e Create a restore point Windows XP automatically creates restore points but you can also create your own restore points manually by selecting this option This is useful if you are about to make a major change to your computer such as installing a new program or new hardware Since Windows XP automatically creates restore points for you most of the time you will select the first option 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer 233 2 Make sure the Restore my computer to an earlier time option is selected and click Next The Choose a Restore Point window appears as shown in Figure 8 33 The calendar displays the current month and the days for which there are restore points available Each day that has a restore point appears in bold 3 Select the most recent day that has a restore point when your computer was working properly The right side of the window displays the restore points that are available for the day you selected if you were m
134. windows open at the same time one window with the source file s and another Move to or Copy to fr window for the destination where you want to move or copy the file s the menu 3 Drag the Current Budget file to the Accounting folder Or The Current Budget file is moved to or inside the Accounting folder Open the e Right click the file and Accounting folder to make sure the file was moved select where you want 4 Double click the Accounting folder to open it to copy the file from the Sure enough the Current Budget file has been moved to the Accounting folder You shortcut menu can also move and copy files 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 101 10 11 12 Click the Current Budget file to select it Now that the file is selected you can move it to a different location Click Move this file in the File and Folder Tasks panel The Move Items dialog box appears as shown in Figure 4 15 Now you can tell Windows where you want to move the selected file The Move Items dialog box displays the drives and folders on your computer in a hierarchical view A plus symbol or a minus symbol E beside a folder means a folder contains several subfolders Normally these subfolders are hidden You can display the hidden folders within a folder by clicking the plus sign H beside the folder Click the Plus Symbol to the left of the 53 My Computer icon c My Computer e
135. words or numbers that people could associate with you such as the name of your dog or your birthday The best passwords of all combine letters and numbers For example a good password would be rose007 amp 5 Click OK e A dialog box appears confirming that your password has been changed 6 Click OK to close the dialog box and click Cancel to close the wind XP Security dialog box That s all there is to changing your password Make sure you write down your row Mord so that you don t forget it next time you have to log on to Windows XP lt xO Quick Reference To Change Your User A Password Oo 1 Press lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt lt Delete gt 2 Click the Change e Password button 3 Type your old password in O the Old Password box and press the lt Tab gt key 4 Type your new password in the New Password box press lt Tab gt and QY type your new password A again in the Confirm New KY Password box 5 Click OK to close the dialog box and click Cancel to close the Windows XP Security dialog box Your Organization s Name Here 290 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 10 9 Sharing Your Files and Printer on the Network Local Disk C SEE Database Properties Figure 10 24 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay General Sharing Secu sty Customize Share a selected folder by Q Q 8 Ps Ba Gir meth To crude sles fortas elder cha 5 i li
136. you re unfamiliar with these terms Close the Properties dialog box by clicking its Close uO The Properties dialog box closes Go ahead and close the My Coy window to complete the lesson Q Close the My Computer window Getting the hang of opening and exploring your computer con we ll be doing a lot Quick Reference more snooping inside the contents of your computer throughout rest of this chapter To View the Contents of Q Your Computer Q e Click the Start button and click the My Computer xO icon To View the Contents of a O Disk Drive e Follow the above step to open My Computer and then double click the drive ry you want to open To View the Properties of O Something WN e Right click the drive Yor folder or file and select Ww Properties from the shortcut menu Your Organization s Name Here 92 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 4 3 Opening a Folder My Documents Figure 4 6 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Double click a folder to O M psh Py Folders fi open it and view its s My Documents contents D Oo My My eBooks My Music My Pictures My Videos F igure 4 7 Other Places refugees J The files and folders My Webs appear in the window Figure 4 6 Sample Pictures File Edit View Favorites Tools Help The Address bar displays the z name of the current drive and Picture Tasks folder File and Folder Tasks y Other Places y
137. you want to select Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the insertion point across the text releasing the mouse button once the text is selected e Selecting Text with the Keyboard Move the insertion point to the beginning or end of the text you want to select and press and hold the lt Shift gt key while you use the arrow keys to select the text e Double click the word to select it e Typing replaces any selected text pressing the lt Delete gt or lt Backspace gt key deletes any selected text amp amp e Deselect text by clicking anywhere on the screen gt Using Undo W e To Undo Your Last Action Click the Undo button on the Standard toolbar or se it gt Undo from the menu or press lt Ctrl gt lt Z gt Printing a File O e Printa file by clicking the Print button on the Standard toolbar or by sel amp tyrg File Print from the menu or by pressing lt Ctrl gt lt P gt e Select File Print from the menu to display the Print dialog no allows you to specify printing options such as printing specific pages or multiple OF Cutting Copying and Pasting Text Q e To Cut Something Select the text or object you Qu Cut the selection by clicking the Cut button on the Standard toolbar or by selecting Ed ut from the menu or by pressing lt Ctrl gt lt X gt u want to copy Copy the selection by clicking the ecting Edit Copy from the menu or by pressing e To Copy So
138. you want to assign a sound then click the Browse button and spec e location and name of the sound file you want to assign to the event Click the Play button en to the selected sound and click OK Oo Adjusting the Mouse Ww e Open the Mouse Properties dialog box b Q the Start button click Control Panel and click the Printers and Other Hardware ico e To Switch the Left and Right Mouse Buttons Open the Buttons tab in the Mouse Properties dialog box select either the Righ d or Left handed option and click OK e To Change the Double cligk drag the Pointer Speed Open the Buttons tab in the Mouse Properties dialog box new position and click OK e To Change Pointer ty pen the Pointer Options tab in the Mouse Properties dialog box select the desired poi tions and click OK LA elders Look and Work A Folders Work Open Control Panel Appearance and Themes Folder e menu Customizing e To Cust Options Customizing Folder View Options e To Customize Folder View Options Open Control Panel Appearance and Themes gt Folder Options from the menu Click the View tab select the desired folder view options and click OK Your Organization s Name Here 176 Microsoft Windows XP Quiz gt Used only for advanced networking settings the Control Panel should never be touched by ordinary users True or False Which of the following statements is NOT true A You can change the display s
139. 1 MYiick the Start button AN Select Run from the Start menu The Run dialog box appears as shown in Figure 5 17 If you know the program s used to run programs You see before Windows there was an operating system called A filename and location you can type it in the Open box Actually this is how people MS DOS MS DOS didn t have any cute icons windows or picture there was nothing to point and click at all People would start programs by typing the program s name and pressing lt Enter gt Yuck 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Five Customizing the Taskbar and Desktop 1 39 Enough of the history lesson Remember that the Run command was a little technical That s because you have to know the name of the program and the program s path the drive and folders it s in A path is like a street address containing the drive letter followed by a colon followed by folders which must be separated by backslashes and then the name of the program For example to run the Notepad program you would type C WINDOWS NOTEPAD 3 Type C windows notepad in the Open text box and click OK The Notepad program opens 4 Close the Notepad program Typing the program name and path is difficult and impossible if you don t know the exact name of the file and folders Isn t there an easier way to get the name and path o A the program in the Open box Sure you can find the program you want to run bye br
140. 2 If Windows doesn t recognize the new o install the device b r of them on your computer for example most bie IRQs and for the most part several hardware urce For example if you were trying to install a modem is already using IRQ 3 the modem isn t going to work hardware click the Start So what s the solution n change the resource settings for most devices either through button then click Control Windows or by mov e pins or switches on the hardware device itself refer to the Panel Performance hardware s user m or how to do this and Maintenance gt chapter We ll talk on and changing the resource settings of your computer later on in the System 3 Click the Hardware tab and click the Add Hardware Wizard button 4 Click Next and follow the on screen instructions to have Windows search for your new hardware Your Organization s Name Here 230 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 8 14 Using the Windows Internet Update Feature F Microsoft Windows Update Microsoft Internet Explorer SE Figure 8 3 1 Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Bak Q gt a A Search kg Favorites a Media amp i A wy Cam 33 The Microsoft Windows earl El il Callens Address http v4 windowsupdate microsoft com en default asp v Go Links All Products Support Search microsoft com Guide Update Web page Select G the software you want to Windows Update
141. 3 24 Left right centered and justified paragraphs Align Right button a Center button Align Left button Quick Reference To Change a Paragraph s Alignment e Place the insertion point in the paragraph and click the Align Left Center or Align Right button Or e Place the insertion point in the paragraph select Format Paragraph from the menu and select the alignment from the Alignment list Your Organization s Name Here 74 Microsoft Windows XP E O O Lesson 3 14 Getting Help by Contents E WordPad SE E WordPad Figure 3 25 The Contents tab of the Contents index Search WordPad Au 9 Contents index Search l VE WordPad H g WordPad Help window Gd WordPad overview overview Ga WordPad overview S PpO With WordPad you can create s ra VordPad you can create se WordPa e se a p PAi ci Fi ure 3 26 Fomat Tat and edit simple text documents NG onat Text nd edit simple text documents g Pint or documents with complex fa Create a bulleted list SPdocuments with complex Create Connections with Other Docum formatting and graphics You 2 Change a font type d ormatting and graphics You Using the Help Viewer can link or embed information 2 Indent a paragraph can link or embed information You can expand a Help from other documents into a 2 Change the alignm l from other documents into a Topic WordPad document 2 Set or remove tab sto WordPad document
142. 4 Mar 97 fro e e list box and click OK That s all there is to formatting values not t as you thought it would be was it The following table lists the five buttons on the ng toolbar you can use to apply number formatting to the values in your workshe Table 4 2 Number For ting gt tons on the Formatting Toolbar Button Name Formatting ExapeaieN Mron p Ray ormana ima H com QO pi eem immediately after the step warning you of pitfalls that you could encounter if you re KN S 422 c 5 Anything you need to type appears like this Q rency Style button Whenever there is more than one way to do something the most common method is presented in the lesson and the alternate methods are presented in the margin Type the dollar sign before you enter a number Tables provide summaries of the terms toolbar buttons or C Quick Reference shortcuts covered in the lesson To Apply Number Formatting Select the cell or cell range you want to format and click the appropriate number formatting button s on the Formatting toolbar Or CustomGuide s exclusive Quick eoe Reference is great for when you need to know how to do Cells from the menu click the Number tab and specify the number formatting you want an something fast It also lets you 1 Sl sonal you review what you ve learned in cell or cell range and select the lesson Format Cells from the shortcut menu click
143. 5 The Date and Time dialog box Figure 3 6 The updated WordPad document Lesson 3 2 How to Use Toolbars Document WordPad File Edit View Insert Format Help Tah amp Ei Document WordPad File Edit View Insert Format Help Cee SG a Arial mI 1n AFR DRA Figure 3 5 Toolbars are another common wa DOSS your programs around While menus contain every conceivable command for a p m toolbars contain buttons only for the commands you use most frequently Instead of to wade through several menus to do something you can click a single button Two tooR ars appear in the WordPad program the Standard toolbar and Formatting toolbar Th ard toolbar appears on top and contains buttons for the most frequently used co in WordPad such as saving and printing a document The Formatting tool cated right underneath the Standard toolbar and has buttons for quickly aa sc ts and paragraphs We small icons to indicate what they do For example a small picture of a on the Print button If you still don t know what a button is used for move the pointego e button and wait a few seconds Usually a little window will appear with a brief 0 ion of the button 1 rick after the date you entered in the last lesson and press the lt Enter gt wy key to add a blank line a X Position the mouse pointer over the Date Time button on WordPad s Date Time Z Standard toolbar as shown in Figure 3 4 A small wind
144. 5 Create a new folder named 2002 in the root directory of the C drive Need a refresher on how to create a folder First you need to click the C drive in the left folder pane to select it and display its contents in the right pane Next click Make a new folder from the File and Folder Tasks menu in the blue side bar type 2002 and press lt Enter gt 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 1 17 Move the 2002 folder in the root directory of the C drive to the Accounting folder by dragging the 2002 folder from the right pane to the Accounting folder in the left pane Verify that the 2002 folder was moved inside the Accounting folder Click the plus symbol beside the Accounting folder to display the files in the Accounting folder The Accounting folder expands and displays all the folders inside it Try deleting a folder using Windows Explorer you already know the technique Click the 2001 folder to select it press the lt Delete gt key and then confirm the deletion It doesn t matter if you use the left or right pane to select a folder they re the same amp folder and you can rename copy move and delete folders in either pane of the NA window QY Q Close the My Computer window to end this lesson lt Congratulations You ve just about completed what is probably the most difficult hapter in the book Move on to the review sections and see how much you ve learned lt
145. 5 2004 Microsoft Corporation Figure 1 3 User Mame The Windows XP Desktop Password Log on To O Log on using dial up connection ou get to work after taking off your jacket and grabbing a cup of coffee you probably your day by turning on your computer and starting Windows This lesson explains how do the absolute most basic thing there is to do with your computer turn it on Windows A hould automatically start after you turn on your computer If it doesn t or if a confusing looking screen greets you this lesson also explains what you need to do to load Windows 1 Turn on your computer s monitor The On Off switch for most monitors is located just below the monitor s screen Most monitors won t display anything until the computer is turned on 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter One The Fundamentals 15 4 5 Turn on your computer Finding your computer s On Off switch for the first time can be a little tricky Refer to your computer s reference manual if you can t find the On Off switch for your computer Your computer should make a whirring sound and several clicks and or beeps after you turn it on and as it powers up NOTE If nothing happens when you turn your computer on first check the computer s power cord is it plugged into to the wall or power strip Check the other end of the power cord is it securely plugged into the back of the computer If your computer is plugged into a
146. 5535 A a ate ablat FP Figure 3 16 This lesson will show you how to send whatever you re working on t printer Printing is one of the easiest things to do in Windows 1 Sac i X Other Ways to Print I rint from the menu O ba ji k o aa e Click the Print The Print dialog box appears as shown in Figure 3 e Print dialog box may differ button if it appears on depending on the program you re using but it s ally contain the options listed the toolbar in Table 3 4 Print Dialog Box Options 2 Click OK e Press lt Ctrl gt lt P gt g i Windows sends the document to the printer A Quick Reference Table 3 4 Print Dialog Box Option QJ Print option To Print a File Name Used to select what printer to send your file to when it prints if you are e Click the Print button connected t Shan one printer The currently selected printer is on the Standard toolbar Or Properties To ic Iter e Select File Print from size you want to use if your document should be printed in color or the menu bide aid white etc Or Page range s you to specify what pages you want printed There are several e Press lt Ctrl gt lt P gt All Prints the entire document Selection Prints only the text you have selected before selecting the print command Pages Prints only the pages of the file you specify Select a range of pages with a hyphen like 5 8 and separate single pages with a comma like 3 7
147. 6 installing Tocalsri iiis 224 network connect to sesessseseess 282 Printers dolde eanna 225 282 printing aI I E E T AT 267 number Of COPIES sscauwisiasus 67 OPU ONS 2256 0 ecne ine coer ease 67 Page Tanp er ER 67 Propere earan E a 67 Selecting printers cece ceeeeeeeeees 67 programs adding to the Quick Launch toolbar 134 ol 015 E ae ner ee 40 frozen shutting dowN c 606 22 TINS CATING 2 fos co haat ahaha araa 218 MAXIMIZE aroe e 38 MDZE e 38 opening files 11 eee c cece ccceceeees 62 printing from ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 67 rEM V S cnini eniti 220 FESTOTINO reniei A Ee Ea 38 saving files in ccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 62 scheduling nnennnneeeneneeeeeeeeeeee 216 SHOMMCUUS TO eieo ceire ner dea ieira nnnaei stn 140 SLATE ae i aat 34 starting automatically 008 142 starting from the Run command 138 switching between ccccceeeeeee 44 2000 CustomGuide com Index 305 Q Quick Launch toolbar 134 R RD command DOS 000000000000000000 119 receiving eMail raosna 266 Recycle lias cusses sean ced AN 16 GIMP y INO aope EE A 102 retrieving deleted files from 102 refresh a Web page wax sxivecrtecernictonen 251 removable drive ceeeeeeeeeeeessstteeeees 89 removing software cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 220 RENAME command DOS 119 renaming HOS ans raat cantn sill atl Ose ni 9
148. 8 10 6 2 henner ree tee 94 replacing TEX ty neice Ide nh cena 64 repliye mall eee me ee i 268 resizing a WINKOW ccceeeseeseseeeeeeeees 42 resolution Changing cccceeeeeeeee 160 Restart option seoanei i 29 restoring a WINdOW cccceeseseeeeeeeeees 36 restoring Syste eiciia 232 right mouse button cccseeeeeeeeeeees 24 THOM CH CKING erien eii 24 TOOUTOIOCE aea e E S 93 FRU COMMMAIIG eannan 138 S Save AS COMMANA oisss sccdssecnaterdecasecnceds 78 saving files in a program cece eens images from Web pages 4 SCAND ISK autotest thet ew ion 10 scheduling tasks ccccceee cess eo scientific calculator displaying s 182 screen color depth changing x gt seeds 162 colors changing Ry ne 156 resolution changing wy EEO 160 wallpaper adding SJ 158 screen Savef a ee 164 scroll bars QY E ees 36 56 search Web nn hy re ee 252 searching LOrE Sir E A E 110 lala a EE E O EN N A 76 selecting multiple files and folders 108 paint ODI CCIS ctiestrseicddtnceleteiaias 187 DOG eps AEE EEN EAE sk EE EE T 60 yer e160 1025 0 3 4 eer ee ere eee 64 Sending e mail cccccceeeesseeseeeeeees 262 Setup programs cceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 219 sharing PETINISSIONS senean i 292 shortcut Menus seeeneeesssesssseseeeeeeeeeee 24 shortcuts E T E E E E EE 140 O Shut Down Op
149. 95 requires 8 MB of RAM while Windows XP only requires 2 MB of RAM Ka Windows XP gives you the option of viewing and working with contents of your N xo KY 7 Double clicking the desktop opens the Display Properties dialog box which allows you to change any screen settings such as Windows colors screen resolution and desktop wallpaper True or False Homework 1 Change Windows wallpaper to River Sumida in center format 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Six Customizing Windows 177 Change Windows screen colors to the Silver color scheme and then back to the previous color scheme Change Windows Asterisk event to the tada sound and then back to the original sound Try out your video card s various screen resolutions to see which one you like best Adjust your mouse s pointer speed and double click speed to suit your preferences Your Organization s Name Here 178 Microsoft Windows XP Quiz Answers 1 False The Control Panel is where you go to make changes to Windows and your computer While there are a few technical areas in the Control Panel most of it is straightforward and easy to understand D You can use your own pictures and graphics as wallpaper in addit to Windows preset wallpaper settings C These are all examples of screen resolutions AS A and C Fortunately there isn t a Duke of Hazard desktoj WY that ships with Windows XP or any themes for that matt
150. Addresses es of everyone you correspond with especially when they have e mail addresses that Address Book something like brad james traindept gold tc umn edu Fortunately if you use the button ndows Address Book you don t have to Simply enter the peoples name and e mail Address Book obscure e mail address again This lesson will show you how to add an e mail address to the Other Ways to Open th A ddresses to whom you regularly send messages and yov ll never have to remember another e Press lt Ctrl gt K Address Book 1 Ifitisnt already open start Outlook Express by clicking the Outlook Express button on the taskbar s Quick Launch toolbar The Outlook Express main program screen appears 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Nine Exploring the Internet 265 Click the Address Book button on the Outlook Express toolbar The Address Book window appears as shown in Figure 9 26 Two types of items appear in the Windows Address Book e Contacts Contacts are the individual recipients in your Address Book Grou ps A group allows you to send messages to a group of recipients Click the New button on the Windows Address Book toolbar E New The New Entry dialog box appears with the Personal tab in front as shown in Figure 9 28 Choose what type of entry you d like to create and where you want to put it Oy saan Choose Internet Mail Address in the Select the Entry Type box and r amp select Pe
151. Common Color Depths Color Depth Description No longer supported in Windows XP 256 colors was tNe sRindard color depth for Windows years ago but most computers and vide s are fast enough to run with more colors without taking a performance ing this color depth obsolete in Windows XP X 256 Colors High Color 16 bit displays roughly 6596 pictures become photo realistic This is pRably the best color depth setting because it can display des v ia without slowing your computer down High Color 16 bit True Color 24 bit and Greater You have to really squint to Much difference between High Color 16 bit and higher levels of color det True Color 24 bit and hfgher display millions of colors at once Depending on how expensive the graphics card in your computer is there may be several higher modes of color oS which continue to display more and more colors on the ly concerns people involved with graphics and design screen This amp gt More Colors Require More Speed and Video Memor Quick Reference To Change the Screen Resolution 1 Right click a blank area on the desktop and select Properties from the shortcut menu 2 Click the Settings tab 3 Click the Colors list and select the Color Depth setting you want to use 4 Click OK Your Organization s Name Here 164 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 6 18 The Screen Saver tab of the Display Properties dialog box Fig
152. Computer fin ie the disk drive or folder where the program you want to install is located and find and double click A the installation program usually called SETUP Qe Removing Software G e To Remove a Program Click the Start button and select Control Panel gt Add or R Programs Click the Change or Remove Programs button find and select the prom you want to remove from your computer and click the Remove button Finish removing ey ed program by following the on screen instructions w Adding and Removing Windows Components gt e Windows XP is normally not installed with all the components that co the software You can add or remove optional Windows components with Add or Remov rams in the Control Panel Installing a Printer To Add or Remove Windows Components Open Add or Gyre Programs by clicking the Start button and selecting Control Panel Add or Remov ms Click the Add Remove Windows Components button and click the box beside thComponent category you want to add or remove You can also add or remove specific com ts within a category Select the category click Details and then click the box beside the co t category you want to add or remove Click OK when you re finished To Install a New Printer Open the P ae by clicking the Start button and selecting Control Panel Printers and ae Add a printer Click Next and follow the on screen instructions Specify how nter is connect
153. False KG Which statement is NOT true about Error checking A You can do a standard or thorough disk scan with Error checking O B Error checking can automatically repair most disk errors it finds C Error checking will find and remove any computer viruses it fir on your disk D A thorough scan of a hard drive takes a long time up to sever rs By right clicking your hard drive and selecting Prop ys you can access all of these programs EXCEPT X A Error checking B Drive Converter FAT32 Q C Disk Defragmenter Q D Disk Cleanup You re a busy person and have better S to do than perform routine maintenance on your computer i anh you do to get out of having to manually run Error checking we Up and Disk Defragmenter every week A Pay someone else to run these pr amp grams for you B Don tuse your computer C Add these programs to th Cp folder in the Programs menu D Add these OERS to k Scheduler You ve finally boug RN Bird Watcher s Encyclopedia CD ROM you ve been wanting for foyi e How do you install it on your computer Select all that apply A Insert the into the drive Windows XP may automatically install it B Insert AS OM open My Computer look for a program file named Setup Tnstg llr something similar and double click that file C Po the taskbar select Properties from the shortcut menu click the Start Ment 8 fograms tab and click the Add butto
154. Internet 24 hours a day so that people can view those Web pages 2 True 3 C The Back button returns you to the Web page you just left 4 C Eudora is a popular e mail program but it doesn t come with wiy XP Outlook Express is the answer you want O 5 False This was a trick question when you click the Send b u save the message to the Inbox folder In order to send any messages tet Rre in the Inbox you need to click the Send and Receive button on the toolbar NA o vem to receive a 6 C Adding a recipient to the Blind Carbon Copy field message without seeing who else received the messa 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Ten Networking with lt Windows XP Chapter Objectives Understanding networks ko Sharing your files and printer with other usA n the network Create and delete a user account Browsing the network Q Connecting to a network drive and ih o gt Chapter Task Learn how use Wi on a network A network is a group of computers that are c ed so that they can share equipment and information If you re using Windows X O almost certainly connected to a large network because Microsoft was ink business networks when it designed Windows XP Computers running Window9 95 and 98 can also be connected to a network but they don t have the built in security featweres that Windows XP does Networking is an enormous topi specialize in installing and pe least a y
155. Map by clicking the Start button and selecting All Programs Acc Rs gt System Tools gt Character Map lt Play and Copy a CD sO e To Open the Windows Media Player Click the 2 button on the Windo gt Launch toolbar e To Play an Audio CD Simply insert the CD into your computer s CD rive The CD Player program will automatically play the CD e To Change Songs Click the CD Audio tab and use the button ny to stop play pause or skip to the previous or next song e To Record Songs from a CD to Your Hard Drive Hol the lt Ctrl gt key as you click the songs you want to record then click the Copy Music button You can find the recorded songs by clicking the Media Library tab e To View an Audio Visualization Click the Mr tab Click the lt a buttons to change the visualization Using the Media Guide lt e To Open the Media Guide Start iias Media Player by clicking its icon in the Quick Launch toolbar and click the Media Gui Using the Media Liba e To Open the Media Li RY star the Windows Media Player by clicking its icon in the Quick Launch toolbar and ickfhe Media Library tab Expand the media category you want by clicking its plus sign Do ck the sound you want to play e To Create aN Click New Playlist enter a name for the playlist and click OK e To aia Kejo a Playlist Select the playlist from the My Playlists area on the left click the plus butto amp gand select Add File
156. Me NT Desktop onto your computer s hard NetSolitaire 2001 drive Play a a bunch of classic card games online for free OS Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 ee e PowerMp3 Figure 9 18 Download and enjoy this multi function MP3 player ID3 ig J tag editor y A Ni My Computer Specify where on your iin eae i hard drive you want the Play turkish music with this instrument a simulator stl et m downloaded file to be OS Windows all j ing i o O avas eS e Document v ance saved Figure 9 17 Figure 9 19 g 73 of baglama exe Completed Windows displays the progress of a download E Saving baglama exe from www gulemekci com Estimated time left 1 sec 535 KB of 753 KB copied Download to C Documents and Setti baglama exe Transfer rate 144 KB Sec C Close this dialog box when download completes Oo Figure 9 19 Another commorS e people use the Internet is to download files from a Web server on the Internet and saye the onto their local hard drive Some of the most common types of files people downlgad om the Internet include wallpaper or anything else you can think of ms Many software companies have demo versions of their programs available e Internet that you can download and evaluate In addition thousands of shareware grams are available for you to download for free atches Fixes and Drivers One of the great things about the Internet is how you QY can find and download bug fixes for your programs a
157. Move a Previous Help Screen or Topic KY e Click the Back button To Print a Help Topic e Click the Options button and select Print Topic Your Organization s Name Here 76 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 3 15 Getting Help with the Help Index and Search Figure 3 28 E Morte g aiy Hide Back Options The Index tab of the Help ee i Contents Index Search dialog box Se To create open or save a WordPad document Figure 3 29 You can create open and save md WordPad documents by clicking i i i the File menu and then W Topics Found dialog i i clicking New Open or Save OK Create a new document Figure 3 30 i Open a document Save changes to a document Click the Ei to display help on what a dialog box n Related Topics control does finding Figure 3 28 Topics Found Click a topic then click Display Title Create open or save a WordPad docu WordPad WordPad overview Figure 3 29 Paragraph Indentation Indentation Right c AO First line eo j Lists the alignments that are available for the selected paragraph Alignment Let Left aligns text at the left indent Right aligns text at the right indent e Center centers the text between margins AS Two more methods of getting help are with the Help Index and Search You use the Help Index just like you would use the index in the back of a book 1 ifthe Help window isn t already open
158. My Computer folders pane at any time all you have to do is click the Folders button on the toolbar Click the Folders button on the toolbar The Windows Explorer folder pane appears The drives and folders in the right pane of the window are the contents of your computer You can see what s in a drive or folder by clicking it in the left Folders pane 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 1 15 3 Click My Documents in the left pane of the Explorer window Explorer displays the contents of My Documents in the right pane of the window as shown in Figure 4 33 Move on to the next step and we ll look at the contents of the hard drive 4 Click the Local Disk C in the left pane of the Explorer window Explorer displays the contents of the hard drive in the right pane of the window The left pane of Windows Explorer displays the drives and folders in a hierarchical view A plus symbol or a minus symbol beside a folder means a folder contains several subfolders Normally these subfolders are hidden You can display the hidden folders within a folder by clicking the plus sign beside the folder 5 Click the plus symbol beside the Windows folder The Windows folder expands and displays all the folders within it The plus symb changes to a minus symbol indicating the folder is expanded and is displaying Rron folders within it Notice some of the Windows subfolders also have pluses by t
159. Other Places k My Network Pes My Comput FR r 4 etwork v EF Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q Back gt t Be Search Key Folders K Network Tasks 3 Desktop JONLAPTOP G2 Add a network place Gonlaptop e View network connections Other Places 8 Microsoft Windows Network Entire Network My Computer My Documents Figure 10 7 If your computer is connected to a network you can easily browse through the shared folders and files on the network The procedure for browsing the contents of the network is no different than browsing through the contents of your computer double click a folder or file to open it You can also create copy move rename and delete files and folders on the network just like you would on your computer s hard drive if your network administrator 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Ten Networking with Windows XP 279 has given you enough rights to the network To browse the network double click the My Network Places on the Windows desktop instead of My Computer 1 Click the Start button and select My Network Places from the Start menu The My Network Places window appears displaying all the computers on the network Obviously your network has its own computers and resources so your window will _ differ from the one shown in Figure 10 4 My Network Select Entire Network from the Other Places panel O Places Windows XP displays al
160. Pour Review cites deci ea ae aa a ei 120 Lesson 5 1 Using the Windows Classic St INU EE E E EAT 128 Lesson 5 2 Using the Windows Classic WAB op cccccccccscccccccccccceeeecececeeeeeeseeeseseeseeess 129 Lesson 5 3 Moving Resizing and Higi e Task Damea a a 130 Lesson 5 4 Customizing the Start Ment cccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeess 132 Lesson 5 5 Working with the Qui unch Toobi cien padanssasoanteioneuaenes 134 Lesson 5 6 Opening Recentl ACUMEN a edanieeseasciteeeeeuas es 136 Lesson 5 7 Using the Run Co d to Start 4 Propramane 138 Lesson 5 8 Adding Shortc UNE ID SSK 0 is senecsuscerorecccntosvet a e 140 Lesson 5 9 Starting a Pane Automatically when Windows Starts 00000000000000000000 142 Chapter rive REVE Waien es E a nas a eh Sees eed dan dex enn aeosteue tee 144 Chapter Six Cus Gs Windows 52 cos stooraisceins saan titoume A 149 Lesson 6 1 A Mis COMO RAMS eesi E A 150 Lesson 6 2 Ch yneg the Date and Time 0 0 0 cccsceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 152 Lesson 6 3 Adjusting your Computer s VOIUME ccc cccccccccccccecceceeeeceeeesceeeseeeeeeeeeseeess 154 Lesson 6 4 nging Windows Colors and Appearance cccccceeesesseeseessssssseessesees 156 Lesson Zap Adding Wallpaper to the Desktop ccccccccccccccseccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseseseeeseeees 158 1 Adjusting the Screen ReSolutionr cccccccccccccccccccceececceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee
161. SN eShop Skin Chooser More to listen to and watch zzplus Hubbard pays tribute to Miles BE i 56k 100k Movies Hollywood Preview Britney Spears film debut in the upcoming Crossroads Figure 7 15 The Windows Media Player Media movies and information on t site for streaming media ide is a handy tool for accessing the latest music ernet The Media Guide is host to WindowsMedia com a u have another reason to procrastinate work even longer u must have an Internet connection then hoyi Media Guide tab To access the media guj 1 Start the ws Media Player by clicking the Media Player icon and The Wj Tows Media Player displays the Media Guide which contains links to lots of infor sites entertainment sites and media files 2 EEn a link that interests you e you have it a wealth of Media is right at your fingertips any of the music and video files have different connection speeds listed with them 56k 100k etc You should choose a speed depending on the type of connection you have to the Internet If a media file won t play for you try a slower speed If you have a Modem connection you should select 28k or 56k e If you have an Integrated Services Digital Network Line ISDN you should select 100k e If you have a Cable Modem or a Digital Subscriber Line DSL you should select 300k or 500k 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Seven The Free Programs 193 Lesson 7 11 Us
162. Shopping Travel Yellow PoS Media Finance Quotes News Sg i gt essenger Mobile Personals People Singapore foils alleged terror plot Bush picks Scalia Reich for posts Find My n Jury finds hockey dad guilty Astronomers Cosmos is gret a pra lt Back Luckily the We ld Wide Web is remarkably easy to navigate It s so easy in fact that most users seem A an uncanny ability to browse through Web pages without any previous Back button training if they have difficulty with other computer programs This chapter explains how ogu way through the millions of Web pages that are on the Internet Even if you Om alrea k you have browsing down you should read this chapter you might learn a trick is or t didn t know Yahoo Nevis ABCNEWS com Videos Yahoo News ee w Make sure your Web browser is open so that you re connected to the My Yahoo for JonHigh QY Inte rn et eS A Hopefully you know how to do this by now Tip Instead of Goto the Yahoo home page by clicking the Address bar typing repeatedly clicking th www yahoo com and pressing lt Enter gt Back and Forward The Yahoo home page fills the screen Many of the underlined words and pictures you buttons you can click see on the Yahoo page are actually hyperlinks When you position the pointer over a their down arrows to hyperlink it changes to a Clicking a hyperlink will automatically display a list of
163. String of Text 1 Move the insertion point to the beginning or end of the text you want to select 2 Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the insertion point across the text then release the mouse button once the text is selected Ole Press and hold down the lt Shift gt key while using the arrow keys to select the text you want To Select a Single Word e Double click the word you want to select To Replace Text e Replace text by first selecting it then typing the new text you want To Deselect Text e Click anywhere on the computer screen To Delete Selected Text 1 Select the text 2 Press the lt Delete gt key Your Organization s Name Here 66 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 3 15 You can cancel a text deletion with the Undo feature k Undo button Other Ways to Undo e Select Edit gt Undo from the menu e Press lt Ctrl gt lt Z gt Quick Reference To Undo Your Previous Action Click the 2 Undo button on the toolbar Or e Select Edit Undo from the menu Lesson 3 8 Using Undo Letter WordPad File Edit View Insert Format Help Letter WordPad File Edit View Insert Format Help lah 62 To the La Fanci Nails Company Figure 3 15 You might accidentally delete a sentence in your processing program you didn t mean to delete or paste something in you didn t mean e Fortunately Windows and most Windows programs come
164. The Free Programs 181 Lesson 7 2 Notepad Untitled Notepad TER Figure 7 2 Fie Edit Format View Help TO DO S FOR TODAY se the Notepad program bring multi million dollar proposal to work n you need to jot grocery shopping n quick notes that get Snoodles from the wet drop off suit at drycleaners that Snoodles vomited on don t require any type of birthday card to Mom f tti pay rent cable and heat bills ormalting get cracked laptop screen repaired work out over lunch a attend stress management class Figure 7 2 WordPad is one of the most full featured free programs why otepad is probably the simplest You can use Notepad to create or edit simple OQ text files that do not require any type of formatting Notepad opens and saves text in ASUII text only format Notepad can only open or read files that are smaller than 64 ou need to create or edit a file that requires formatting or is larger than 64K use Wo Let s take a closer look at Notepad 1 Click the Start button and sel Programs Accessories gt Notepad The Notepad program appears asSgown in Figure 7 2 If you want try typing some text in Notepad and explore Nogepad s menus 2 Close the Notepad prog Quick Reference T able 7 2 Notepad To Open Notepad Description Apie text editor without any formatting features e Click the Start button and select All Programs gt Type of File s Used Nis Text Documents Accessories
165. Toolbars b Cascade Windows Tile Windows Horizontally Tile Windows Vertically Show the Desktop Task Manager the Taskbar amp Properties Taskbar shortcut menu Quick Reference To Lock Unlock the Taskbar e Right click the taskbar and select Lock the taskbar from the shortcut menu To Move the Taskbar e Position the pointer over a blank area on the taskbar and click and drag the taskbar to the top bottom left or right of the screen To Size the Taskbar e Position the pointer over the top edge of the taskbar until the pointer changes to a i then drag the edge until the taskbar is the size you want To Hide the Taskbar e Right click any blank area of the taskbar select Properties from the shortcut menu check the Auto hide option and click OK To Display a Hidden Taskbar e Position the pointer near the very bottom of the screen Your Organization s Name Here 132 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 5 9 The Taskbar tab of the Taskbar and Start Menu Properties dialog box You can learn more about these options in Table 5 1 Taskbar Options Figure 5 10 The Start Menu tab of the Taskbar and Start Menu Properties dialog box Figure 5 11 You can resize the taskbar so it can display more information Figure 5 12 You can resize the taskbar so it can display more information Lesson 5 4 Menu Taskbar and Start Menu Properties Taskbar Start Menu Tas
166. VF determined by your display s color depth settings Features Don t Include Photo retouching acquire from scanner saving to many other graphic formats such as GIF as JPEG pictures Found Under All Programs Accessories Paint 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Seven The Free Programs 185 Paint provides you with a number of tools to create your pictures with To see a tool s description position the mouse over the tool button for a few seconds After a moment the name of the tool will appear In addition a brief description of the tool appears in the Status bar whenever the pointer is over it The following table describes the Paint tools and their functions Table 7 6 The Paint Tools Tool Name Description O s l Free Form Select Draws a freeform outline with the mouse around any shape to select it Once you have selected an area you can cut copy or move it rN LNN mer Same as above except it uses a rectangle as the selection area 9 different eraser sizes A Penca Draw freeform objects just as if youaye Cora pencil A Paint freeform objects just as ipere using a real paintbrush You can choose from several dif gfeM brush sizes and shapes 4 x A ic x L Inserts text into tHtgicture Quick Reference To Start Paint select All Programs gt Polygon Draws polygons Rounded R gfmagle Draws rectangles with rounded edges amp Your Organization
167. Vie gnd open files and run programs executables to browse all available Users May Not reate modify or delete files or folders or change the user accounts and groups Select the user account s or group s List Folder Contents ay View fi and click OK OK when Y you re finished Utables or change the folder s permissions 5 Repeat Step 4 for each user or group you want to have access Click OK Nwsers May View and open files Users May Not Open create modify or delete files or folders run programs when you re finished executables or change the folder s permissions Y Users May Create and modify files and folders account whose Users May Not View open or delete files or folders run programs ie naa A ee executables or change the folder s permissions y a uncheck the permissions Special Permissions Varies depending on user specified options you want to grant or deny Repeat for all the groups and or user accounts 6 Select the group or user Your Organization s Name Here 296 Microsoft Windows XP Y Chapter Ten Review Lesson Summary N Introduction to Networks e n a peer to peer network everyone stores their files on their own cone oyor on the network can access files stored on any other computer e Ina client server network everyone stores their files on a cont uter called a server Everyone on the network can access the files stored on the se e card cables
168. Width to 6 inches KY and the Height to 6 inches make sure the Colors option is selected and then click OK Compare your Attributes dialog box with the one shown in Figure 7 8 Paint resizes the C picture to your specifications However to make the actual Paint window bigger not just the picture you must resize it by dragging its lower right corner 4 Click the Ellipse tool Fill Options The Ellipse tool depresses and the pointer changes to a indicating that you can draw the selected shape 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Seven The Free Programs 187 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Also notice that three fill options appear below the Paint tools There are three options for any shapes you draw They are e Outline Top option Draws the outline of the shape e Outline and Fill Middle option Draws the outline of the shape and fills the inside with the color currently selected from the color palette e Fill Bottom option Draws a colored shape without an outline Position the pointer in the blank area in the picture then click and hold the mouse button and drag it down and to the right until you have a 1 diameter circle Here s how to add color to the circle you just created Click the Fill tool Now you need to select the color you want to use from the color pallete Click the Blue color from the color palette at the bottom of the sc Now all you have to do is click insi
169. You can double click the My Network Places icon to browse through the co aN in your workgroup and the computers on the network If you re omega Internet the My Network Places icon will on your desktop since the InterrT actually a network too Recycle Bin The Recycle Bin stores all the files you delete from your compug amp y Xo can use the Recycle Bin to retrieve files you ve accidentally deleted and jo c more disk space by emptying the Recycle Bin Taskbar The Taskbar usually appears at the bottom of your gee contains the famous t Start button which you use to start your programs W document or window an icon for that program app you see which programs are currently running ND between them 7 Start Button The Start button lets you quickly open y rams and documents You can also use the Start button to find files and change We settings for Windows Quick Launch The Quick Launch Toolbar gives y access to your most frequently used Toolbar applications Internet Explorer Outloo express the Windows desktop and several Web sites called channels are dy included on the Quick Launch Toolbar by default r you Open a program he taskbar This lets s you to easily switch Don t worry if you find some of these this confusing at first they will make more sense after you ve actually had a chance to e in the upcoming lessons Your Organization s Name Here 18 Figure 1 5 The new Windows XP Start menu Y
170. You can leave off the http when you type a Web page address For example type www nbc com instead of http www nbc com Quick Reference To Display a Specific Web Page e Type the Web address in Hien 4 Address bar and press lt Enter gt Or e Press Ctrl lt L gt type the Web address and press OK Your Organization s Name Here 250 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 9 4 Browse the Web Brings you back to Brings you to Shows your favorite Figure 9 8 the previously Stops loading your home Web pages that Opens your The Internet Explorer viewed Web page a Web page page you bookmarked e mail progra toolbar Figure 9 9 The Yahoo home page Bri Brings you forward Reloads or Search the Brings Find Wa Prints the S to the next viewed refreshes the Web for you to paoe current Web Web page current Web specified your page i page information media aa folders visited Yahoo Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q Back 7 gt x E A P Search Jg Favorites Media 4 Click the to display a list of Web sites that you have typed in Address amp http www yahoo com A Ff e LA G HOO q Finance Messenger Check Email mia Personalize te www _jonhigh com Save Today Build Your Own Web Site Yahoo Coupon _ ced search Autos 2002 Car Guide Get a Quote Blue Book Pricing Classifieds Shop Auctions Autos Classifieds
171. Zones Double click th on the taskbar click the Time Zone tab select the time zone from the list box and click Adding Wallpaper to t top e To Add or Change Weal be t click a blank area on the desktop and select Properties from the shortcut menu Mak Desktop tab is selected and select the wallpaper you want to use from the preset list Clic amp Browse and specify the name and location of your own picture or graphic you want eer Select how you want the wallpaper to be displayed centered tiled retphed from the Display list and click OK Changing Windews Appearance e ToCha ndows Color Scheme Right click a blank area on the desktop and select Propegmas rom the shortcut menu click the Appearance tab select a color scheme from the C eme list and click OK ence Windows and Buttons to Classic Style Select Windows Classic style from the e Ka and Buttons combo box justing the Screen Resolution resolutions can display more information on the screen at once but at the price of making A e Screen Resolution has to do with how much information can fit on the screen Higher screen everything appear smaller e To Change the Screen Resolution Right click a blank area on the desktop and select Properties from the shortcut menu and click the Settings tab Slide the Screen Resolution slider to the right or left to select the resolution you want to use and click OK 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Six C
172. a Help 3 ay An Internet e mail address Compose anew composed and d Q O le a P Keros Qe O B S A E mail message any new messages Address amp http Ac1 law13 hotmail passport com cgi bin login x E o Links gt consists of two parts a r LE ES user name and a domain msn Hotma il Sign Up for an E Mail Account Why Sign Up t d b th z 0 and get a Microsoft NET Passport n a me 7 Se pa ra e y z teh a A EAC Already have a Hotmail account Create Mail Send Recv OO Save ri find it easier to create and manage your folders see which of Sign In Name sym bol your Messenger buddies is online and quickly choose names el 7 hotmail com from your Address Book when composing e mail e Figure 9 21 Password Forgot Your Passw l Problems Signing In r aning Frequently Asked Questions F i n d S peop e f Virus Protected E mails Secure Sign In Security Options what s this m e S sS a g e S O r How To Link To Hotmail Public shared computer Increased security 7 Contact Us O Keep me signed in to this and all other NET t e xt Languages Passport sites unless I sign out Figure 9 22 QeneDoe zipcorp com Domain Name This is e of the person s This is the location of the person s Ra t It is similar to the account on the Internet It is similar to me on an envelope the address on an envelope QF you really need a definition of e mail You al
173. a formatted in IBM format ae Unless you have an extra flo ndy you don t have to walk through this lesson s step by Rename step exercise but when yo to format a floppy here s how to do it Properties Ay Shortcut menu 1 Insert the flo sk you want to format into the floppy drive NOTE F ing a floppy disk completely erases any information stored on it so ma sure the disk you want to format doesn t contain any information you tagy need Quick Reference 2 ane Start menu double click the My Computer icon to open it Computer window appears To Format a Floppy Disk 3 t click the drive containing the floppy disk you want to format 1 Insert the floppy you want OpPually A and select Format from the shortcut menu roe into the floppy he Format dialog box appears There are several options you can specify when l formatting a floppy disk see Figure 8 1 to see what they are 2 Open My Computer right OF Click Start click the floppy drive and select Format from t The floppy drive whirs as it formats the floppy disk Formatting a floppy disk usually shortcut menu takes about a minute When the format is complete the Format Results dialog box 3 Select the formatting appears with information about the formatted disk options and click Start NOTE If the Format Results dialog box says your floppy disk has bytes in bad sectors throw it away A floppy disk with bad sectors is not reliable and should not be ent
174. ab of the Customize Start Menu dialog box appears as shown in Figure 5 11 Several options appear here e The icon size for the programs that appear in the Start menu c e How many frequently used programs appear in the Start menu K e The Internet and E mail applications appear at the top of the Start menu S Let s take a look at the Advanced tab gt 4 Click the Advanced tab y The Advanced tab of the Customize Start Menu dialog box appears as sho igure 5 12 There are lots of advanced options that you use to further tar aia Start menu and desktop Almost all of these options are insignificant so w Cy go through any of them in this lesson A 5 Click OK to close the Customize dialog box The Customize dialog box closes and you re back to the Taskb Start menu properties dialog box 6 Click OK to close the Taskbar and Start menu As dialog box The Taskbar and Start menu properties dialog box closes To access the most common Start menu and taskbar option ply right click the taskbar and select Properties from the shortcut menu Then select fi e or more of the options listed in the following table Table 5 1 Taskbar Options Description 7 Quick Reference Lock the taskbar Locks the taskbar rent position on the desktop so that it cannot be Also locks the size and position of any toolbar To Customize the Windows Taskbar and Start Menu War from view To redisplay the taskbar position the mouse e Right c
175. ads or something similar when you can save your nloaded files fad programs off the Internet a large percent of the ernet are stored in ZIP files ZIP files package e them must easier to download One more note about downloading programs you can download off programs and files together a ZIP files do two things WO e Compress Infor Instead of downloading a 2 MB file you can download a 1 MB file in ha mre t e Store multip NX together in a single ZIP file Instead of downloading 20 or so files that a p requires to run you only have to download a single ZIP file Once you h wnloaded a ZIP file Microsoft Windows XP should unzip it for you If it doesn t there Mnother program that will unzip files called WinZIP You can find and download the WinZIP program at www winzip com Open Link Open Link in New Window Save Target As Print Target Save Picture As E mail Picture Print Picture Go to My Pictures Set as Background Set as Desktop Item Copy Copy Shortcut Add to Favorites Properties Internet Explorer shortcut menu New Program A ZIP file Quick Reference To Save an Image ona Web Page to Disk 1 Right click the image you want to save and select Save Picture As from the shortcut menu 2 Navigate to the drive and folder where you want to save the image give the image a different name if you want and click OK To Download a File 1 Right click the file yo
176. agraph is justified This paragraph is justified This paragraph is justified This paragraph is justified This paragraph is justified Left Align Centered Justified Figure 3 24 This lesson moves on to paragraph formatting and PAo to justify paragraphs or align m processing programs them to the left right or center of a page These are re n formatting tasks for all word 1 2 Place the insertion point miele Sale last line Jane Plain and then click the Align Right button n ormatting toolbar The last line is aligned to the rig a ragged left edge ct the two body paragraphs as shown in Coe button on the Formatting toolbar tered on the page Drag the mouse pointer es Figure 3 22 then click The selected paragraphs a Press the lt End gt lt Enter gt Notice the new pa h will be centered like the one above it That s because when you press Hy new paragraph inherits the formatting from the paragraph ove to the end of the current line then press above it Select th QY paragraphs again and click the Align Left button on the Form ta SSolbar The paragraphs are again aligned to the left Click the Save button on the Standard toolbar to save your work OF 3 22 ce the insertion point 1 in the paragraph you want to align or select the paragraph s Figure 3 23 Clicking the Center button on the Formatting toolbar centers the selected paragraphs Figure
177. ailable in your ar cable or DSL connections If it is it s probably worth the extra Q dollars a month to get a connection to Quick Reference the Internet that is at le es faster than a standard phone connection Plus you don t have to about people getting busy signals when you re To Connect to the Internet using the Internet 1 Double click the After a connection to the In as been established Internet Explorer appears on e Internet Explorer screen and displays your age icon on the desktop g A home page is the page yo rowser displays when it connects to the Internet The Or default start page for Micr ternet Explorer is Microsoft s start page what else did you Click the e Internet think it would be but easily change your default start page more about that in Explorer icon on the another lesson Quick Launch toolbar gt 2 If necessary enter your user name and password and click Connect Your Organization s Name Here 248 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 9 6 The Microsoft Web site Figure 9 7 When a Web page is Lesson 9 3 Displaying a Specific Web Page 4 Welcome to the Microsoft Corporate Web Site Microsoft Internet Explorer E Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q x amp x E A 2 Search Sie Favorites A Media EA B ee wy Address http www_microsoft com ms htm Microsoft Home Training Events Subscribe About Microsoft Downloads Worldwi
178. aking a lot of system changes to your computer there may be more than one r 4 Select the restore point you want to use and click Next A dialog box appears asking you to close all open files and programs before stot Close any open programs and then click OK your computer QY 5 K The System Restore window display information about the restore point you sated If you change your mind you can click the Back button at any time to reid to the previous screen and change your selections 6 Click Next to restore your computer to the restore oa yatetlected System Restore returns your computer to the selected restore poi figuration When its it s finished your comptuer will automatically cO After your computer restarts you will be greeted by the Sys store window and a message indicating that your computer has been restored t vious state 7 Click OK to close the System Restore window hen you restored your t the Undo my last restoration You can also use System Restore to reverse the changes ma computer To undo any restoration simply repeat Step in Step 2 and follow the on screen instructions Please note that System Restore does not replace KO of uninstalling a program To completely remove the files installed by a program u must remove the program using Add Remove Programs in Control Panel or en own uninstall program Quick Reference To Restore your Computer 1 Click the Star
179. alog box Figure 9 5 The Internet Start Web page Figure 9 3 s http www msn com From digital cameras to diamonds find what yore looking for at MSN eShop msn 7 MSN Home C myms Saturday Jan 12 MSN Home My MSN Hotmail Search Shopping Mc y ple amp Chat Weekend movies Is Orange County Saye 5 n al worth your 8 win el co Why are there 7 days in a week wild card playoffs MSN Channels This weeks biggest lie Office XP for students amp Get news on your cell teachers up to 70 off Business New Spring must haves Order of the day Careers at Spiegel com i mi Reform a messy child City Guides Decorating dos amp don ts Entertainment erts prescribe RX Tactiest takeout in US Games Air Tickets ford 4 after 40 Health Auctions houtif your workouts working calorie calculator House amp Home Buy Books V xclusive See NSync s Girlfriend video i Kids one company except instead of letting you make telephone calls to other people an Ca Sineme Service Provider ISP An Internet Service Provider is a lot like a Internet Explorer gt Internet Service Provider lets your computer connect to the Internet Just like your Other Ways to Open telephone company Internet Service Providers charge for their services currently the Internet Explorer average rate seems to be about 20 a month for unlimited usage You ve probably already e Click the e icon on heard o
180. ams from the Start menu leaves the original program intact A Actually when you modify the Start menu you re using Windows Explorer If you picked C My Computer you were on the right track because you can create S rename delete and move folders in My Computer too e A B and C You can start a program or open a file using any of these methods B A shortcut only points to a file or folder elsewhere on the computer d the shortcut moving it or renaming it in no way affects the original file Your Organization s Name Here Chapter Six Ci Chapter Objectives Changing the date and time Adding wallpaper and changing the screen colors Changing the screen resolution and color depth Using a screen saver and desktop theme Changing system sounds Adjusting the mouse Q V Customizing how Windows looks and In the old days computers had two settings on O have come a long way since then Today Windows lets you give your or n by changing how it looks sounds and operates Click a few buttons e esktop becomes a lush jungle with birds singing and wild animals growling Cli more buttons and you re working on a baseball diamond hearing the cracking at when you open a window ognize Windows settings to suit your own personal agjust the date and time on your computer the mouse that blasted double click speed and the sounds your ow to give your computer character by adding your sktop themes an
181. an item select the item and click Rename or Links Favorites Folder C Links E Jon on Server G MSN com Radio Station Guide WebTrendsLive zj Yahoo Prosoft Training Anno Prosoft Training Modified on CNN com 1 1 2002 1 24 PM Figure 9 15 ly found a Web page about hippopotamus food and you want to return back to t should you do Well you don t have to write down the Web address on a Post It ick on your monitor you can add the Web page to Internet Explorer s Favorites o you can always quickly return back to any Web page in the list In this lesson learn how to add your favorite Web sites to Internet Explorer You ll also learn how to nge your home page also called a start page the Web page that appears each time you V Internet Explorer Make sure your Web browser is open so that you re connected to the Internet 2 Favorites list Go to a Web page that you visit frequently and want to add to your It doesn t matter how you get to the Web site type the page s Web address in the Address bar if you know it or navigate there by clicking a hyperlink from another Web site When the desired Web page appears on your screen you can add it to your Favorites so you can always easily return to it later 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Nine Exploring the Internet 255 10 11 Select Favorites Add to Favorites from the menu The Add Favorites dialog box app
182. and X Software you re in luck you can click that option and remove the proram Second you can purchase and install an Uninstall program to remove the o program Uninstall programs are great for removing older Windows programs and th re usually safe to use too The only disadvantage is that you have to buy them How ma older Windows programs do you need to remove from your computer If it is only one O then the prospect of paying 30 to 50 for an Uninstall program isn t very appealing Third you can try erasing the program the old fashioned way ing My Computer or Windows Explorer and finding and deleting the folder where t ram is located Be very careful and make sure you know what you re doing when youremove or erase the program yourself you don t want to inadvertently delete somethin shouldn t be deleted Quick Reference To Remove a Program 1 Click the Start button click Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs 2 Find and select the program you want to remove from your computer and click the Remove button 4 Click Yes to confirm the program s removal and finish removing the selected program by following the on screen instructions Your Organization s Name Here 222 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 8 9 Adding and Removing Windows Components Windows Components Wizard Accessories and Utilities Figure 8 19 Windows Components aN To add iin
183. any window O Moving indow e a Window Click and drag the window by its title bar Release the mouse button to drop window in the desired location on the screen zing a Window a double arrow like Click and hold down the mouse button and drag the border or corner to a 4 e To Change a Window s Size Point at the window s borders or corners until the pointer changes to new location until the window is the size you want Switching between Windows e You can only work on one window at a time The window you re working on is the active window and appears in front of all the inactive windows 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Two Working with a Window 49 e To Switch between Open Programs There are three ways to switch between open programs 1 Click on the program s icon on the taskbar 2 Click on any visible part of the window that you want to appear in front 3 Press and hold down the lt Alt gt key and press the lt Tab gt key to display the task list Press the lt Tab gt key until the program you want is selected then release the lt Alt gt key Tiling and Cascading Windows clock and select either Tile Windows Horizontally or Tile Windows Vertically from the shortcut e To Tile Windows on the Desktop Right click any blank area of the taskbar usually near the menu e To Cascade Windows on the Desktop Right click any blank area of the taskbar usually near eS clock and select Cascade Win
184. anywhere on the Web page and select Add to Favorites from the shortcut menu Q Lesson 9 6 Adding a Web Page to Favorites and Changing your Home Page Add Favorite Intemet Explorer will add this page to your Favorites list Create in gt gt _ Make available offline Name CNN com Figure 9 12 The name of the Web page appears here Click the Web page you want to visit If the Web is in a folder click the folder J Internet Options EEA General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Home page LA You can change which page to use for your home page Address Temporary Intemet files FA Pages you view on the Intemet are stored in a special folde for quick viewing later Delete Cookies Delete Files History A l The History folder contains links to pages you ve vi for quick access to recently viewed page http my yahoo com You haye Gy it lat not CNN com Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help s QJ ss http www cnn com Favorites Add B Organize Jon on Server G MSN com Radio Station Guide Sy WebTrendsLive a Yahoo ProsoftTraining AnnS ProsoftTraining On CNN com Editions Europe Asia MAIN PAGE WORLD S x ATHER BUSINESS ENTERTAINMENT To create a new folder click on the Create Folder button To rename or delete
185. are possible Printer name HP DeskJet 882 Manufacturer Printers Doyeuwant to use this printer as the default printer Alps B AGFA AccuSetSF v52 pire EY AGFAAccuSet 896 Ev AGFAAccuSet 80 3 nanma m y Windows Update Select the printer S Yes Files will always print to manufacturer this printer four printer isn t in the list insert e installation disks that came with No Files will printer to the printer only when you select it Figure 8 2 Oo the printer and click Have Disk o 1 on your computer This lesson will show you how to do just that Parallel Port Place the printer near your computer plug the printer cable into your QY computer s parallel port Turn both your computer and the printer on 4 x You can find the parallel port in the back of your computer It s probably the biggest port back there and has 25 little holes Generally the computer detects the new printer and will automatically begin installing the printer If for some reason this doesn t happen however read on 2002 CustomGuide Inc 10 11 12 Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer 225 Open the Printers folder by clicking the Start button and selecting r 2 Control Panel Printers and Other Hardware JA The Printers and Other Hardware window appears as shown in Figure 8 21 Printers folder Click the Add a printer task Other Ways to A
186. ase you specified You may have to scroll down to view the A entire list e N Search Box Click the Web page you want to view Are you finding mostly irrelevant information in your search results a have to refine your search For example a search on the word Windows D in links to Anderson Windows Stained Glass Windows and Micro Windows while a search on the phrase Microsoft Windows will res nks to Microsoft Windows Some search engines will let you search iif ress For example you could do a search for Microsoft Windows and eo r refine your search by searching the results for the word Networking Click the Search button to close the search panel You don t have to click Microsoft Internet Explorer s sea Ca to look for information on the Web you can also go directly to a seats ine s Web site and Quick Reference specify what you want to look for there Table 9 2 Popuf Search Engines on the Web is by no means a definitive inventory of re search engines that are To Search the Web for currently available on the Web but it lists the begt ost popular Web search Information Using Internet engines and their Web addresses Explorer 1 Click the Search button on the toolbar 2 Type the word or phrase you want to search for in the Search the Web for box and click Search gal AltaVista claims to catalog and index more any other search engine www exc
187. assword to make sure everything Okay Need to delete a user account All you have to do provided you can log on as a network administrator is repeat Steps 1 4 click the user you want to remove and click the Remove button s you want to grant the new user and click Finsh User Accounts Quick Reference To Create a New User Account 1 Click the Start button and select Control Panel 2 Click the User Accounts icon 3 If necessary enter the Administrator account and Password and click OK 4 Click Add 5 Enter the User Name Full Name box and an optional Description 6 Click Next 7 Select the type of access you want to grant the new user and click Finish 8 Click OK To Delete a User Account 1 Repeat Steps 1 3 in the preceding instructions 2 Click the user you want to remove and click the Remove button Your Organization s Name Here 286 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 10 6 Logging Off Windows Figure 10 18 Log Off Windows E Are you sure you want to log off To log off Windows click amp Internet My Documents the Start button and select Ten Fe E Log Ofi Dinon eea y Wor i Figure 10 1 9 Microsoft Word 97 My Music Figure 10 19 i Microsoft Excel J My Computer Windows XP asks if you GJ hy network Places Welcome to Windows are sure you want to log an 0 ff E i ie Control Panel S Connect To Copyright amp 1985 2001 Figure 1 O a 2 O ay Microsoft Ac
188. ate a restore point option and click Next ww e for your restore point and click Next e Device Manager e Device Manager lets you view information about your computer s hardware remove device drivers and change which resources a device uses To Restore your oes the Start button and select All Programs Accessories gt To Open the Device Manager Click the Start button select Control Panel Performance and Maintenance and click the System icon Click the Hardware tab in the System Properties dialog box and click the Device Manager button To View Change a Device s Properties Right click the device and select Properties To Remove a Device Driver Select the device and click the Uninstall button 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer 239 Quiz P Which statement is NOT true about formatting a floppy disk A You must often format new floppy disks in order to save information on them B You can copy the system files to a floppy disk enabling you to start your computer using the floppy disk C Formatting a floppy disk erases all its information D Ifyou format a floppy disk and Windows XP reports it found bad sectors on the disk don t worry about it Most floppy disks have bad sectors S You can copy a floppy disk by inserting the disk right clicking the flop S drive icon and selecting Copy Disk from the shortcut menu True or gt
189. ater to download more files WwW Click Review and install updates and click Install Now lt The Windows Update service downloads the files you selected Sinc on the Internet this can take some time depending on how many files you LA ed and how fast your connection to the Internet is Windows XP automatically installs the updated files after it ha loaded them You may have to restart your computer depending on what types nges have been made to your computer G Quick Reference X To Use the Windows Qy Update Service 1 Establish a connection to Q the Internet Oo 2 Click the Start button and WwW select All Programs gt WwW Windows Update 3 Click Scan for updates O to view the available updates for your computer 4 Click Add to select the updates you want to O install on your computer 5 Click Review and install updates to view the Ss updates you want to download QY 6 Click Install Now to download the updates KY onto your computer Your Organization s Name Here 232 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 8 15 Restoring Your Computer System Restore Figure 8 33 Select a Restore Point The new System Restore program can return your The following calendar displays in bold all of the dates that have restore points available The list displays the CO m p uter CO nfi g u ratio n to restore points that are available for the selected date Possible types of restor
190. ation area of either way the taskbar 1 Install the hardware device Make sure the computer is turned off when you install the device 2002 CustomGuide Inc A lot of hardware devices come with their own insta appropriate device drivers and software without ia follow the instructions that came with your hardwar If you ve followed the above steps and Win device doesn t work after you ve installe You see some hardware devices requir technical as they sound IRQs DMAghanfiels and I O ports All you need to know about them is that there is only a limited computers have fewer than two ay components can t share the sgm that uses IRQ 3 and your n Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer 229 Turn on your computer If Windows XP automatically detects the device the Found New Hardware icon will appear in the notification area followed by the Found New Hardware Wizard window as shown in Figure 8 28 Follow the on screen instructions Make sure you have the disk or CD ROM that came with your new hardware device and Windows XP CD ROM handy Windows will probably ask you for them If Windows XP doesn t automatically detect your new hardware move on to Step 3 Control Panel Performance and Maintenance The Performance and Maintenance category of the Control Panel appears Open the Control Panel by clicking the Start button and selecting Click System and click the Hardware tab in the System P
191. ative privileges Find and select the drive or folder you want to share and click ke Share this folder from the File and Folder Tasks panel For example if you wanted to share all the information in your Documents folder you would right click the Documents folder in My Computer and click Share this folder from the File and Folder task panel Click the Share this folder option and if you want enter a name for the shared folder in the Share Name box AS Unless you specify otherwise Windows uses the drive letter or folder name as he default share name lt Click OK ccessible A hand appears under the drive or folder indicating it is being shared and ore on to other users on the network provided they have the proper permisgjo w S repeat Step that in a later lesson To stop sharing a folder or drive all you need 1 and 2 and select the Not Shared option in Step 2 Sharing a computer s printer so that other computers on the net much different than sharing a drive or folder Here s how to d Click the Start button and select Printers and F The Printers and Faxes window appears Select the printer you want to share and clic Share this printer from the Printer Tasks panel The share tab of the Printer Properties dialog a as shown in Figure 10 25 Click the Shared as option and if y Ynt enter a name for the shared printer in the Share Name box xx an use it is not Unless you specify otherwise Windowsis
192. automatic start programs are hanging out Let the Startup folder rest for a moment and concentrate on choosing some programs Click the Start button and select All Programs Accessories Move on to the next step to add the Notepad program to the Startup group AS Double click the Startup folder 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Five Customizing the Taskbar and Desktop 143 Position your mouse pointer over Notepad Hold down the right mouse button and drag Notepad from All Programs to the Startup window Dragging items with the right mouse button causes a shortcut menu to appear with copy move and create shortcut options Select Create Shortcut s Here from the shortcut menu You ve successfully created a shortcut to the Notepad program in your Startup folder Now Notepad will start every time you turn on your computer and start Windows You don t need to restart your computer to see if Notepad will automatically open If you no longer want a program to start automatically simply delete or move the program s shortcut from the Startup folder e Delete the Notepad shortcut from the Startup folder by double clicking the Notepad and selecting the Delete from the Notepad menu e amp Close the Startup window Close the window to end this lesson amp every time you start Windows Having too many programs op e same time takes up memory and can really slow down how long 1 indows to start NOTE
193. aven t already sooner or later you re going to discover that computers don t always work the way they re supposed to Nothing is more frustrati an when a program for no apparent reason decides to take a quick nap locks up ps responding to your commands There s usually no way to restore a frozen appWation but you can usually shut down the misbehaving program without having to G your computer 1 Start the WordPad program AU The WordPad program appears on the en There is not a Crash Program Quick Reference command anywhere in WordPad s have to use your imagination Imagine that you ve just finished writing a let ordPad Like a good Windows user you save To Shut Down a Frozen your file and then click the Prigt button to send the document to the printer Nothing Program Not only does the document l t print WordPad decides to go on strike and stops e Press lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt responding to your comm lt Delete gt Select the When a program ice nothing you can do except dump the misbehaving program and click the program from your c er s memory hopefully you ve been periodically saving End Task button whatever you ve b Peking on so you won t lose too much of your work The next step will show et to forcefully close a program 2 Press lt CtriQ It gt lt Delete gt The Windo k Manager window appears as shown in Figure 8 27 All the are running are listed Any programs that are frozen or locked up
194. b address for the search engine in the hte viec Address bar and press lt Enter gt Type the word or phrase you want to search for in the Web page s Search box and press lt Enter gt c e ToGo To a Favorite Web Page Click the Favorites button on the toolbar WO the Adding a Web Page to Favorites and Changing your Start Page e To Add a Web Page to Your List of Favorites Go to the Web page select Favorites gt A Favorites from the menu and click OK or right click anywhere on the Web page and select Favorites from the shortcut menu lt Web page from the left side of Internet Explorer then click the Favorites button wheh ou re finished You can also go to a favorite Web page by selecting Favorites from er and selecting the Web page e To Change Your Start or Home Page Go to the Web page select View eret Options from the menu and click the Use Current button Qy e To Organize Your Favorites Select Favorites gt Organize Favor om the menu gt Displaying a History of Visited Web Pages g e To Display a History of Visited Web Pages Click the on ory button on the toolbar and click the day or week you viewed the Web page Click the WED site you want to revisit and then the specific Web page Click the History button on the gry when you ve finished Download Software Ww e To Save an Image on a Web Page to Ditk t click the image you want to save and select Save Picture As from the shortcut m
195. be displayed using standard and scientific modes True or False amp 5 Which is NOT a game that comes along with Windows XP AY Solitaire A B Minesweeper C Starcraft W D FreeCell gt 6 Which of the following statements is NOT true w A Windows will automatically play an audio disc when you inseri your computer s CD ROM drive B The Character Map program lets you insert special symbo ound on the keyboard The Paint program saves and opens JPG files A You can change the size of a paint picture video source for Windows Movie Maker aK Ype A magic 8 ball A camcorder en E lt Ae a Q Homework e 1 Use Paint to create the ouA picture Don t worry if yours doesn t turn out exactly the same gawr FO 3 Open the Seniors text file in NotePad ee Your Organization s Name Here 206 Microsoft Windows XP Start the WordPad program Copy all the text in the NotePad and paste it into WordPad Insert a symbol anywhere in the WordPad document Hint You ll need to use the Character Map program 7 Open and close Windows Media Player 8 Open and close Windows Movie Maker Quiz Answers T 1 A and C WordPad can format fonts and paragraphs but if RE t come with a spell checker or a thesaurus 2 False NotePad can only open text files that are saka Yov ll have to use WordPad to open text files that are larger than 64 A B and D You need a so
196. by RG or removing their permissions This lesson explains how aN Make sure that you are logged on to Windows XP with a user account that amp has administrative privileges Your company many not allow you to log onto Windows XP as an administrator in which case you will have to contact your company s real network administrator and ask them to change your permission settings for you 2 Find and select the drive or folder you want to share and click E7 Share this folder from the File and Folder Tasks panel The Properties dialog box appears as shown in Figure 10 27 NOTE You must first share a folder or printer before you can change its permissions See the lesson on Sharing Your Files and Printer on the Network to do this 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Ten Networking with Windows XP 293 3 Click Permissions The Permissions dialog box appears as shown in Figure 10 30 Here you can specify who you want to be able to access the folder and what type of access they have for shared folders First you need to select the user account or group to which you want to assign or deny permissions If the user account or group isn t listed you will have to enter 1it which can be a little tricky the first few times you try it Here s how to select a user account or group 4 Ifthe user account or group you want to assign permissions to isn t listed click Add Otherwise skip ahead to Step 6 where you can enter
197. by backslashes and last comes the name of the file For example C Program Files Accessories WordPad EXE see Figure 4 21 for an illustration 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 105 Table 4 4 Common Files Types MS DOS programs are written for an earlier more primitive operating system MS DOS Program than Windows MS DOS programs don t have the fancy graphics icons and features of more advanced Windows programs All Windows or DOS programs have EXE or sometimes COM extensions EXE stands for executable meaning the file is a program that will run or execute when you open it Windows doesn t know what type of file this is so you can t readily openitby Unknown File Type double clicking it That doesn t mean the file isn t important it s probably a ve A important file for Windows or a program Leave these files alone unless yof absolutely know what they are for b we This is a document created in the word processing program Microsa Word Document Word documents normally have a DOC extension x This is a spreadsheet created with the program Microsoft E b Cel Excel Workbook spreadsheets normally have a XLS extension This is a graphic file or picture which was created in or another graphics a program These files are also sometimes referred tmaps The extension Paint File BMP for this particular type of graphic file is BMP or blag There are also
198. c Chapter Two Working with a Window 45 Start the calculator by clicking the Start button and selecting All Programs Accessories Calculator The calculator program appears in front of the WordPad program An icon for the Calculator program also appears in the taskbar next to the WordPad icon Notice the Calculator program appears in front and its icon is depressed on the taskbar which indicates it is the active window You can make WordPad the active window by clicking its icon on the taskbar Click the WordPad button on the taskbar The WordPad program appears in front and its icon on the taskbar is depressesed which indicates it is the active window You can make another open window the active amp window by clicking on any visible part of the window Click any portion of the Calculator window amp If you can t see the Calculator window at all it s because the Calculator window completely covered by the WordPad window In this case you will have to clichft Calculator icon on the taskbar W Yet another method of switching between windows is the most famous ie ok combination in Windows lt Alt gt lt Tab gt Press and hold down the lt Alt gt key press and release n key but don t release the lt Alt gt key The task window appears as shown in Figure 2 15 The task wi lists all the windows and programs that are currently running Move on to ext step to see how you can retrieve a program or
199. cation I ee cee a Figure 4 15 File and Folder Tasks fm Rename this file JEN Trade Show n aaa The Browse For Folder EB Move this file dialog box Laan D Web 2 E mail this file Documents and Settings ga Print this file fm My Music XX Delete this file 5 oO ae T any subfolders cick a plus sign above Other Places Current Budget Figure 4 15 Microsoft Excel Worksheet Date Modified Friday April 13 2001 12 07PM Size 15 5 KB Figure 4 14 Details The procedure for moving and oS iles is no different than moving or copying folders 8 This lesson about moving and cop files should be just a refresher for you Start button 1 Click the Start b and select My Computer The My Comput yindow appears 2 Navigate a d ppen your Practice folder or floppy disk BE Again yo e the following toolbar buttons to find your way around your ON My Computer o PEP OO Prectce Address List Click to list the drives on your puter and the current folder then select the drive and or folder whose ontents you want to display N i Up One Level button Click to move up one folder Other Ways to move or necessary follow your instructor s directions to select the appropriate drive and copy a file D folder where your practice files are located a Click the file to select it QA When copying or moving files or folders you may find it easier if you have two click Edit and select A
200. ccess to all the programs installed on your comp gt All Programs although you may have to wade through several submenus order to find the program you re looking for e Windows Provides a convenient location to save your files In ie My Documents versions of Windows My Documents was located o Desktop Recent Documents Open files you have recently worked on D Access the drives folders iles on your computer In previous versions of Windows ter was located on the Windows Desktop Access the drives f and printers on the network In previous versions dows My Network Places was located on the Windows amp sktop 5 Control Panel Open nagha s Control Panel a Connect To Conggct to the Internet or a network ms o K pa Printers and Faxes v installed printers or add a new one Help and ati AA help on how to use Windows pP Search Find a file on your computer is Log off of Windows so that another user can log on to your computer Shut Down Provides options for turning off or restarting your computer Right Side Your Organization s Name Here 20 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 1 5 Using the Mouse Pointing Clicking and Double clicking Figure 1 6 a Click Clicking and double clicking with the mouse Click Press and release the left Click Click Double click Quickly press and release the left mouse button twice in rapid succession
201. ces 180 sme UNd0 canta es 66 World Wide Web cc cccccccceeceeeeeees 244 browsing on E ee 250 y downloadaWtles PEIA E ET EAEE 258 aO a E E E E 254 XCOPY command DOS 06 119 his ceed iewed Web pages 256 Y ho aetna nat ater AAE ceeds 247 ie ChangQing cccceees 255 AT O E E EE E A 253 J MALE Susno 258 7 are BRR ee Dee ee ne eee eee 252 2000 CustomGuide com
202. cess EN iaraa Mioneolt Corporation The Welcome to Windows dialog hox JP search Requiring this key amp Dreamweaver 4 PE E SN Fress YA re to begin l n at startup helps keep your computer secre For e information click Help All Programs gt I Run P Log Off 0 Shut Down Select Log Off to log Figure 10 18 off Windows XP So why would you want to log off your computer instead of simply turning it off There are several reasons e To secure your computer unauthorized access If your computer contains lots of sensitive informatign you may want to log off Windows when you step out of the office to prevent unaut CS users from using your computer e You share the s A with another user If you share your computer with one or more you can create and log on to different user accounts so that each person can use n personalized files and settings Quick Reference e To gain ad rative rights to a shared folder or printer Some critical or confidential are amp of your computer or network may be restricted so that only authorized To Log Off Windows users ca cass them User accounts with administrative rights pretty much have access 1 Save all your work and to oven on your computer You must be logged on as an administrator or a user with exit all your programs admi ive rights to add or change user accounts and to share folders on your 2 Click the Windows Start c S and select Log In Koi on you will l
203. ch installs the main program onto your computer If Add New Programs has found this o your CD or floppy disk go ahead and skip ahead to Step 8 If Windows can t find the A installation program move on to Step 5 e Click Cancel to close the Install window and close the Control Panel If you re installing a finicky program a program that you ve downloaded frog T ll Internet or a program located on a network you re probably going to have t the program yourself A nte If you re e folder where Open My Computer You have to open the disk drive or folder where the setup program 1s double click the CD ROM icon if you re installing from a CD R installing a file you ve downloaded from the Internet find and o you saved the file Find and double click any files called Setup or si ly named files Follow the on screen instructions to install the Xian er program s although most ralhs use a step by step Wizard to ify Where you want to install the ind and let you specify which and icons in the Start menu which can be ou don t have to manually add an icon to the installed a lot of software onto your computer b your Programs menu will be cluttered Ce of folders and programs You can always reorganize the Programs menu and r v the amount of folders and clutter Add New Programs 5 Setup t programs have a amp cial installation program used to install them onto your c
204. ck up files on the volume Backup Now Figure 8 3 Over time errors begin to appeoa computer s hard drive affecting its performance Fortunately most of the hard drive age caused by normal wear and tear is not serious and can easily be diagnosed nig a hard drive repair program Microsoft Windows XP t comes with a hard drive re gram called Error checking In this lesson you will learn how to use pan io lagnose and repair any errors on your computer s hard disk a preventative meno k that you should do at least once a month 1 Open NAM from the Start menu Next yoy need to right click the drive you want to check 2 ick the C Local Disk icon and select Properties from the operties for the selected drive appear in the General Properties dialog box r checking and several other maintenance tools are located on the Tools tab de the Tools tab The Tools tab appears as shown in Figure 8 3 using the Windows XP Shut Down sequence is Click the Check Now button to start the Error checking program the biggest cause of hard disk errors KY The Checking Disk dialog box appears as shown in Figure 8 4 The C drive is selected as the drive to be scanned because it was the drive you right clicked Error checking doesn t have many options but the ones it does have are important There are two different types of tests you can have Error checking run Automatically fix errors and Scan for and attemp
205. configure a device Lesson 8 16 Using the Device Manager System Properties System Restore Automatic Updates Remote General Driver Resources General Computer Name Hardware Advanced Standard floppy disk controller Add Hardware Wizard The Add Hardware Wizard helps you install hardware Resource settings i Resource type Setting WHI O Range 03F0 aN Add Hardware Wizard WHO Range 9 03F7 035 Device Manager The Device Manager lists all the hardware devices installed on your computer Use the Device Manager to change the properties of any device Diver Song Hardware Profiles d Hardware profiles provide a way for you to set up and store ze different hardware configurations Hardware Profiles Figure 8 34 Device Manager Display the properties Scan for Hardware Uninstall changes 1 Computer S Disk drives 2 Display adapters 2 DVD CD ROM drives Floppy disk controllers Floppy disk drives Disable ig Human Interface Deyices Show Hide the IDE ATA ATAPI cont S i Console Tree Updat n lt TECC 1904 Dn A p ate Driver Figure 8 35_ Figure 8 37 The Deyi QJ anager lets you formation about your computer s hardware e Qrove hardware device drivers AXP hange which of your computer s resources a device uses ou re trying to install a new hardware device have carefully followed the instructions that ome with device and the devic
206. creen Using the Storyboard Y lect e To Add a Clip to a Storyboard S and click Clip gt Add to Sto elect a collection of clips from the Collections window select a clip from the collection Q imeline e ToRemove a Clip from a torybodfd Click the video clip in the storyboard and click the Delete button e To Rearrange Clips on location on the sto oard Place the mouse pointer over the clip you want to move and then drag it to a new Saving a Prejec as a Movie e To Open Am Open Windows Movie Maker and click the Open button to navigate to where your projects are saved and do the project you want to open ying click the Save Movie button Choose a setting and click OK choose a file name and a location for your e to be saved in and click Save Wait for your movie to be created N Project as a Movie Click on a blank spot on the storyboard and click the Play button When your project is Pos The WordPad program includes the following features Select all that apply Ability to use different fonts A spell checker Ability to format paragraphs A Thesaurus Jawe 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Seven The Free Programs 205 2 The NotePad program can open any text files of any size True or False 3 To record sounds with the Sound Record you ll need Select all that apply A A sound card B A microphone C A MIDI interface D Speakers 4 The Calculator program can
207. ct File Open from the menu Your Organization s Name Here 64 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 3 7 Selecting Replacing and Deleting Text Figure 3 13 That was if Alest 1 Position the insertion point before or You can select and p amp after the text that you want to select replace text Figure 3 14 2 Click and hold down the left mous That was in METE button drag the mouse across th Sy The updated letter e gt you want to select and then rel the mouse button AO That was in July 3 If you want to replace the amp lected text simply type in the newt tt will Figure 3 13 Ei Letter WordPad Fie Edit View Insert Format Help DE 6 Ho amp To the La Fanci Nails Company bought a set of your press on nails last and was very displeased with them While pressing my La Fanci Nagi nt to pet my poodle Pizzy and my hand and nails stuck to her shaggy li That was in July The press on nail glue should no been so strong Pizzy s barking is driving me mad Please reconsider the s our product Figure 3 14 This lesson ins how to select text Whenever you want to edit more than one character at a time y st select it first A lot of editing and formatting techniques such as formatting cutti ing and pasting text also require that you select the text you want to modify The robably hundreds of reasons to select text in many Windows based programs so it p ou
208. ct where you want to copy the file from the shortcut menu Quick Reference To Select Multiple Files If the files are next to each other you can click and drag a rectangle around the files you want to select Or If the files are next to each other you can click the first file you want to select press and hold down the lt Shift gt key and click the last file you want to select If the files aren t next to each other you can select random files by holding the lt Ctrl gt key and clicking the files you want to select Your Organization s Name Here 1 10 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 4 27 The Search Companion guides your search by asking questions about your search Figure 4 28 Beginning a music file search Figure 4 29 The search results window JY search A The Search Command Lesson 4 12 Finding a File Using the Search Companion Search Companion B Search Results je lx File Edit View Favorites Tools Help gt P Search Key Folders Search for all files of a et Pictures music or video certain type or search by Address Search Results Documents word type and name Search Companion processing spreadsheet _ Pictures and Photos etc Music All files and folders C Video Printers computers or All or part of the file name people David Byrne Search Companion What do you want to search for There was one file found Is
209. d one piece of information at a time Every time you cut or copy something to the Clipboard it replaces the previous information Move the insertion point to the blank line immediately below To the La Fanci Nails Company This is where you want to paste the line you cut Click the Paste button on the Standard toolbar ry Poof The cut text the subject line appears at the insertion point Copying information is very similar to cutting information Both commands put selected information in the Clipboard where you can then paste it to a new locage The only difference between the two commands is that Cut command oe ted information when it copies it to the clipboard while the Copy command copies the selected information to the clipboard without deleting it X Select the entire document by holding down the lt Ctrl gt Ke LD clicking the pointer in the left margin Oo to the clipboard Now you can copy the selected text to the clipboard Click the Copy button on the Standard toolbar Nothing appears to happen but the selected text has been One of the great things about Windows is that it allows share information between programs For example the information that you just copied to the Windows clipboard from WordPad can be pasted into another jovs program To see how this works you will need to open another Windows the Notepad Click the Start button and select All Programs Accessories gt Notepad re The Notepa
210. d program appears Notepadi Waere bones simple program and doesn t have a toolbar like WordPad does so y sll have to access the Paste command through the menu Select Edit Paste from alan menu The document you copied fromethe program You won t be usin close it Click the Notepad s Close button A dialog box appears g if you want to save the changes you made to the Notepad file You don t negavo any changes so you can safely click No Click No X You should e changes you ve made to your WordPad document Click the button on WordPad s Standard toolbar to save the cha ve made to the document vR your recent changes to the local disk ordPad program is pasted into the Notepad Motepad program anymore in this chapter so you can Copy button Other Ways to Copy e Select Edit gt Copy from the menu O lt Ctrl gt lt C gt Quick Reference To Cut Something 1 Select the text or object you want to cut 2 Click the L Cut button on the Standard toolbar Or Select Edit Cut from the menu Or Press lt Ctrl gt lt X gt To Copy Something 1 Select the text or object you want to copy 2 Click the Copy button on the Standard toolbar Or Select Edit Copy from the menu Or Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt To Paste a Cut or Copied Object 1 Place the insertion point where you want to paste the text or object 2 Click
211. d protect check box Windows automatically assigns your Windows log in password to the screen saver 5 Click OK To Adjust the Energy Saving Features of your Monitor 1 Follow the preceding Steps 1 and 2 2 Click the Power button in the Monitor Power section and adjust the interval after which the monitor shuts off Your Organization s Name Here 1 66 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 6 20 The Sounds Properties dialog box Figure 6 21 The Browse for Sound file dialog box JO Sounds Speech Lesson 6 9 Changing System and Program Sounds Sounds and Audio Devices Properties Volume Sounds Audio Voice Hardware Browse for Asterisk sound A sound scheme is a set of sounds applied to events in Windows and programs You can select an existing scheme or save one you have modified Sound scheme windows XP Hardware Fail Windows Default S e e ct th e soun d 3 ao 4 G windows XP Hardware Insert Windows XP Hardware Remove Scneme you WANE ag ra u se a Windows XP Menu Command amp Windows XP Minimize To change sounds click a program event in the following list and i i then select a sound to apply You can save the changes as a new windows er sound scheme WS dows XP Battery Critical windows XP Print complete 2 indows XP Critical Stop amp Windows XP Restore Windows XP Default amp Windows XP Ringin lows XP Battery Low windows XP
212. d screen colors Once you ve decorated eme you ll want to make sure it looks as good as possible so screen resolution and number of colors that appear on the screen This chapter will show you how to needs and tastes You ll learn how settings so you can finally slow computer makes You ll als custom wallpaper screensa Windows with your pers you ll learn how to adj at once ge l amp Customizing Windowss M Prerequisites e How to use the mouse to click double click drop and drag and right click How to use menus toolbars and dialog boxes How to view and navigate through the contents of your computer disk drives and folders 150 Microsoft Windows XP VX ee Lesson 6 1 A Look at the Control Panel Figure 6 1 Bocce L Mv Bocuments OS E mail fe My Recent Documents gt E B Pah Py Folders FF Open the Control Panel by S microsoft Outlook eo ee contra pore opening the Start menu OD wircons media Payer 3 my Music controlrant Pick a category and selecting Control w MSN Explorer ws My Computer Appearance and Ther LD Printers and Other Hardware Panel My network Places i i D j Networkand Inter C tions Figure 6 2 Baca 3 ee ba Printers and Faxes Fo as E Optio ee The Control Panel ss hme a Help and Support AV J S ads Speech and Audio Devices Accessibility Options pP Search Figure 6 3 ait q w ormance and
213. d the From and Subject information appear at the top of this pane You can also open a message its own window this is especially helpful when you want to read a long message Simply double click the message you want to read The message appears in its own window You can close the message s window when you re finished reading it O by clicking the window s close button If a message has one or more files attached to it a paper clip will also appear in this K area If a message contains an attachment go to Step 5 to open it If not skip ahead A Step 6 A Optional To open any files attached to a message click the paper RY icon and then click the file you want to open from the list that apace from the paper clip Sometimes you ll want to print a copy of a message Here s how to do is S Paper Clip Optional To print a message select File Print from th u or press lt Ctrl gt lt P gt Click OK to print the message Quick Reference To Receive and Read E mail Messages Q 1 Start Outlook Express Q and click the Inbox folder 2 Click the am Oo and Receive button on WwW the Outlook Express Ww toolbar 3 Click or double click the Q message you want to read e To Open an Attached File amp e Follow the above steps to read the message then w click the paper clip icon and then click the file you Yor want to open from the list X that appears from the
214. d the Font list box s Scroll Down button Os New Roman appears in the list Click the Times New Roman option in the list Our next destination is the Combo Box The combo box is the n of the list box it too displays a list of options The only difference is that st click the combo box s downward pointing arrow in order to display its RO Click the Color combo box s down arrow A list of color options appears below the Color comb px Select the Blue color from the combo b Sometimes you need to select more than one 1 in a dialog box For example what if you want to add Strikeout formatting an e formatting to the selected font You use the check box control when you re pRented with multiple choices In the Effects section click the ut check box and click the Underline check box The last destination on our dialo ur is the Button Buttons are used to execute or cancel commands Two buttons can Be found in every dialog box They are e OK Applies and sav box Pressing the lt changes you have made and then closes the dialog key usually does the same thing as clicking the OK button e Cancel Clos dialog box without applying and saving any changes Pressing the gt key usually does the same thing as clicking the cancel button Click the C Font ow button to cancel the changes you made and close the Combo Box or Drop Down List O Check Box Q Quick Reference To Select a Dialog Box Contro
215. dd Remov dows Components button on the left side of the window m The WindoW Components Wizard window appears as shown in Figure 8 19 You can view wh h components have been installed and which haven t by looking at the Add Remove Com S list Windows ows components are grouped by category An unchecked box L by a Components O i none of its components have been installed A checked box 1 by a ory means all of its compoents have been installed A grayed checked box 1 by Qpoategory means some of its components have been installed To view which Qeon are in a category select the category and click the Details button Scroll down the Components list to view all the components to choose QY from Click the Accessories and Utilities category the word not the E checkbox to select it and then click the Details button The details of the Accessories and Utilities category appear in their own dialog box as shown in Figure 8 20 Select the Games category You can select any of the games you want to install on your computer by adding a check to the check box To remove a Windows component simply remove the check mark from a check box L 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer 223 4 Click OK in the Games dialog box and click OK in the Accessories and Utilities dialog box You have returned to the Windows Components Wizard window 5 Click the Internet Explorer categ
216. dd a Printer e Open the Printers The first page of the Add Printer Wizard springs onto your screen The Add Printer Wizard will help you setup your printer by walking you step by step through the entire installation process folder and click Add a Click Next rinter under Printer The Add Printer Wizard may ask how the printer is connected to the computer if it s a OF in the side panel local printer or a network printer A local printer plugs directly into your computer a AS network printer is located on the network Select either the Local printer or Network printer option and click toe to continue The next step of the Add Printer Wizard appears as shown in Figure 8 22 Hage need to specify the port you want to use If you re installing a local printer select the port you want to ith your printer usually LPT1 Printer Port or USB and click If you don t want to use the LPT1 Printer Port click the arrow S bo box to a view more port options Click on the manufacturer of your printer from the cturer list You may have to scroll down the list of printer manufactur manufacturer s name a list of printer models from that model list to the right Click on the model of your printer from the en you click on the Cturer appears in the el list and click Next Quick Reference To Install a New Printer 1 Open the Printers folder by clicking the Start button and selecting Control Pan
217. de MSN s of the Web ant to view here Enter gt currently unavailable this Search eS EO Resolutions es screen IS displayed In Advanced Search made easy Get two months free Internet Explorer when you sign up for Product Families gt Get your life one year U S only Windows organized and Job hunting your PC in shape Avoid common resum4 ee Office with these helpful mistakes with tips S 2s from f MSN C gt Servers resources rom areer Microsoft MSN Developer Tools and our partners Information For Microsoft Build XML Web Home Home Office Learn the fundamental Businesses s technologies and Small Businesses get started today IT Professionals Make mobile data Get the SNI Developers Enterp rise access easier lt Figure 9 6 4 Cannot find server Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Bak 9 x E vs s Search g Favori http www microsdsfoft com ms htm il The page cannot be assis The page you are looking for is currently unavailab he Web site might be experiencing technical diffi s or you may need to adjust your browser settings Click the Refresh butt try again later If you typed the z address in the Address bar make sure that it is s SE ARA n settings click the Tools menu tab click Se The settings should match those provid r Nu ocal area network LAN administrator or Igkernd amp e provi
218. de is a registered trademark of CustomGuide Inc Ed els on 0 Renee an eee enn en eegii WS 7 Chapter One The Fundamentals cccccccccccscsssscscsssscscssescsesseseseseescseseeeeas lt ere 11 Lesson 1 1 A Look at Windows XP and What s NewW ccccccccsseeeeees Peer 12 Lesson 1 2 Starting and Logging On to Windows ccccccesseeeeeeeeeeeee Messe sees eee eeeees 14 Lesson 1 3 Understanding the Windows XP Screen 0000000000000000 Mee ooo 16 Lesson 1 4 A Look at the New Windows XP Interface 06 A O dishes Sexcteneees 18 Lesson 1 5 Using the Mouse Pointing Clicking and Double clichy EE IOTA 20 Lesson 1 6 Using the Mouse Dragging and Dropping a EE 22 Lesson 1 7 Using the Mouse Right clicking ee R amp T 24 Lesson 1 8 Using the Keyboard cccccsccccceceeeeeeee ees W eeen 26 Lesson 1 9 Exiting Windows and Turning off Your COmPtQel ccccccccccccceesssssssssteeees 28 Chapter One Review ccccccceccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Oo E E 30 Chapter Two Working with a Window c gumpessssrsessesssessesssesseesseseseseesesesessesesesseeees 33 Lesson 2 1 Starting a Program 0000000000 L O ne ee ee eee E rere 34 Lesson 2 2 Understanding the Parts Of a Wind OWigg cccccccccccccscccscccccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 36 Lesson 2 3 Minimizing Maximizing and Rikioring a VV WIG OW i vessactiodtnctessuethsoeantnnnisanes 38 Lesson 2
219. de what you want to fill with the selected The pointer changes to a f indicating you can fill objects with the selected cot Click inside the circle with the pointer The circle is filled with the blue color You can also add text to your Waie Click the Text tool gt This time the pointer changes to a indicating that you can Qj to your picture Click where you want to add text to the picture G Click a blank area of the picture The Text Toolbar should appear on the Paint screen lettingfou select from several fonts and styles create a large enough rectangle by clickin gging with the pointer you won t have to resize it Drag the text box s lower right is up and to the right until the text fits on a single line You can cut copy and paste obj Qin just as you can in most Windows programs Click the Select tool an To select an object positi Type This is a picture Q You will probably have to adjust the text O that the text fits Actually if you efect the circle object pointer above the top left corner of the circle then drag a rectangle aa cle by clicking and dragging the mouse below the bottom right corner AL ircle and releasing the mouse button A dotted rectangle appears around the Select Edit from the menu Now paste th Click a b rea of the picture to deselect the circle and then select te from the menu Edit The Kyi is pasted in the picture Notice the pasted c
220. der ISP e If k Administrator has enabled it Microsoft Sin examine your network and automatically ermietwork connection settings seer oor Please try the following YJ ea oom an 5 addresses are everywhere on television advertisements in magazine and newspaper ticles and even on business cards These www something com s you ve seen and heard so e Press lt Ctrl gt lt L gt A much about are URLs if you really want to know URL stands for Uniform Resource Locator Just like there is a house office or building behind a postal address there is a Web page behind every Web address Unlike postal addresses through the magic of technology you can arrive instantly at a Web page by typing its Web address or URL into your Web browser Well hopefully instantly if you ve already been on the Internet for any amount of time you probably know that sometimes the Internet gets busy and net congestion can cause a Web page to come up slowly f at all This lesson will show you how to visit the Web sites behind all the Web addresses you ve seen 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Nine Exploring the Internet 249 4 Sometimes when you re browsing the Web you ll see a screen like one means the Web site is unavailable Several things can cause a Web pa For all these cases try going to the Web site again la might be fixed a few minutes or hours later Connect to the Internet It
221. disks A disk drive 1s the pao computer that reads and writes information onto disks just like a tape recorder recor plays music on a cassette There are four main types of disks drives computers N use Pra their information as shown in the following table DiE 4 1 Common Computer Disks Drives ype Drive Letter AorB 1 44 MB Floppy disks are the square plastic things that look like coffee coasters Floppy drives can t hold a lot of information but they re ideal for moving small files such as word processing documents between computers e Floppy Disk 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 89 Drive Letter Size Description C and above Over 4 GB Hard disks hide permanently inside your computer Your computer s hard disk is its main filing cabinet where it stores almost all of its programs and files D or above 600 MB Compact discs or CD ROMs look like the audio f discs you play in your stereo CD ROMs are cheap LE and they can store a lot of information which is O why they re used to install software for games and CD ROM programs with a lot of multimedia Unlike floppy or hard disks most CD ROMs can only read information you can t save anything on the D or above Over 100 MB Removable storage drives have featur eS hard disks and floppy disks Removable drivs are Removable like a floppy drive because they rea write Drive information on
222. doesn t matter where you are on the Internet you can always enter a Web address Click the words in the Address bar The text in the Address bar becomes highlighted Type the address of the Web page you want to view in our example we ll use www microsoft com and press lt Enter gt Web addresses are preceded by http For example the address we want is http www startribune com Technically you don t need to add the http before typing the Web address save yourself some time and leave it out Q NOTE If you forget the www in front of a Web address or a com an Internet Explorer called ntelliSense attempts to correct the Web address by nde the www or com for you Sometimes it works sometimes it doesn t After a moment you re connected to the Minneapolis Star Tribune Web site as n in Figure 9 7 though hopefully your headlines won t be as out of date LeS going to another Web site Type www yahoo com in the Address bar and press lt Ente KO igure 9 6 This o load Possibly the most famous Web site on the Internet the Yahoo home The computer where the Web page is stored is down Too many users are trying to view the same Web page at Pine You ve lost your connection to the Internet The Web page no longer exists or maybe it never exist ip the first place did you type in the correct Web address Whatever was causing the problem ia A 2 http ag Address Bar
223. dow so that it fills the entire screen This let C you see more of the window s contents The Maximize button only appears when the window isn t maximized doesn t fill the entire scr Restore When a window is maximized fills the entire screen the Restore button returns the window to its previous size Close button Closes the window or program when you re finished working with from the screen and the computer s memory Q Controls what the program does The items listed on th nu Bar change from program to program but the menu bar s location doesn always perched near the top of a window right below the Title bar Toolbar Some but not all windows and programs have o ay more toolbars which ae buttons you point and or click to acce ently used commands Main Window or This is where all the action takes place you work on whatever you re Document Area working on If you were using a word pr r this is where your letter would appear If you were browsing the Inter is is where the Web pages would appear Got everything down Don t worry if yo this lesson is just a quick guided tour of a typical window The rest of the lessons hapter focus on how to use a window s controls buttons and menus Your Organization s Name Here 38 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 2 3 Minimizing Maximizing and Restoring a Window Minimize Maximize button or button Restore button if the Figure 2 5 Eek The Minimize Maximi
224. down a bit When you file things in your file cabinet you probably never have more than two possibly three nested folders i e a folder inside another folder Your computer s folders on the other hand can contain as many subfolders as you want nested as deep as you want so you can have a folder inside a folder inside a folder ad infinitum gt 3 Click the Address Bar arrow lt A list of your computer s drives and the folder you are currently in appears he click any folder or drive to go to that folder or drive q 4 Select the Local Disk C drive from the list O a Tawt way of levels deep You return to the root directory of the C drive The Address bargis selecting a drive especially if you are in a folder that is nested ey You can think of the Address Bar as your compass because even whe re exploring unfamiliar folders nested deep in the far recesses of your compute ways tells you where you are If you get really lost you can always click the Adare d jump back to the familiar C drive All this moving around your computer opening disk drives GY folders is a little boring but it s something you have to get used to if you want to h degree of proficiency with Windows Going back to our trusty file cabinet metaphor Wnagine what would happen if you didn t know how to open the drawers and folders in 0 file cabinet How would you find your tax returns if you were audited or your insur cepolicy if
225. dows from the shortcut menu Y Quiz oN 1 To start a program in Windows XP do the following Q A Make sure the Program Manager is open double click the Pro Group where the program you want to run is located and double click the Pro B Click the Start button point to the All Programs menu click enu and any submenus where the program you want to run is located amp ick the name of the program you want to run C Click the Start button point to the Run menu click the u and any submenus where the program you want to run 1s located and click the name of the program you want to run D None of the above Q 2 The little bar that lists a program s nag is found at the top of a window is called the A A Windows bar B Program bar Q C Title bar D Very top of the window bar 3 You start your favorite w CNrocessing program to type a letter but the program appears in anode that s too small to use How can you It f oye ills the entire screen Select all that apply Select Window Screen from the menu Double click dow s Title bar Click the pr s icon on the taskbar Click the ize button located in the right side of the window s Title bar maximize the wind Jawe Your Organization s Name Here 50 Microsoft Windows XP 4 You can open or restore a minimized window by clicking its icon on the taskbar True or False 5 You can move a window to a different position on your compu
226. e To Open the Mouse Properties Dialog Box e Click the Start button select Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware and click on the Mouse icon To switch the Left and Right Mouse Buttons e Open the Buttons tab of the Mouse Properties dialog box check the Switch primary and secondary buttons box and click OK To Change the Double Click Speed e Open the Buttons tab of the Mouse Properties dialog box drag the Pointer Speed slider to a new position and click OK To Change the Pointer Speed e Open the Mouse Properties dialog box click the Pointer Options tab drag the Pointer Speed slider to a new position and click OK To Change the Pointer Options e Open the Mouse Properties dialog box click the Pointer Options tab and check the option you wish to change Your Organization s Name Here 170 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 6 24 The General tab of the Folder Options dialog box allows you to customize how Windows looks and works Table 6 7 Custom Setting Options describes each of the options shown here Lesson 6 11 Customizing How Folders Look and Work Folder Options General View File Types Offline Files Tasks ar Show common tasks in folders Use Windows classic folders Browse folders fee Open each folder in the same window Open each folder in its own window Click items as follows Single click to open an item point to select
227. e If the port is no SS Add Hardware new port e ina Speech and Pick a task Use the followi LFT Recommerr sd F Pr Figure 8 E 22 f Audo Devices g View installed printers or fax printers E PATA S l oe pan s ee Add a Note Most computers use the LAT 1 port tasgomi aicate with a local printer A A The connector for this port should look Ike this Selecting a printer driver icc or pick a Control Panel by manufactu rer 2 Hardware p 2 Printing icon 7 te n 2 Networking pe Figure 8 E 23 Pa Game Controllers lt 3 Keyboard Create a new port Phone and Modem C reese ies Options Ps Printers and Faxes Scanners and f Cameras Selecting a printer driver by manufacturer ba Wireless Link ye e 2 R Figure 8 24 Figure 8 21 Select the port you want to use with prec fe aa a printer and deciding if it should be used as the Add Printer Wizard d Printer Wizard defau It pri nte r Install Printer Software Name Your Printer The manufacturer and model determine which printer software to use gt You must assign a name to this printer Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installatior Type a name for this printer Because some programs do not support printer and server ba disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer docum for name combinations of more than 31 characters it is best to keep the name as short as compatible printer softw
228. e Inc Chapter One The Fundamentals 1 3 Why Use Windows XP Windows XP represents one of the most significant upgrades Microsoft has made the Windows operating system since Windows 95 Windows XP is based on Microsoft stable Windows NT 2000 operating system which means that it s much more realiable read doesn t crash or lock up as much as previous versions of Windows If your computer meets the minimum requirements you should definitely consider upgrading If you do decide to upgrade first make sure that you can upgrade To use Windows XP your computer should have at least e A Pentium II 300 MHz processor e Minimum 128 MB of memory e Minimum 1 5 GB free disk space AS If your computer doesn t meet these requirements you probably need to beef up your RAY before you make the switch to Windows XP If your computer meets the minimum hard requirements refer to Table 1 1 What s New in Windows XP to see if Windows XP s gt features justify the time and cost of upgrading If you already have Windows ME RA not be worth it The features in Table 1 1 Whats New in Windows XP are just a few maj new features To read more about new features go to www microsoft com or go to Klp and Support in the Start menu of Windows XP Table 1 1 What s New in Windows XP Improved Interface The most obvious and controversial feature of Wi P is a completely redesigned interface and Start menu that suppo ets you find w
229. e Repeat this process to change the font size If the default setting is difficult for you to see you may want to select a larger font size Can t stand the bright new appearance of Windows XP You can easily give Windows XP the appearance of your tried and true older versions of Windows Here s how 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Six Customizing Windows 157 4 Click the Windows and buttons combo box and select Windows Classic style from the list The preview area of the dialog box displays how your screen will look in classic style NOTE This will only change the way windows and buttons are displayed in Windows it will not revert everything back to classic style e g the Start menu and the desktop If you re really computer savvy you may want to further customize how Windows looks by using the Advanced and or Effects buttons 5 Click the Effects button The Effects dialog box appears as shown in Figure 6 9 We won t go through these options in this lesson but you can find out what some of the more important settings amp by looking at Table 6 3 Controls on the Display Properties Appearance Tab 6 Click Cancel to close the Effects dialog box then click Cancel 2021 Display Properties dialog box without saving your changes lt Table 6 3 Controls on the Display Properties Appearance Tab Description Windows and Lets you change Windows overall visual design You have Oe S buttons W
230. e Edit View Insert Format Help fm amp tg Start Document WordPad Figure 2 11 When you have several programs or windows open you mpa that one window covers the other windows or other items on your screen When hi ens you can simply move a window to a new location on the screen just like you woWid move a report or folder to a different location on your desk Here s how to movejndow 1 Position the mouse pointer over the title bar of the WordPad program Remember that the title bar is the colq EA par at the very top of a window or program Quick Reference It displays the name of the progr mndow 2 Click the title bar and move mouse while still holding down the To Move a Window mouse button Sd yi e Click and drag the Yep it s that drag and drop ou learned earlier An outline of the window follows a TS LA Toe your mouse as you drag t indow as shown in Figure 2 11 showing you where you AGHBESIO Ne Meuse O button to drop the window are moving 1t AN l l in the desired location on 3 Release the mote tton to drop the window to a new location the screen ge Your Organization s Name Here 42 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 2 6 Sizing a Window El Document WordPad mB Ei Document Word SEE Ed Document WordPad Figure 2 12 J File Edit View Insert Format Help File Edit View Insert Format Help File Edit View Insert Format Help oe SR d Os 6a Oe SB Arial
231. e Start menu and select Search The Search window appears with the Search Companion in the blue side panel as shown in Figure 4 27 The Search Companion will ask you different questions to help you with your search For now let s search for a music file 2 Click Pictures music or video The Search for all files of a certain type or search by type and name dialog box appears 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 111 Check the Music box type David Byrne in the text field as shown in Figure 4 28 and click Search The Search Companion begins searching for the file and displays the names and locations of all the files it finds that have the words David Byrne in their names You can open any of these files by double clicking them Double click the music file The music file begins playing in the Windows Media program Close the Windows Media program If you don t quite remember the file name you can always search by when you last modified the file or by the size of the file We won t do a search using these criterion AS right now but we can at least go ahead and get to know where they are a little better c To start a new search click the Search button on the toolbar The first Search Companion dialog box reappears O 7 Click the All Files and Folders option A dialog box appears giving options to search by file name text within thg file location of the f
232. e igate to the drive and folder when you want to save the image give the image a different gam f you want and click OK shortcut menu navigate to the gand folder when you want to save the file give the file a different name if you want K S Internet are stored in compressed ZIP files and need to be lled WinZip S e To Download a File Right click thE Sou want to download select Save Target As from the O e Many programs and file unpacked using a p Introduction mail e To Start tad xpress Click the l Outlook Express button on the taskbar s Quick Launch toolbar egt Go Mail from Internet Explorer s menu Composing and Sending E mail e To Compose a Message Start Outlook Express click the Create Mail button on the Outlook Express toolbar type the recipient s address in the To field or click the Select recipients from a list button to the left of the To field click the name of the recipient in the Name list then click the To button and OK when you re finished Click the pointer in the lower pane and type the message Click the Send Message button on the toolbar to send the message Your Organization s Name Here 272 Microsoft Windows XP e To Check a Message for Spelling Errors Before you send the message select Tools gt Spelling from the menu e To Attach a File to a Message Before you send the message click the Attach button on the toolbar and then select the file in the Insert Attachment
233. e instructor on exactly what you need to lt lt other words this book was designed and printed just for you AN versatile one Step by assroom or as an formative tables you want to learn n the second page of fast Unlike most other computer training courseware CustomGuides are desig Because of their unique design each CustomGuide is like getting three step instructions make your CustomGuide great for use in an instructor individual self paced tutorial Detailed descriptions illustrated diagr and an index make your CustomGuide suitable as a reference guide more about a topic or process The handy Quick Reference box h each lesson is great for when you need to know how to do so This CustomGuide is written in a down to earth non technig writing style that is easy to understand and read This CustomGuide is a set of lessons that teach you ww you need to know about Microsoft Windows XP It s designed for new users are just starting to learn how to use Microsoft Windows for the first time and for mor ienced users who want to learn more advanced features Here s how your CustomGuide is Ss Chapters This book is divided into several k Each chapter covers a set of topics that are related in some way to each other Aren if you are ready for a chapter Look at the prerequisites that appear at aN ning of each chapter They will tell you what you should know before you start the SRA Lessons G Each c
234. e local copies of network files that you specifically made available Compress Old Files Q Quick Reference To Free Space on Your Hard Drive 1 Open My Computer or Windows Explorer 2 Right click the hard disk and select Properties from the shortcut menu 3 Click the Disk Cleanup button 4 Click OK Your Organization s Name Here 2 1 6 Microsoft Windows XP E O OS Figure 8 10 The Scheduled Tasks folder Figure 8 11 The Scheduled Task Wizard lists all the programs on your computer select the one you want to schedule Figure 8 12 Specify when you want the selected program to run Figure 8 13 Specify when you want the selected program to run Scheduled Tasks folder e e Lesson 8 6 Scheduling Tasks f Scheduled Tasks Scheduled Task Wizard File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help gt B JO search j Folders iil Address 4 Scheduled Tasks Peeka Symantec Task NetDetect Other Places System Restore Figure 8 10 Scheduled Task Wizard Type a name for this task The task name can be the same name as the program name Select the time and day you want this task to start Start time 3 04 AM Evey 1 System Restore Perform this task ks Select the day s of the week below Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday When my computer starts When I log on S Cancel Figure 8 12 Figure 8 13 To k
235. e points are system checkpoints scheduled restore points created by your computer a ti me befo re th e manual restore points restore points created by you and installation restore points automatic restore points problems occu rre d created when certain programs are installed A lt November 2001 Each day that has a a a Tee Wed 1Ha En sat MELUR AARNE i restore point appears in bold A restore point is a snapshot of your computer at an earlier time that you can restore Click the day that has a restore point when your computer was working properly 1 On this calendar click a bold date 2 On this list click a restore point You can click E or to move to the previous or next month Figure 8 33 oO your computer you can use Windows XP s System uter configuration to a time before the problems occurred computer doesn t work properly after you installed a junky ou can use System Restore to return your computer ay it was before you installed that junky program without losing ail documents or history and favorites lists If you are experiencing probl Restore utility to return yo For example perhaps y discount software pro configuration recent work suc System Restore keeps track of the changes you make to your computer at specific intervals and when yo fll new hardware and software programs You can also create your own restore po record your computer settings at any given time in case you
236. e screen True Clicking the icon of a minimized program on the taskbar restores the window A Move a window by dragging its Title bar B C and D You can use any of these methods to switch between open programs Don t use A which starts another copy of the program instead of switching to the already open program 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Working witha lt Windows Programs N a Chapter Objectives VI Prerequisites Use menus and toolbars Ko a shut Fill out a dialog box G Pon iodo tnamalce Enter and edit text Y plese pepe Save and open a file Q right click Select replace and delete text eae the Use the undo function m ia Print a file Ww Cut copy and paste text SS Format fonts and paragrap Get help Save and Open wO Different Locations AY Up until now we ve onlY aeth focusing on how to use the Windows XP operating system In this chapter you ll b amp gy aRing with a program This chapter explains how to control programs using menus and to amp rS You ll learn what a dialog box is you ll see a lot of them in Windows and h fill one out Next we ll key specific Every program is different but the procedure for doing things in all programS the same This chapter explains these basic generic chores using the WordPad program You l learn how to enter edit and delete text how to open save and print a file and how to get help when you need it O
237. e still doesn t function it means one of two things 1 the device is defective and you ll need to get another one or 2 you have a resource conflict Most hardware devices require resources on your computer These resources include Interrupt Requests IRQs Direct Memory Access DMA channels and Input Outputs I O s You don t have to know what these resources mean from a technical standpoint but it is important that you realize that there are only a limited number of these resources on your computer and that many hardware components can t share the same resource 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer 235 The most common type of resource conflict is an Interrupt Request IRQ conflict which occurs because many hardware devices need an IRQ to operate and most computers have fewer than two IRQs available For example if you were trying to install a modem that uses IRQ 3 and your network card is already using IRQ 3 the modem isn t going to work So what s the solution You can change the resource settings for many devices either by using the Device Manager or by moving some pins or switches on the hardware device itself refer to the hardware s user manual for how to do this This lesson will introduce you to the Device Manager so you can see the hardware devices that are installed on your computer and how to configure them or even remove them 1 Open the Control Pane
238. e you use the arrow keys to select the text Move the insertion point to the very end of the Subject Glue Crisis KY Try selecting text with the keyboard in the next step 7 Press and hold down the lt Shift gt key and press and hold down the Ry arrow key lt lt gt until the Subject line is selected If you change your mind after selecting text it s easy to deselect it Just cli where else on the screen lt 8 Click anywhere in the document to deselect the text tes by pressing the Another trick you should know is that you can delete any selecte lt Delete gt key Select the date and press the lt Delete gt key ery important that you know The date is deleted ch more proficient at using The Subject line is no longer selected 9 And that s all there is to selecting text in Windows Again itg how to select text Knowing how to select text will make many Window programs Table 3 3 Shortcuts for Selecting Text To Select This Do This A word Double click the or 5 A sentence Press and hofi lt Ctrl gt and double click the sentence The entire document Press andagld lt Ctrl gt and double click in the left margin Double click a word to Select it Other Ways to Select Text e Move to the beginning or end of the text that you want to select ress and hold down e lt Shift gt key while e amp using the arrow keys to select the text Quick Reference To Select a
239. ear and half studyin BoA chapter won t make you a icrosoft Certified System Professionals MCSE who ng Microsoft Windows based networks often spend at ix tests that are every bit as hard as a CPA or bar exam This osoft Certified System Professional but it will explain how to perform several commo orking tasks such as how to browse the network connect to a network printer and iles and folders on your computer with other users on the network We ll leave the mo plicated networking tasks for your network administrator e M Prerequisites e How to use the mouse to click double click drop and drag and right click How to use menus toolbars and dialog boxes How to view and navigate through the contents of your computer disk drives and folders e How to maintain and optimize your computer 276 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 10 1 Introduction to Networks Figure 10 1 The parts of a network see Table 10 1 Network Components for a description of everything Figure 10 2 Network Interface In a peer to peer network Card NIC everyone stores their files on their own computer Anyone on the network can access files stored on any other computer F Workstation Figure 10 3 per To Peer Network In a client server network Hub Figure SS everyone stores his or her z files on a central computer mm called a server Everyone fe on the network can access the files stored on the
240. earn the complex task of logging off Windows XP 3 Click Log Off w Save all your work and exit all your programs There really isn t a lot of difference between logging off your computer and shutting it down Save any files you ve been working on and consider backing up any vital oj information if you have a tape backup Zip drive or other backup device You can also save any important files to a floppy 2 Click the Windows Start button and select Log Off The Log Off Windows dialog box appears as shown in Figure 10 19 3 Click Log Off Windows logs you off the system and displays the Welcome to Windows dialog box as shown in Figure 10 20 allowing another person to log on to Windows to use the computer 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Ten Networking with Windows XP 287 Lesson 10 7 Windows Welcome to Windows Copyright 1985 2001 Mionosoft Corporation O Log on using dial up connection Figure 10 21 The procedure for logging back on to Windows XP really computer on except that you don t have to wait as procedure for logging on to Windows 1 f necessary press lt Ctrl gt lt A Delto to start the log on procedure The Windows Log On dialog box 2 Enter your user name and Password Remember that when you e of s to protect ywo from prying eyes 3 If necessary click or computer tha Normally you sho Presto nas ears as shown in Figure 10 21 our password W
241. ears as shown in Figure 9 12 The name of the Web page appears in the name box if you want you can replace the Web page s default name with one that is more meaningful to you Clicking the Create In button lets you add shortcuts to a folder Click OK to add the Web page A shortcut to the Web page is added to your list of favorites Here s how to display your favorite Web sites Click the Favorites button on the toolbar A list of your favorite Web pages appears in a panel on the left side of Internet Explorer as shown in Figure 9 13 Click the favorite Web page you want to view If your favorite Web page is in a folder just click the folder _ and then the f Web site The Web page you clicked appears in the right panel of Internet Ex Is there a Web page that you really like and use almost every time you re g the Internet You might consider making that Web page your Home page b page that appears each time you start Internet Explorer Some of the agg we discussed in the previous lesson make excellent home pages Herg s hoWto make a Web page your home page and select eral tab if Go to a Web page that you want to set as your home Tools Internet Options from the menu Click th necessary The Internet Options dialog box appears as shown in rif The address of your current home page appears in the box in the Home p ection Click Use Current button to set the We at is displayed on your screen as your
242. ecccseeeeeeeeeees 192 Lesson 7 11 Using the Media Library in Windows Media Player ccccccccccecceeeeeeees 193 Lesson 7 12 Listen to Internet Radio Stations with Windows Media Playert 194 Lesson 7 13 Copy Music to a CD or Portable Device with Windows Media Player 195 Lesson 7 14 Give your Windows Media Player a New Skin cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 196 Lesson 7 15 Windows Movie Maker Requirement cccccccsscccccecccccceeeccceeceeeeeeeeeees 197 Lesson 7 16 Recording a Video with Windows Movie Maker ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 198 Lesson T17 Usine the StOryboa dcano ai aa 199 O Lesson 7 18 Saving a Project as a MOVi6 cvececeessshecsdcadnnstacestaisocadea baceshesseerdanchedestactecedeceds 20Q amp CAVA DEST SCY C10 Ie CV NW rarna a a a a 20 Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer ccccesscseseseseteees y Lesson 8 1 Formatting a Floppy Disk ccccccccccssssssccsccececccccccccccccecceceeceeeeeeeeees QF Lesson 8 2 Copying a Floppy DISK ession a a eg uS 09 Eesson S 93 Repairing Disk EMOS eanont a a APA Lesson 8 4 Defragmenting Your Hard Disk ccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees w etre 212 Lesson 8 5 Freeing Up Space on your Hard Disk cece eee cece ee A T 214 Lesson 8 6 Scheduling Tasks iccccwtaneaanGae ee re 216 Lesson 8 7 Installing New SoftWare cruisin Jha oe 218 Lesson 8 8 Removing Software ccccccccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeese
243. ecycle Bin just ter kick themselves st permanently erased All the files and folders are permanently deleted from your ity NOTE Be careful when emptying the Recycle Bin Since Wi erases the oldest files from the Recycle Bin you s empty the Recycle Bin much at all A lot of user about every time they delete something and t because they realize they needed the file theg tom a floppy disk are not placed files from a floppy disk because the Recycle Bin won t be able to restore them A Quick Reference To Restore a Deleted File 1 Double click the Recycle Bin to open it e amp 2 Find and right click the O mo file and select Restore this item WwW from the Recycle Bin Yor Tasks menu Ww Or Ry 2 Find and right click the deleted file and select Restore from the shortcut menu To Empty the Recycle Bin e Right click the Recycle Bin and select Empty Recycle Bin from the shortcut menu Your Organization s Name Here 104 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 4 18 Files display different types of icons to help you identify what type of file they are Figure 4 19 Every file has a three letter extension which is normally hidden from view so Windows knows what type of file it is Figure 4 20 Files with their three letter file extensions displayed Figure 4 21 A file s path name is determined first by the drive then by the folder s then by the file name Program
244. ed local or network and click Next Select a port to use with the printer y and click Next Select the printer s manufacturer and model If your printer doe Q in the list insert the disk that came with the printer and click the Have Disk button Cl t Specify whether you want to use the printer as the default printer and assign a S ter Click Next Specify if you want a test page printed and click Finish Changing ae ettings and the Default Printer Change ult printer where your computer prints everything unless otherwise specified by crarae ap inters folder right clicking the desired printer and selecting Set as Default from the shortcut menu To View Change a Printer s Default Properties Open the Printers folder right click the appropriate printer and select Properties from the shortcut menu Your Organization s Name Here 238 Microsoft Windows XP e Shutting Down a Frozen Program When a program freezes or locks up you can forcefully close the program by pressing lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt lt Delete gt selecting the program and clicking End Task Installing New Hardware Any time you add a new hardware device to your computer you must install a device driver so that Windows can communicate with the device Some hardware devices are Plug and Play compliant meaning Windows wil cally recognize and install them when you add them to your computer system To Add New Hardware to Your Computer Instal
245. edisplay a minimized program or window when you re sA use it Document WordPad again WordPad icon Find and click the WordPad icon in the Windows taski The WordPad program springs back to life and appears on the n It s important that you get all this maximize minimize restore st n because it will help you be more productive with your computer Q Quick Reference O To Maximize a Window e Click the window s Maximize button o Ore e Double click the window s amp m title bar amp To Restore a Maximized gt O Window AG e Click the window s Ry Restore button X Or e Double click the window s title bar To Minimize a Window KY e Click the window s Minimize button To Restore a Minimized Window e Click the window s icon on the taskbar Your Organization s Name Here 40 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 2 4 Closing a Window Figure 2 9 Click the Close button on the window you want to close Figure 2 10 The window disappears from your screen Figure 2 9 Close button The icon for the window Other Ways to Close a disappears from the taskbar Window e Select File Exit from When you re finished working with a windo the menu the screen and computer s memory You c e any window or program by clicking its e Right click the Close button which appears in the upperer1 St corner of the window program s icon on the 1 ekbarand so
246. eed to move or copy the fold your computer very often either When you find you do need to move or copy a fgl ever you can do so by using one of two simple methods e Drag and dropping To copy a folder hold e Using the File and Fol sks panel down the lt Ctrl gt key as a you drag the folder to You ll learn how to us methods in this lesson and how to delete a folder when you no the new location longer need it 1 Create a n folder called My Stuff in your C drive l l e how to create a folder in the previous lesson You le Other Ways to Move a 2 Dr My Stuff folder to the Temp Folder as shown in Figure 4 10 File or Folder forgot how to drag and drop If so here it is one more time position the e Cut the file or folder by Meo e over the My Stuff folder click and hold down the mouse button as you move selecting Edit Cut pointer to the Temp Folder then release the mouse button The My Stuff folder is from the menu or oved inside the Temp Folder Let s make sure we really moved the My Stuff folder pressing lt Ctrl gt lt X gt Y Double click the Temp Folder to open it ee to the desired Yep there s the My Stuff folder Here s another method for moving folders you might sie fol A want to know using Window XP s blue side panel paste tne fiie OF TO by selecting Edit gt 4 Click the My Stuff folder to select it Cut from the menu or Once you have selected the folder you want to move go to
247. eeeeeseeeeees res EEIE 220 Lesson 8 9 Adding and Removing Windows Components Qj ar TEE 222 Lesson 8 10 Installing a Printer oo ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees NE E E EEEE 224 Lesson 8 11 Changing Printer Settings and the Default Printe a E EE AE EE AATE 226 Lesson 8 12 Shutting Down a Frozen Program ETARTE ET T AET 22I Lesson 8 13 Installing New Hardware anc scdeseo cecesoctodesMiageeatidvaencesexoiaebetamaueoiabuetiecss eats 228 Lesson 8 14 Using the Windows Internet Update Featurh y ee rene ere eer sor eine oe 230 Lesson 8 15 Restoring Your Computer AL 000000000 neeesa 232 Lesson 8 16 Using the Device Manager cccccccccce Meeceeeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeseeseess 234 Chapter Eight Review cccccccccssscccceceeeeeeeeesess Q e ee eee ee ee er ae 236 Chapter Nine Exploring the Internet w AE E A E E E 243 Lesson 9 1 Introduction to the Internet ka Bae ETA NAA NE E ATT ET 244 Lesson 9 2 Connecting to the Internet QO e A oes aaa tories oe oe 246 Lesson 9 3 Displaying a Specific Waha cccccccccccccccccccccecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeess 248 Lesson 9 Ae Browse the Weborri Me ia e a baa E N Lesson 9 5 Search the Web X Lesson 9 6 Adding a Web Pag Lesson 9 7 Displaying a His Lesson 9 8 Saving Picture Lesson 9 9 Lesson 9 14 Chapter Q AEE EE EE E AA E EEE N E A ee Chapter Ten Networking with Windows XP cccsscesses
248. eep your computer egak condition you should run Error checking Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup roras once every couple of weeks You can have Windows automatically peggartMthese and other tasks on a regular basis for you with the Task Scheduler The Tas amp cheduler works a lot like VCR except instead of recording your favorite televisi n shows while you re away Task Scheduler automatically runs specified programs TRA ss0n explains how to use the Task Scheduler to run your programs automatic a regular basis Q 1 Nk the Start button and select All Programs Accessories gt 5 ystem Tools Scheduled Tasks The Scheduled Tasks window appears as shown in Figure 8 10 Double click the Add Scheduled Task icon to schedule a new program The first screen of the Schedule Tasks Wizard appears Click Next The Scheduled Task Wizard lists all the programs that are installed on your computer You must select the program you want to schedule Error checking Microsoft Backup Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup are all excellent candidates for adding to the Scheduled Tasks Select the program you want to schedule from the list and click Next The next step in the Schedule Task Wizard is specifying how often you want the selected program to run as shown in Figure 8 12 3 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer 217 5 Select how often you want to run the selected program f
249. ees 160 Le 7 Adjusting the Screen Color Depth sssrini teeren e Aenea 162 6 8 Using a Screen Sav len ainen eice dence e eas 164 n 6 9 Changing System and Program Sounds ccccceeesssssesssesesessessssessesseeeees 166 sson 6 10 Adj sting the Mouse miesie irar e a a Lahn nea aa aa 168 esson 6 11 Customizing How Folders Look and WoOrk ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 170 Lesson 6 12 Customizing Folder View Options ccccccccscccccccccccccccecccecccceeccseeeeseeeeeees 172 Chaplet D REVIO omen a A AT E Oe E EE A 174 Chapter Seven The Free Programs asnnisordni s ene aaa E EEEO 179 Lesson J WordPad eei e E E E 180 Lesson 72 NEPIA ui ene rete meres ea A O Ween re peer ere 181 lesson Jae CaCO n a A AN 182 Lesson 7 4 Sound Recorder tissc cee secehsucs ae beneeiisaae Canute atl atataatubehanseGersenttaetesecbeaiuaunonsinretes 183 LESS OnI eg ec ope ree mee T Es een meee TC ent een O 184 Lesson 7 6 Creating Pictures with Paint cccccccccccccccscccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 186 Lesson T A Play GamE c edset ciated onnacttat aveiesancsicaneueeasecehetnnckenpwasentaaaeunteeeavectioteeeean 188 2001 CustomGuide com Introduction 5 Lesson 728 C hatacie r MaPrariernn s i A e a AA tess 189 Lesson 7 9 Play a CD and Copy from it with Windows Media Playet cc ssseeees 190 Lesson 7 10 Using the Media Guide in Windows Media Player ccccccccc
250. el gt Printers and Other Hardware 2 Click the Add a printer If you can t find your printer in the list insert iQ disk or CD ROM that came task ou may have to refer to the 3 Click Next with your computer and click the Have Disk button instructions that came with your printer to t Assign a name to your printer specit y you want it to be the default printer and click Next The Add Printer Wizard assigns a your new printer as shown in Figure 8 24 You can assign your own name t inter by typing it in the Printer Name box The other important choice you have to ake on this screen is whether or not you want to use the new printer as the def um grinter The default printer is where Windows prints all of its files unless you sp oinervise Windows asks if you wo ike to print a test page to make sure your new printer ay to verify that your printer is installed and working works Usually it s a properly If you Sp page make sure there is paper and a good ink or toner 4 Specify how the printer is connected local or network and click Next 5 Select a port to use with the printer usually LPT1 and click Next 6 Select the printer s manufacturer and model If your printer doesn t appear in the list insert the disk that came cartridge in your with the printer and click Specify if Ano Windows to print a test page and click Finish phe nas button Windows m you to insert the Wind
251. elect Set as how Default Printer Right click the printer whose properties you want to view and select To ViewiChange a A Properties from the shortcut menu Printer s Properties KY The Properties dialog box for your particular printer appears as shown in Figure 8 26 Keep in mind that every printer is different so the Properties dialog box for your particular printer may look a lot different from the one shown in Figure 8 26 All Printer Properties dialog boxes let you change the default options for your particular printer what port it uses its print quality etc 4 Click Cancel to close the Properties dialog box then close the Printers folder u can also view the properties for all your printers from the Printers folder Here s e Open the Printers folder right click the appropriate printer and select Properties 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer 227 Lesson 8 12 Shutting Down a Frozen Program Windows Task Manager Bl e File Options View Windows Help ure 8 27 Applications Processes Performance Networking Win d OWS Task Task Manager window j Document wordpad Displays all the programs that are currently running A program that says Not Responding has crashed NEVER end the Explorer or Systray tasks ch Fe Click to end the selected task or gt Commit Charge 83756K 31496 Figure 8 27 m If you h
252. en eS CA folder selecting the Share this Specify if the folder option from the Files System Tasks D mar folder is shared and Folders Tasks panel DEEE o ermal i mj Rename this folder Pomat i Give the folder Figure 10 25 B mS z D or drive a name __ Program Files Temp WINDOWS User limit Maximum Fh 7 D Copy this folder O nor TG x to identify it on The Sharing tab of the Pubish this folder to the network Folder Properties dialog Ge sharg this folde letania Aiara G E m _his folder s files Specify box JK Delete this folder gO nai permissions for the shared drive Figure 10 26 g Figure 10 24 Share a folder by selecting the i Specify how files The Sharing tab of the ae en n erator i my within this Printer Properties dialog shared folder ie Folder Tasks panel are to be cached HP LaserJet Properties when made Device Settings Printer Commands Font Selection General Sharing Ports Advanced Security by others WA You can share this printer with other users on your network To ga enable sharing for this printer click Share this printer Do not share this printer Q P i Specify if the printer is shared or not W Shere name HP LaserJet Give the printer a name to identify it on the network SN bd List in the directory WR Drivers ff this printer is shared with users runni op versions of dite do Windows you may want to inst rs so that the users do not have to find the p
253. ent folder and is placed in the Deleted Items folder OF 9 32 can forward a message 8 Forward Forward Message button Quick Reference To Forward a Message 1 Find and select the message you want to forward and click the Forward Message button on the toolbar 2 Enter the recipient s e mail address in the To field 3 Optional Enter your own comments in the message body area 4 Click the Send button on the toolbar To Delete a Message e Select the message you want to delete and press the lt Delete gt key Your Organization s Name Here 270 Microsoft Windows XP Chapter Nine Review Lesson Summary Introduction to the Internet AS e The Internet is the largest computer network in the world with niione Aor all over the world connected to each other e Web pages are stored on Web servers which are always cong the Internet so that people can view their Web pages 24 hours a day e Some of things you can do using Internet include sendin en e mail browsing the World Wide Web posting and reading newsgroup message g with other Internet users and downloading software e To connect to the Internet you need an Int ervice Provider ISP a Web browser program and a phone line and modem or other cagn tion to the Internet e To Connect to the Internet ef the 2 Internet Explorer icon on the desktop or click Connecting to the Internet the Internet Explorer icon
254. enu Tiles modified E A 5 Select View gt Details from the menu LIS You can sort items in a variety of ways alphabetically by name by size or even by the date they were last modified or saved If you re in Details view all you have to do to Other Ways to Change sort the items is click the heading for the column you want to use Views Click the Name heading to sort the items by name Details a e Select a view from the View button list arrow on the toolbar The list is sorted alphabetically by name Clicking the heading again sorts the items in reverse order Z A 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 107 7 Select View gt Icons from the menu You can have Windows arrange and organize items so they appear in neat columns and rows instead of a cluttered mess 8 Select View gt Arrange Icons by gt Auto Arrange from the menu A check mark Y appears by Auto Arrange when this feature is on You can skip step 8 if Auto Arrange already has a check mark Now whenever you change the size of a window or add move or delete a file Windows will automatically rearrange the items 9 Select View gt Arrange Icons by gt Name from the menu The list is sorted alphabetically by name dress c Practice Bb p J w E Accounting Trade Show CARBRAKE Open Me Paris H Seniors Homework 3 Canada Current Meeting Memo Budg
255. er but you AS personalize the other settings such as the wallpaper and system sounds True The double click speed is probably one of th yov re having trouble double clicking with the se ings you should adjust if C Windows XP lets you view and work wit omputer in Web style and Classic style something Windows 95 didn t offer SS you installed Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 or later False Right click the desktop and sel perties from the shortcut menu to open the Display Properties dialog box G 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Seven The Chapter Objectives Learn about WordPad O Learn about NotePad O Learn about the Calculator Qy Learn about the Sound Recorder 4 Learn about Paint and create a picture Learn about the games V Learn about Character Map Learn how to use the new Window 1 dia player Learn how to use Windows lt lt a Windows XP doesn t really do much by its if you need to run a program whenever you want to do something with your conggut You don t have to rush off to the local computer store to buy a software program to u type a letter or paint a picture because Microsoft has included a handful of small seful programs with Windows XP You can find most of these programs such as W Paint Note and Calculator in the Accessories group of the Start Menu This chapter explores th rams that Microsoft tossed into the Accessories menu You ll learn what all the
256. er the name of the General Sharing Security Customize user account or group j Yi hare this folder with oth n The Folder Properties k a h Da Mi ce Share the you want to select folder dialog box Figure 10 28 The Select Users or Select Users or Groups Do not share this folder P a this folder Sdlect this object type Sh re name Database Comment Groups dialog box a p 9 Allow this number of users pigune 2O e7 Neen eer rot Click to o configure settings for INE access cilici chan e The Advanced Select n a see A _ Users or Groups dialog fora shared Fiqure 2 28 or click Advanced to box folder search for the user account and or group Figure 10 30 Figure 10 27 The Permissions dialog Select Users or Groups box Select this object type Share Permissions Users Groups or Builtin secunty principals SSS SSE i 7 Group or user names From this location r 4 JONLAPTOP PP Everyone Jon JONLAPTOP Jon Select a user or SN Common Queries group or click Add Permissions for Jon to add a user or Full Control group to the Change list Read mand then Name RDN grant or deny Q m the permissions ministrators 2 ANONYMOUS LOGON to the user or E Authenticated Users os oe BATCH 6 Figure 10 30 Yo yecify which particular users can access your shared folders and or printer
257. er until you find it 3 Con and hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to the gt ight 1 inch to move the window border Notice that the window stretches as you drag the mouse When the window is the size you want you can release the mouse button K Release the mouse button KY The window is displayed in its new size 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Two Working with a Window 43 This lesson explained how to resize a window by adjusting the right border of a window but you can change a window s size by dragging its left top and bottom borders You can also resize a window by dragging its corners just like you drag its borders Quick Reference lt To Change a Window s Size 1 Point at the window s amp borders or corners until Oo the pointer changes to a double arrow like Yor 2 Click and hold down the X mouse button and drag the border or corner to a new location until the Oo window is the size you want Your Organization s Name Here 44 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 2 7 Switching Between Windows Figure 2 13 as Click any part of a vina yr to You can only work in one nee NEON window at a time Notice Ir that WordPad appears in p o Bie front of all other windows and has a blue title bar Figure 2 14 Click any part of the Calculator window or its button on the taskbar so For Heb ress that it appears in front of ope
258. ers and many ore In this lesson you will learn how to insert special symbols with the Charac p program 1 Click the Start button and select All Programs ccessories gt WordPad Now open Character Map to insert a special characte o the WordPad document 2 Click the Start button and select All Pro s Accessories gt System Tools Character Map The Character Map program appears as s Figure 7 12 NOTE The Character Map program gays installed with Windows XP If you can t find the Character Map am in the Accessories menu it may not Quick Reference have been installed You c all Character Map by opening the Control Panel and choosing Ad emove Programs gt Add Remove Windows To Open Character Map Components Acceggories and Utilities Details button gt Accessories e Click the Start button and Details button N e Character Map and clicking OK select All Programs gt 3 Find and double clic symbol Accessories gt System Emphasize the word Tools Character Map tiny symbol befor 4 Click Copy The symb 5 Switch KN The 6 iy Table 7 8 Character Map Description Program that allows you to insert special characters into programs ause you ll probably spend a few minutes looking for the ind it en copied to the Windows clipboard Pad and click the Paste button is pasted into the WordPad document the WordPad and Character Map programs
259. ers Two controls on this toolbar are particularly helpful Practice e Lookin Look In List Click to list the drives on your computer and the current folder then select the drive and or folder whose contents you want to display 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Working with a Windows Program 19 i Up One Level button Click to move up one folder If necessary follow your instructor s directions to select the appropriate drive and folder where your practice files are located The Open dialog box reads the contents of the practice folder or disk and displays any Word for Windows doc files Here s how you can view all the file types in the root directory on the drive not just Word for Windows files 4 Click the File of type list and select All Documents The Open dialog box is updated to display all the files in the root directory of the floppy disk 5 Double click the Canada Meeting Memo file to open it WordPad opens the Canada Meeting Memo file Normally when you save an LO file it s saved with its original file name in its original location or folder There a times however when you will need to save a copy of a file in a new location different file name or in a different file format W 6 Select File Save As from the menu A The Save As dialog box appears Whenever you save or store files on a computer try to save them in ed folder For example you m
260. erver network 00000000002 276 COMPONCIIS eio 217 peer to peer network 0 276 printers network csseeeeeeeees 282 NotePad program ccc0ceeeeseeeeeees 181 O opening Y TCG SEEE T 0 8 files in PrOgramMS cceeeeeee eee 62 LONGETS i My Computer Outlook Express address book adding s 264 address book se AMES 262 attaching ic AENA 263 COMPOSING MESSABES 00000000 262 deleting 269 261 amp ESEE Qereereereereereereererereereee folders ER E E N EE int Page Down Key cc0 oe eee 27 PASU PREY gute ne ate ante tre mee ate Neen ee re er 21 PAD etai A ea teste nee ie 184 186 LOOMS isatyae ile aestie da senataecs ulaame secant 185 paragraph alignment 73 parallel POM 2c neue eee 224 password CHANG Ne Ges 288 Paste commandair a s 68 pasting TUL A EE E EE TAE AAN 100 TIIE e ays 96 text and information 00000000000000 68 patches downloading 00000000000522 258 OAM AE A E E EE TA E T 104 peer to peer network cccceeeeeees 276 permissions shared folders and pyigiOPRy 292 pictures creating with Pag A EEI 186 saving from DOCS enta 258 using as WAART o ae 158 pointer speed Sia EI A ET 169 pointe a E E A E E E 20 tr Wia E E EE T ee 169 PISS digpla yorni see ties ke 169 Print Dialog bOX tacseionei eas 67 printers default changing 22
261. ery printer Xl Delete this printer Delete Speed 16 ppm lt i as Set printer properties Rename depending on the printer s ew features n aA Partin reee Figure 8 25 C O change those settings for your printer 7 re 8 26 Clicking a tab lets you view and ttings on your printer For example perhaps you our computer and want to change the default age of some of your printer s more advanced features nt to look at your printer s settings to find out what s Sometimes you may want to tweak t TS have more than one printer connec Default Printer printer Maybe you want to take or are having trouble printing W how to change which printer your computer uses as the wrong This lesson will sh default printer where Ha Se prints everything unless you specify otherwise and how Quick Reference to view and change the It settings for your printer To Change the Default 1 Click the Printer Hardwar utton and select Control Panel Printers and Other rinters and Faxes 1 a i dle folder The Prinferg window appears Pacang He giar 2 Rig k the printer you want to set as your new default printer and button and select Control i ge et as Default Printer from the shortcut menu Panel Printers and efault printer displays a black checkmark Any documents you print will now ent to the default printer Other Hardware Printers and Faxes QF 2 Right click the desired printer and s
262. es WordPad EXE Figure 4 21 2 Share this folder Details Paris bmp Practice File Folder Date Modified Monday November 26 2001 9 02 AM Figure 4 20 In this lesson we Ntake a break from all that pointing clicking dropping and dragging and take a closer lo k at files When you re viewing the contents of your computer you ve probably alr ffoticed that everything has its own picture or icon to represent what it is Except fo exceptions folder icons always look like little manila folders _ Files on the othe come in a variety of types and icons WY parts to every file the file name which you ve already seen and are familiar the file extension a three letter extension that tells Windows what type of file it is igure 4 19 Since Windows assigns pictures or icons to the types of files it recognizes rmally hides these file extensions from view Whenever you open a file by double Ther picking it Windows automatically opens the file in the program it knows created the file For example Microsoft Word always adds the file extension DOC to its files so when you double click a DOC file Windows knows it has to open the file in Microsoft Word Another file and folder related term you might hear is path A path is the drive and folder s where a file or folder is located think of it as a street address A path contains the drive letter followed by a colon followed by any folders which must be separated
263. es the folder is locked and cannot be modifigd or deleted D Holding down the lt Ctrl gt k ile you re dragging and dropping something copies it instead of moving it ion by dragging and dropping it O licking it pressing the lt Delete gt key and confirming the del True or False Do this tos GVuitipte files and folders Select all that apply A Click an a rectangle around any adjacent files you want to select B Select Gile gt Select Multiple Files from the menu and then click the files you want to s e C SN first file you want to select press and hold down the lt Shift gt key and click e st file you want to select laa d down the lt Ctrl gt key and click the files you want to select Bis of the following statements is NOT true Select all that apply A You can find a file on your computer by clicking the Start button selecting Search enter what you want to search for using the Search Companion and click Search B Open Windows Explorer by clicking the Start button and selecting All Programs gt Windows Explorer C To save a file in a location other than the program s default folder you have to save the file then use My Computer or Windows Explorer to move the file to the desired location You can display the contents of a drive or folder using Thumbnails Tiles Icons List or Details View z 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 1 25 14
264. escecesessecessecesseecsseesseeeesees 275 Lesson 10 1 Introduction to Netw Ork Svc idedivsicaceiceeuicnvsod indict A ENE EEEE 276 Lesson 10 2 Browsing the Network arerio nerne tea E E ee een cannes 278 Lesson 10 3 Mapping a Network DIVE sacarina en e a a a iaaa 280 Lesson 10 4 Connecting to a Network Printer oii c onthoitisevsetssetivtaddesanediedelaiseteoodiatenirts 282 Lesom 1025 Creating a New Usein ats E E A EEN 284 Lesson 10 6 Logging Off Windows uu ccccccscsccecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeess 286 Lesson 10 7 Logging On To Windows cccccccssssssccecceeeeeecceceeececeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 287 Your Organization s Name Here 6 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 10 8 Changing Your Password cccccccccssssscccccccccececccceeeceeeeeeeeceeeesesesseeeesseeeseeess 288 Lesson 10 9 Sharing Your Files and Printer on the Network cccccccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 290 Lesson 10 10 Changing Access Permissions to a Shared Folder ccccccccccccecceseeeeeees 292 Lesson 10 11 Specifying Security Options to a Shared Folder ccessceeeeeeeeeees 294 Chapter TEM RE VIC W manie aena a E E a nia a 296 TRAE X ae a E ern meen ae 301 2001 CustomGuide com Introduction RN lt Welcome to CustomGuide Microsoft Windows XP CustomGuide is a unique produc amp allows organizations to create and print customized learning references Each Sai So ide contains specific lessons chosen by th
265. esktop e Right click any blank area amp of the taskbar usually Oo near the clock and select S either Tile Windows Horizontally or Tile Windows Vertically from the shortcut menu QY To Cascade Windows on A the Desktop KY e Right click any blank area of the taskbar usually near the clock and select Cascade Windows from the shortcut menu Your Organization s Name Here 48 Microsoft Windows XP Chapter Two Review Lesson Summary N Starting a Program e Start a program by clicking the Start button clicking the All Progra clicking the menu and any submenus where the program you want to run is located ing the name of the program you want to run A Understanding the Parts of a Window e Be able to identify a window s title bar menu rina Die and close buttons Minimizing Maximizing and Restori Window e Maximize a window so that it fills the entire s y clicking its Maximize button or by double clicking its title bar O e Restore a window to its previous size re its Restore button or by double clicking its title bar e Minimize a window so that it oars as an icon on the taskbar by clicking the window s Minimize button e Restore a minimized win licking its icon on the taskbar Closing a Windo AN e Close a wind ing its Close button or by pressing lt Alt gt lt F4 gt e Close all opgn windows by holding down the lt Shift gt key while you click the Close button of
266. estarts your computer Use this option if Window tg your Windows based programs start acting flaky You often ney restart your computer after installing new Quick Reference software To Shut Down Windows Log Off As This option appeers only if your computer is connected to a network 1 Save any files you ve This optign clases all your programs and disconnects your computer i been working on and exit work preparing your computer to be used by someone else all your programs 2 Click the Start button and select Shut Down 3 Select the Shut Down option and click OK Your Organization s Name Here 30 Microsoft Windows XP Chapter One Review Lesson Summary A Look at Windows XP and What s New AS e Be able to define and operating system S Starting and Logging On to Windows O e To Start Windows XP Turn on your computer Enter your cr and password and then click OK S screen Understanding the Windows XP Scr aN e Be able to identify the main components of o Using the Mouse Pointing 4 and Double clicking e Point Move the mouse so that the point is over the object e Click Point to the object and x Py crease the left mouse button e Double click Point to the objec click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession Using the Mouse D Sur the object you want to drag and drop and click and hold down the re still holding down the mouse button drag the object to the desired
267. et Address c Practice J Accounting J Trade Show ARBRA a eo Address C Practice IE Accounting Trade Show e CARBRAKE B Open Me Paris B Seniors BP Homework 3 al Canada Meeting Memo ual Current Budget Address C Practice Name o Accounting Trade Show 4 CARBRAKE B Open Me Paris E Seniors W Homework 3 Size Type File Folder File Folder 14KB wav file 1KB Text Document 62KB Bitmap Image 12 s 1m 1 1999 12 35 PM 2KB Text Docume 5KB Microsoft Word n 9 1999 10 03 AN W canada Meeting Memo 19KB Microsoft Woggiliwecu 1 28 2001 11 17 AN lt gt Details 1999 11 35 AN 2 2672 Address B C Practice 5 Accounting Thumbnails ai Trade Show Files and folders are displayed as icons This is a Gaga for when you re learning how to use Windowsegr have trouble clicking a file with the mouse Oo Files and folders are displaye information The type and si right of the icon Files ar gfolders are displayed as small icons in a list This isag ault view because it allows you to see as m as possible Displays information about every file and folder such as its name size type and when it was last modified is displayed You can change the order the list is sorted by clicking the column headings Thumbnails view is useful if you are working with pictures and graphics because it previews every g
268. ew Password ce you to periodically change your Windows log on password it s still a good idea to e passwords every once in a while for security purposes How often should you e your password That s something you ll have to determine If you re working on iin or confidential files you should probably change their password every few weeks Q inerwise you re probably safe changing your log on password once every few months As you ve probably already guessed this lesson explains how to change your Windows log on KY password Pressing lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt lt Delete gt also lets you 1 Press lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt lt Delete gt see which user account The Windows XP Security dialog box appears as shown in Figure 10 22 1S CUrren Ny roggen 2 Click the Change Password button onto your computer o The Change Password dialog box appears as shown in Figure 10 23 displaying your user name and domain that you are logged on to The first thing you need to do is tell Windows XP what your old password is 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Ten Networking with Windows XP 289 3 Type your old password in the Old Password box and press the lt Tab gt key Now give yourself a new password 4 Type your new password in the New Password box press lt Tab gt and type your new password again in the Confirm New Password box NOTE You re probably heard this before but when you pick a password don t use
269. ey Courtney will be your tour guide Kick back and let her do the driving lt Catch a wave with Earl He ll help you find what you need 1 Microsoft Windows XP Help 2001 Microsoft Corporation A QO Quick Reference lt To Change the Search Companion character e 1 Click the character and click Choose a different e Oo animated character from the shortcut menu Yor 2 Click the Next or Back X buttons until you find a character you like then click OK To Hide the character Click the character and click Turn off animated character from the shortcut menu rs Your Organization s Name Here 1 14 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 4 14 Using the Folders Pane Windows Explorer Figure 4 33 The Windows Explorer window My Documents File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Click the Folders button to display hide the Folders pane To display the contents of a folder or drive click the name of the folder or drive Figure 4 33 Bia Accounting A plus symbol H next to a folder indicates that all the subfolders it contains are hidden Click the plus symbol to display the hidden xX gd Adobe qa My Document fog My eBooks gAmy Music W damy Pictures JMy Vigae fa My eBooks GA My Music gE My Pictures eha progress W joment figure 6 10 right Figure 6 10 800 step 2 defragment Untitled BP wordpad gi My Webs Ez iy My Computer a My Network P
270. f the R escribed in Table 4 3 File and er Tasks Other Places 3 My Computer B My Documents a My Network Places Figure 4 8 Hard Disk C File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q Back 7 Search Key Folders E z C A CSS System Tasks File and Folder Tasks Rename this folder CI f Move this folder Program Files T WINDOWS Copy this folder Ua Publish this folder to the Web EZ Share this folder Ww A E mail this folder s files Oo XX Delete this folder i Other Places x File and Folder Tasks x a e bh amp A Make a new folder Figure 4 9 gk Publish this folder to the Web E Share this folder Windogys komes with the My Documents folder which you can use to save your files in but s ae later you ll want to expand your horizons and create your own folders inside the File and Folder My n ents folder or on the network to help you better organize your files This lesson Tasks panel wi w you how to create a new folder to hold and organize your files You ll also learn Other Ways to Create a o rename an existing folder Folder e Right click on an empty Or Click the Start button and select the My Computer icon area of the C drive The My Computer window appears after you click the My Computer icon window and select 2 Click the Local Disk C icon New Folder from the shortcut menu The contents of the C drive appear New to Windo
271. f the document You ve just learned how to insert text in a document pretty easy huh 5 Move the insertion point immediately after the word extremely in the first body paragraph Here you need to delete some text delete the word extremely 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Working with a Windows Program 61 10 Press the lt Backspace gt key several times until the word extremely is deleted The Backspace key deletes one space to the left backwards of the insertion point come Type very aa just deleted the word extremely and inserted the word very to take its The lt Backspace gt key place deletes one space to You can also use the mouse to move the insertion point instead of the arrow keys the left or behind Simply move the i pointer where you want to place the insertion point with the mouse O insertion point and click c Click immediately after the word August in the sentence That was in August and we re still stuck together with the ji pointer The insertion point appears immediately after the word August right where yo NA Di a clicked the mouse button Delete You can also use the Delete key to delete text Like the Backspace key the Ay 4 also deletes text but in a slightly different way The Backspace key deletes text efore The lt Delete gt ke or to the eft of the insertion point while the Delete key deletes text after io the rig
272. f the most famous Internet Service Provider America Online or AOL the Windows Quick e A Web Browser A Web browser is a program that lets your computer view and Launch toolbar navigate the World Wide Web One of the biggest improvements in Windows XP is that it comes with a built in Web browser Internet Explorer Another Web browsing program that is very popular is Netscape Navigator 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Nine Exploring the Internet 247 e A Phone Line and Modem or Other Connection A modem is your computer s very own telephone that lets it talk to other computers over the telephone line Your existing phone line will work just fine with your modem although it will be tied up This icon appears on whenever you re connected to the Internet If you or someone in your home is a heavy the taskbar whenever Internet user you might consider getting a second phone line for your computer If you have the Internet at work you might have a network connection to the Internet which is much much faster than a modem and is connected to the Internet 24 hours a day ma 3 31PM your computer is connected to the Internet via modem 1 Double click the Start menu and then click Internet Explorer to start i wih 3 35PM Point to the icon and wait a few seconds to see what your connection speed to Internet Explorer a If you have America Online you would double click the America Online icon instead O If y
273. f the screen to display a hidden taskbar k B C You can position bar so that it floats in the middle of the screen D You can accide change the size of the taskbar so that it disappears almost i aden e screen in which case you will need to resize it Your Organization s Name Here 146 Microsoft Windows XP You can adjust your computer s volume by going to Start All Programs Accessories Entertainment Volume and dragging the slide control up or down True or False Which of the following statements is NOT true Select all that apply You can t add or remove programs from the Start menu Most programs add themselves to the Start menu s Programs menu Deleting a program from the Start menu deletes the program from y ocal disk You can open recently used documents by clicking the Start butto ing Documents and selecting the file you want to open COWS You can create rename delete and move folders an Kin the Start menu just like you would in aR A Windows Explorer lt B WordPad W C A Macintosh computer lt D The taskbar O You know a program is installed on y computer but for some reason you can t find it in the Start menu Homan you start the program Select all that apply A Click the Start button select Run Hire Browse button find and double click the file B Open My Computer find the file double click it C Open Windows Explorer fi e file and d
274. find Web pages on topics that interest you There are many search A engines available on the Internet you ve probably heard of some of the more popular ones KY like Yahoo Excite and HotBot In this lesson you ll learn how you can search the Web to find information on the topics you specify pe Search z 1 Make sure your Web browser is open so you are connected to the Search button Internet 2 Click the Search button on the toolbar A Search pane appears on the left side of Internet Explorer as shown in Figure 9 10 This is where you specify what you want to search for 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Nine Exploring the Internet 253 Table 9 2 Popular Search Engines on the t Web Address Click the Search box and type in the word or phrase you want to search for For better search results use complete sentences or several keywords that describe what you re looking for For example typing Where can I find a good oyster restaurant in Chicago would yield better results than simply oysters Click Search What are you looking for l l Type your question below For The Security Alert dialog box may appear it appears any time you send information ree eras pac tEe over the Internet unless you check the In the future do not show the warning check box If it does you can safely click OK Microsoft Internet Explorer returns a list of Web pages ranked by relevance that contain the word or phr
275. folder the folder does not contain any subfolders although it may still The mouse pointer changes shapes over a border Quick Reference To Display the Folders Pane Windows Explorer e Open My Computer and click the Folders button on the toolbar To View the Contents of a Drive or Folder e Click the drive or folder in the left folder pane the contents of that drive or folder will appear in the right pane To Display or Hide a Drive or Folder s Subfolders e Click plus symbol to display any hidden subfolders click the minus symbol to hide any subfolders To Adjust the Size of Windows Explorer s Panes e Drag the bar separating the two panes to the right or left Your Organization s Name Here 1 1 6 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 4 15 File Management Using the Folders Pane e Practice Figure 4 34 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help You can move and copy Qa BP search rotders E files using drag and drop Address C Practice Practice in Windows Explorer Folders ee contng F Trade Show Ss Local Disk C C 7 W canada Meeting Memo C CustomGuide C Desktop Documents and Settings 3 My Music Homework 3 Open Me S Practice Y Paris O Practice Seniors B Accounting amp JCARRAKI 1997 O 1998 gt 1999 2000 D 2001 Trade Show E Mi Pronram Files Figure 4 34 In this lesson you ll
276. folder or printer and what kind of access t To Change Permissions to a Shared Folder or Painter Make sure that you are logged on to Windows XP with a user account that has admini privileges Find and select the drive or folder you want to share and click ka Share thGigider from the File and Folder Tasks panel and click Permissions lf the user account or group you want Re permissions to isn t listed click Add If you don t know the exact name of the user acgepat s or group s click Advanced to open the Advanced Select Users or Groups dialog bo ick Find Now to browse all available user accounts and groups Select the user accoun roup s and click OK OK when you re finished lf the user account or gr want to assign permissions to is listed select the group or user account whose scarica want to modify and then check or uncheck the permissions you want to grant or deny at for all the groups and or user accounts There are sever of access No Access annot see the shared folder Read s Us rs can open but not change or delete files in the folder Change sers can open create change move and delete files in the folder Full Co Users can open create change move and delete files in the folder and may O also be able to share folders and change permissions ing Security Options to a Shared Folder account that has administrative privileges Find and select the drive or folder you want to share and click ke Share
277. fter the word table so that the text box 2gs Save File Then click Display Both the words and topics lists are updated and display contain both the words Save and File in them Q Double click the WordPad Overview topic Windows displays the WordPad Overview help t 10 Click the Close button to close the O During your journey with Windows you w ably come across dialog boxes with a number of confusing controls and opti To help you find out what the various controls and options in a dialog box d ka N dialog boxes contain a What s This button located right next to the cl Q the menu 11 Select Format gt Paragrap The Paragraph dialog box appe rs Notice the Help button located in the dialog box s title bar just to the left of th g box s close button 12 Click the What s reper The mouse pointer cig oa R indicating you can point to anything on the dialog box to find out A s as shown in Figure 3 30 13 Click the Alig t combo box A window ap ose help topics that ialog box ith a brief description of what the Alignment combo box does close the Paragraph dialog box 14 Click caq That s it y e learning the various ways to get help in Windows If you know how to use a pro hye feature you may never need to attend another computer class everything you feed to know is there buried somewhere in Help Make yourself a promise that the next time you have a question about how to
278. g and right click Browse and search the Web e How to start programs Add Web pages to Favorites in the Start Menu e How to use menus toolbars and dialog boxes Change your Home page Display a history of visited Web Download pictures and softwar Use e mail Unless you ve been living on a dese Si ggland for the past five years you already know that the Internet is the biggest thing to res to computers since well computers You can t ignore 1t the Internet is not go ig way and it s already changing the world we live in Fortunately for the most Page ternet is incredibly easy to use Even the most computer phobic users see el right at home on the Internet This chapter explains AY nd outs of the Internet If you ve ever spent a sleepless night wondering exactly Internet is and how it got started you ll finally learn it all Then you ll learn how oa computer connected to the Internet and how to surf the Web using the Mies nternet Explorer You ll also learn some useful tips like how to search for informati to save your favorite Web pages so that you can easily come back to them later Kip to change the Web page that first appears when you connect to the Internet Finally you ll learn how to download software and send and receive e mail 244 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 9 1 The Internet is the largest network in the world consisting of millions of computers all over the world all connected
279. g at its best possible performance Cars require 4 ance to keep them running at their peak performance Some car This chapter explains how to optimize and maintain your computer You ll learn how to find and correct problems on your computer s hard disk install and remove software backup and restore your important files add new hardware to your computer and a lot more 208 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 8 1 Formatting a Floppy Disk Figure 8 1 Format 31 Floppy A Capacity The Format 3 Floppy 3 5 1 44MB 512 bytes sector dialog box File system FAT amp Allocation unit size Quick erase af Default allocation size Erases all information e disk but doesn t Vohene label scan the disk for da areas Only works on disks that have ly been formatted Format option Create an MS DOS startup disk Enable Com sion Formats NEY e so that folders and files on it are compre mpression is supported only on NTFS driv MS DOS startup disk Open Start Pre having problems with your computer use a Explore stp disk to help remedy your problems Search Figure 8 1 Sharing and Security SNe Before you can use a floppy disk you muSt ormat it so that you can save information on it Copy Disk You can also format a disk to erase a es that are saved on it and prepare it for new files You can save yourself a lot of ti ying pre formatted disks just make sure they are a
280. g software designed for a network geographic area or building using cables Local Area Networks are what most people think of when they think of a network and what we l be discussing throughout the chapter e Wide Area Networks WAN A network that connects computers across a large gt geographic area using telephone lines or satellites The Internet is actually a a J Area Network Twisted Pair cable There are two basic types of networks e Local Area Networks LAN A network that connects computers in the same Local Area Networks LANs are subdivided into two types of network subcate peer to peer and client server as shown in Figure 10 2 and Figure 10 3 e Peer to Peer Network In a peer to peer network everyone stores theMfiles on their own computer and anyone on the network can access files stored o other computer Because you don t need any additional software peer to peer net gis an inexpensive way to connect computers in a small office or home disadvantages of a peer to peer network are that it doesn t offer as much securit ient server networks and it can be difficult to find files that are stored on many nt computers Both version of Windows XP Home and Professional support P er to peer networking e Client Server Network In a client server network men stores their files on a central computer called a server Everyone on the can access the files stored on the server
281. ge the day just click the day you want AS 5 Click on day 1 in the calendar to change the date to January 1 amp If you use a laptop you may need to adjust which time zone you re in You IS using the Time Zone tab of the Date Time Properties dialog box 6 Click the Time Zone tab lt The Time Zone tab appears in the front of the dialog box as shown 4O 6 6 You can click the Time Zone list arrow to select your current time zone fr list of all available time zones Also note the Automatically adjust clock ylight savings changes box When this box is checked Windows will automa adjust your computer s clock when daylight saving time changes so you e one less clock to change 7 Click Cancel to close the Date Time Properties ao applying the date and time changes you ve Gy The built in clock in your computer should keep track computer is turned off If your computer doesn t keep th is probably something wrong with your computer s ia A O gt O Re N K amp g box without e and time even when your per time and date it means there ait in clock Quick Reference To Display the Current Date e Point at the clock on the taskbar for several seconds To Change the Date and or Time 1 Double click the clock on the taskbar 2 Adjust the date and time using the calendar and clock controls as shown in Figure 6 5 and click OK To Change Time Zones 1 Double click
282. getting that bonus for free you have to buy Plus for Windows XP to install extra themes games and digital media Microsoft must have some pretty high lawyer s fees 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Six Customizing Windows 167 Select Exit Windows in the Program events list You can listen to the sound that is currently assigned to any event by selecting the event and then clicking the triangular play button between the Sounds drop down list and the Browse button in the dialog box The sound assigned to the Exit Windows event if one is assigned appears in the Sounds box Click the Play button to the right of the Sounds box to listen to the sound assigned to the Exit Windows event to it you can check this by looking at the Sounds list your computer doesn t have a soundcard and or speakers the volume is turned off or the soundcard drivers are not installed correctly If you don t hear a sound either the Exit Windows event doesn t have a sound assigned To assign a different event to the selected sound click the Browse button to see amp sound Click the Browse button so d A Browse window appears as shown in Figure 6 21 Select the location an r the sound you want to hear every time the selected event occurs Double click Start Windows The Start Windows sound is now assigned to the Exit Windows event u can listen to Start Windows by clicking the triangular play button at the botto t corner of the
283. ght or left Refer to Table 6 6 Mouse Pointer Options for more informa Now that you understand how to adjust the mouse to your likin can close the Mouse Properties dialog box to end the lesson 6 Click Cancel to close the Mouse Properties dialo without saving your changes Table 6 6 Mouse Pointer Options G Description Adjusts the distance that tha pointe moves respective to the distance that the mouse or trackball moves ample to move your pointer across the width of your screen you ne d ve your device further when the slider bar is set to Slow than when itgi eaam io Fast Select a pointer speed Automatically move pointer to the default button in a dialog box Visibility Specifies wheter Wwe mouse pointer snaps to the default button such as OK or Apply in di Oxes In some programs Snap To may cause the pointer to automat ve to the center of the dialog box rather than to the default Display pointer trails ha a trail to the mouse pointer which makes it easier to see on Liquid Crystal ueeplay LCD screens To change the length of the pointer trail drag the slider The slider is dimmed until the check box is selected Hide pointer wr 7 Hides the pointer when you type The pointer reappears when you move the typing mouse or trackball Show location of the Shows the location of the mouse pointer when you press the CTRL key pointer when press the CTRL key Double click Test Area Quick Referenc
284. gless 1 ith a period in front of them B File extensions C Types of advanc rees in computers D How confusin uters are 5 Which progr can you use to view and manage the contents of your computer ct all that apply A N Navigator B My puter C System Sleuth D Windows Explorer Your Organization s Name Here 1 24 Microsoft Windows XP 10 N xo amp Delete a file or folder You open a file or folder by double clicking it True or False Do this to display the contents of a certain drive or folder A Right click the drive or folder B Click the drive or folder while holding down the lt Alt gt key C Double click the drive or folder D Triple click the drive or folder To view an object s properties right click the object and se ODpporties from the shortcut menu True or False A this to move back When you re browsing the contents of your compute or up to the previous level or folder Select all mee B Click the Back button on the toolbar N C Press lt Ctrl gt lt Z gt D Click the Address Bar on the toolbar and RO ironia drive or folder A Click the Up button on the toolbar Which of the following statements is true A Youcan move a file or folder to a ne B You can rename a file or folder by m icking it selecting Rename from the shortcut menu typing the new n pressing lt Enter gt C Aplus symbol next to a fol Windows Explorer indicat
285. group of Mee want to select 6 Click the Carbrake file to select it press and hold the lt S Ka as you click the Paris file You ve selected the Carbrake file the Paris file and all the files Aye in between the two 7 Click any empty area of the screen to deselect the fj To select random or non adjacent files and folders hold click each item you want to select 8 Click the Carbrake file to select it ogee down the lt Ctrl gt key e lt Ctrl gt key and then click Paris file and the Trade Show fol release the lt Ctrl gt key Remember you can move copy or delete any sele d files all at once Holding down the lt Ctrl gt key also lets you click and deselec selected files Q With the files still selected click ando one of the selected files the Carbrake or Paris files or the Tade Show folder from the folder window to the desktop The selected files are copied to t 10 With the newly copied files st lt Delete gt key af The selected files are all i Miom the desktop To select all the files aN rs in the window select Edit gt Select All from the menu 11 Select Edit gt S All from the menu All the files Wr are selected 12 Close the w to end this lesson e op elected on the desktop press the Ss Other Ways to move or copy a file e Click the file to select it click Edit and select Move to or Copy to from the menu re ight click the file and sele
286. gs you want to record 2 Click the Copy Music button You can find the recorded songs by clicking the Media Library tab To View an Audio Visualization e Click the Now Playing tab Click the oO buttons to change the visualization Your Organization s Name Here 192 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 7 15 The Windows Media Guide tab allows you to access news and entertainment media on the Internet Windows Media Player icon Quick Reference To Open the Media Guide e Start the Windows Media Player and click on the Media Guide tab To Choose a Connection Speed 1 Find out what your Internet Connection is 2 Depending on what type of connection you have choose your speed Modem 28k or 56k ISDN 100k DSL 300k or 500k SS LO Lesson 7 10 Using the Media Guide in Windows Media Player Windows Media Player File View Play Tools Help HAR m f PR FROM YOU YOURFA FAVO j afa i CROSSROADS M wll a y the straight A student bu fa WindowsMedia com Now Playing Media Guide amp iH Watch Mi ea zggs to ABC to 56k 100k Se 300k a Copy from CD i Videos Dovmloads 56 ee 300k Fa T E Shom Cust ia Naked c attractio Media Library Entertainment Games gt Lifestyles Radio Tuner Copy to CD or Device ookin for 56k Boats International New World Recor Jill Sobule S WindovsMedia Gear M
287. gure 7 23 Media Player Storyboard The storyboard is a successi You can edit your video by making your saved video clips Q movie on your Windows Q from the storyboard and rearrange them in order to of your Windows Movie Maker In this lesson we are_goin to add clips and remove clips 1 Open Windows Movie Maker by All Programs Accessories The Windows Movie Maker Ap In the Collections window c you want to access Now let s choose some vid Qs Click a video clip KO want to add to your Add To Storyiaagn Timeline The video clip app i To remove a cli Click the vi ip in the storyboard that you the button D The cl med from the storyboard but not from y let s e the clips 2 the next step a new location on the storyboard The video clip appears in its new location Save your project to a location when you are done editing the storyboard j Seeeeee eee i Fas eenen nnnnnnnns the storyboard Repeat steps 1 3 to keep adding more clips Place thie mouse pointer over the video clip on the storyboard that you want to move then hold down the left mouse button and drag the clip to OF 7 23 can add clips to the storyboard i The storyboard is used with video files If you are working with an audio file a timeline will take the place of the storyboard at the bottom of your Movie Maker window asoan x s gt lips and is located at
288. gure 9 10 Enter a word or phrase you want to here and click Search 4 Yahoo Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q ax amp x E A P Search Jg Favorites Pedia L2 o Address sy http www yahoo com Finance Tere Check Email www jonhigh com Pai Print at Home Build Your Own Web Site i CLIC LE Yahoo Coupons T Enter a word or phrase e eee you want to search for See Autos 2002 Car Guide GeR uote Sell Your Car Blue Book Pricing Classifieds Auctions here and click search Shop Auctions Autos Classifieds f opp Travel Yellow Pgs Maps Media Finance Quotes News Sports Weather Connect Careers Chat Clubs iN etings Mail Members Messenger Mobile Personals People Search Photos Personal Addr Book Briefcase adar Iv Yahoo PayDirect Fun Games Kids Movies Music Radio TV more Make a Con D gion with Yahoo Personals In the News z ng a Woman _ Pakistan bans terror groups Singapore seeks more al Qaida Jury finds hockey dad guilty Astronomers Cosmos is green Figure skating championships more Banc n ntnnn ernet s greatest strength is also its greatest weakness with so much information y millions of Web pages it can be extremely difficult to find what you re looking for unately there are many search engines that catalog the millions of Web pages on the ternet so that you can
289. han you used to record your video 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Seven The Free Programs 201 In the Title text box type a title for your movie Then click OK to continue The Save As dialog box appears as shown in Figure 7 25 7 Inthe File name text box type a name to save your movie under Also in the Save in text box choose a location where you want the movie to be saved Your movie is just about to be saved and created 8 Click Save to save the movie The Creating Movie dialog box appears which means that Movie Maker is creating your movie When your movie is done being created a dialog box appears and asks you if you d like to watch your movie Click No You can watch your movie later AS 9 That s all there is to turning a project into a movie Now you can e mail your movida your friends for their viewing pleasure Table 7 12 Movie Maker Screen Buttons Button _ Description _ A __ _ _ w This pauses the playing of your video project amp This plays your video project so you can preview it again Om S9Play to start playing D Next Frame This takes you to th g at ame in your video project Full Screen This allows you 9 preview your video project across your entire computer screen a This allo o split a clip into two clips The beginning portion of the clip U ee clip name the end portion of the clip has the original name er in parentheses Split Clip
290. hankfully there aren t as many DOS programs around as there we Still one day you might be on the phone with technical support and be told to go t S DOS prompt To prepare you for that day here s a lesson all about MS DOS 1 Click the Start button Mie select Run The Run dialog box ap MSN and click OK 2 Type command in The MS DOS Prothgs window appears as shown in Figure 4 35 Yes that stark barren screen was all ope had to work with to run programs copy files and navigate between fgldetarir the old fashioned days of computer Notice the DOS prompt which SMurrent drive C and folder Windows Move on to the next step to see how you hanged folders in MS DOS WINDOWS and press lt Enter gt sy hard to remember command you just typed brought you to the OWS subfolder Notice the DOS prompt changes to C WINDOWS MS DOS sn t automatically display all the files and subfolders in the current folder like My omputer or Windows Explorer you have to tell MS DOS to display the contents of the current directory Here s how The asterisk is a wildcard character use it as a substitution for any part of a file name in MS DOS For example typing Ww T Type DIR W DEL TMP would delete all the files The DIR which stands for directory command displays the contents of the current h a TMP extensi folder The W switch tells DOS to display the contents in wide mode otherwise
291. hapter contain al lessons These lessons are what will teach you Microsoft Windows XP Eac n explains a new skill or topic and contains a step by step exercise for you to follo e you hands on experience chapte Mommaries To help you absorb and retain all that you have learned you will find a chapter summary at the end of each chapter that contains a brief recap of everything you have covered in the chapter s lessons a quiz to assess how much you ve learned and which lessons you might want to look over again and a humorous homework assignment where you can put your new skills into practice If you re having problems with a homework exercise you can always refer back to the lessons in the chapter to get help 8 Microsoft Windows XP How to Use the Lessons Every topic is presented on two facing pages so that you can concentrate on the lesson without having to worry about turning the page Since this is a hands on course each lesson contains an exercise with step by step instructions for you to follow To make learning Windows easier every exercise follows certain conventions e Anything you re supposed to click drag or press appears like this e Whenever you re supposed to type something it is appears like Ka r e This book never assumes you know where or what something is st time you re told to click something a picture of what you re supposed to cli ears either in the margin next to the step or i
292. hat you need more quickly and is easier to use The juryagsstill out whether or not the people will embrace this drastically new in new Windows XP interface you can alw 9x interface Description ce or not If you can t stand the tch back to your trusty Windows Personalized As you use your computer Windo watches which programs and files you Menus use and don t use After a whil ows XP starts to hide the items you don t use as much from the Start pgi he items are still there you just have to click the downward pointigg at the bottom of the menu to see them More Reliable stable than Windofs 95 98 and ME and greatly reduces the number of crashes and regtats Better File and Folder Management Windows xKm kes it easier to view and work with your files and folders Thum RGW lets you preview photos and images and the new File and ga SRO pane lets you easily copy move rename or delete any file or Better Help and Support ws XP makes it easier to get efficient help and support with new features as Remote Assistance which allows you to contact a computer expert and t them fix a problem on your computer even if they are hundreds of miles away TS Your Organization s Name Here 14 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 1 2 Starting and Logging On to Windows Figure 1 2 Welcome to Windows The Welcome to Windows dialog box Copyright amp 198
293. he browse windows This lesson shows you how to use the Documents option in the ron to open a recently used file nt so Windows will be able to retrieve it First we need to create a d 1 Use the Not want in it name Ju rogram to create a simple text file type whatever you ve it in the root directory of the Local Disk C with the le Close Notepad You learfeg how to save files in a previous lesson just select File gt Save from the men elect the location where you want to save the file the root directory of the uld retrieve the Junk File by opening Notepad and selecting File gt Open from enu You could retrieve the Junk File by opening My Computer or Windows plorer opening the C drive and double clicking the file Or you could just select the Junk File from the My Recent Documents menu as we ll see in the next step BS Click the Start button and select My Recent Documents The My Recent Documents menu appears listing your recently used files as shown in Figure 5 14 Can you find your Junk File 3 Select the Junk file from the Documents menu The Junk file opens in Notepad where you can review and make changes to the file 4 Close the Notepad program Although there s really no need to you can remove the list of recent documents from the My Recent Documents menu 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Five Customizing the Taskbar and Desktop 1 37 5 Right click an open s
294. he new file name in the File Name box ile Name box and type Canada Letter 10 Click 11 ne and click Yes to confirm the loss in formatting WordPad saves the Canada Letter as a text file under the Trade Show folder 12 Close the WordPad program You can perform basic file management such as renaming deleting moving and copying iles and folders from de any Open or ave dialog box just as if you were in My Computer Quick Reference To Save a File in a New Location e Select File Save As from the menu open the drive and or folder where you want to save the file and click Save To Save a File ina Different File Format e Select File Save As from the menu select the file format from the Save as type list and click Save Your Organization s Name Here 80 Microsoft Windows XP Chapter Three Review Lesson Summary N How to Use Menus e Openamenu by clicking the menu name with the mouse or by resin and then the underlined letter in menu O How to Use Toolbars Q e Click the toolbar button you want to use e To See What a Toolbar Button Does Position the me second A ScreenTip will appear above the button er the toolbar button and wait a Filling Out a Dialog Box Qy e Be able to identify and use text boxes Ra check boxes combo boxes and buttons end e Use a scroll bar to move up or down ist or screen can t display all its information at
295. he screen as shown in Figure 5 6 You can only move the taskbar to the top bottom left or right edge of the screen Drag the taskbar back to the bottom of the screen You can also change the size of the taskbar to display more or less information Position the pointer over the top of the taskbar until it changes to a t Drag the taskbar up a half inch and the release the mouse button as shown in Figure 5 8 The taskbar is resized Drag the taskbar back to its previous size S You can also resize the taskbar so that it disappears entirely from the nS you can t find your taskbar it has either been resized until it s almost off th n in which case you will need to resize it or else the taskbar 1s hidden w Right click a blank area of the taskbar A shortcut menu for the taskbar appears Select Properties from the shortcut menu Qy The Toolbar Properties dialog box appears as shown in F O Click the Auto hide option to check it and ther OK The dialog box closes and the taskbar disappears D orry the taskbar is still there it s just hidden O Position the mouse pointer near the very b f om of the screen is near the bottom of the screen m of the screen the taskbar will The taskbar reappears whenever the mouse When you move the mouse away from the disappear Right click a blank area of thet shortcut menu and unchec ar select Properties from the uto hide option Re RG S 2 Y Q
296. he top three address lines With the top address lines still se 4 a the Center button on the Formatting toolbar to center align them Select the top North Shore ye line and change the font type to Times New i nd apply bold formatting Roman the font size Ai With the top North os hore Travel line still selected press the lt Delete gt key to erase the line Click i iron on the Standard toolbar to undo the deletion Select the text 4 re Communication Director and copy it by clicking the Copy button ccna toolbar Move e end of the document press the lt Enter gt key to add a blank line type Se and press lt Enter gt four times to add several blank lines Clic tpai button on the Standard toolbar to paste the text you copied in Step 9 S ur work and exit WordPad A Answers A and C Clicking the menu name or pressing the lt Alt gt key and the underlined letter in the menu will both open a menu A and B Either method will move the insertion point D The lt Delete gt key deletes text before or to the left of the insertion point lt Backspace gt deletes text after or to the right of the insertion point True Typing replaces any selected text D MS DOS files had an 8 character limit but in Windows XP file names can contain up to 255 characters B All the other methods will cut selected text or information and place it on the clipboard 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Wor
297. henever a window is already in a maximized state Restore button 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Two Working with a Window 39 4 Click the WordPad window s Restore button to restore the WordPad Other Ways to Maximize window back to its previous size and Restore a Window The window returns to its previous size e Double click the title bar Just like you can keep several papers on top of your desk Windows can run more than of the window to toggle one program at a time For example you can work on a letter with your word between maximized processing program while your Web browser is open and downloading a file from the and restored states Internet There is a potential pitfall with running several programs simultaneously though there isn t enough room for all of them to fit on your computer screen Luckily you can tuck programs away keeping them running and ready for use yet O away from view by minimizing them amp Click the WordPad window s Minimize button to minimize the WordPad A C Minimize button program The WordPad program shrinks to an icon located in the Windows taskbar wora still open and running it s just hidden from view tucked away and ready ay Ifa will keep use It s important to note that minimized programs can still run in the backg program is doing something such as downloading a file from the Internet going even when the program is minimized It s easy to r
298. here you can type your reply 3 Type urpreply and click the Send button on the toolbar when you re Quick Reference finisMed To Reply to a Message You cr Dress characters to express emotion in your e mail messages in chat rooms or 1 Find and open the elsewRy n the Internet Table 9 5 Expressing Emotion in Your Messages has some of the message you want to mor Pprimon ones Some of them resemble a face if you turn them sideways reply to 2 Click the reply option you want to use Reply to Author or Reply to All 3 Type your reply and the Send button on the toolbar when you re finished Me 9 5 Expressing Emotion in Your Messages Jibbreviation Abbreviation iwi fome dA Fortyatd qos Giors rom myn fori wk fio ag ror Steingirewon ror Rang ote teoriana oer 0 sume Ewo Fowaresmensge N 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Nine Exploring the Internet 269 Lesson 9 14 Forwarding and Deleting a Message Fw Your next projects File Edit View Insert Format Tools Message Help 9 amp I Undo Check Spelling GATo Big Bird Ernie Bert Mr Snufalufagu Type the e mail address of the GA cc recipient you want to receive h ject Fw Your next projects forwarded message Hey look have an admirer Type any comments a to 10 From Dan To Oscar the Grouch Sent Tuesday November 20 2001 8 24 AM Subject Bravo de ubject Bravo The origina
299. ht Y deletes once space to of the insertion point Oo p w the right or after Press the lt Delete gt key the insertion point The Delete key deletes text after or to the right of the insertion cu Press and hold the lt Delete gt key until you have deley e rest of the sentence and we re still stuck together Great You ve learned how to delete text using the Delet Compare your revised document with the one shown in Figugig 3 10 QO Quick Reference AS To Move the Insertion WwW Point Oo e Use the arrow keys lt Or e e Click where you want to place the insertion point amp with the pointer O To Insert Text WN e Move the insertion point Yor where you want to insert X the text and then type the text you want to insert To Delete Text e The lt Backspace gt key deletes text before or to the left of the insertion point e The lt Delete gt key deletes text after or to the right of the insertion point Your Organization s Name Here 62 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 3 11 The Save As dialog box Figure 3 12 The Open dialog box Save button Other Ways to Save e Select File Save from the menu amp RG Lesson 3 6 Saving and Opening a File Save As E124 Floppy A Look in list Select the Qe where V you warf e the file amp Dis les located in the drive or folder File name text box Type the name you
300. ht button on the Forma Format Paragraph from the menu and selecting the paragraph list lt Getting Help by Contents lt e Pressing the lt F1 gt key displays information on what Qrey doing from the menu and click the Contents tab if u re looking for Double click any subtopics e To Get help by Contents Press lt F1 gt or select necessary Scroll down the screen and click the if necessary e Click the Back button to move to the Di screen or topic e To Print a Help Topic Click the Options tton and select Print Topic Getting Help with the ndex and Search e To Use the Help Index Pr 1 gt or select Help from the menu and click the Index tab and type the keyword s that desciQ Help topic you are looking for Double click the Help topic you re looking for e To Search for aH and type the k you re looking pic Press lt F1 gt or select Help from the menu and click the Search tab that describe the help topic you are looking for Double click the Help topic e Clicking t Bigog box s Help button and then clicking a control with the pointer explains what the control d igs Savia Opening Files in Different Locations e Oa a File in a New Location Select File Save As from the menu open the drive and or der where you want to save the file and click Save format from the Save as type list and click Save 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Working with a Windows Program 83 Qu
301. ic as your theme Simply select the item you want to change from the preview display or from the dropdown list and then select a color for the object Quick Reference To Change Windows Color Scheme 1 Right click a blank area on the desktop and select Properties from the shortcut menu 2 Click the Appearance tab 3 Select the color scheme from the Scheme list and click OK To Change Windows to Classic Style 1 Follow steps one and two above to get to the Appearance tab 2 Select Windows Classic style from the Windows and buttons list Your Organization s Name Here 1 58 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 6 5 Adding Wallpaper to the Desktop Figure 6 1 1 Display Properties Themes Desktop Screen Saver ll Appearance Settings The Background tab of the Display Properties dialo b para 9 l i Preview of how the selected per OX 7 will look on the desktop Figure 6 12 Select from several ages to Windows with the Red use as walpaper 9g moon desert wallpaper Background E Peace Or click here t e your own picture or ae N o E Purple flower s i hg raphic should be l i c mtered tiled or stretched DD cn 2 2 3 Figure 6 11 Arrange Icons By j Refresh Moot us don t work in a sterile work environment we decorate our desktops with pictures nts and Dilbert calendars Similarly Windows lets you give your com
302. ick anywhere on the Web page and select Add to Favorites from the shortcut menu To Go To a Favorite Web Page e Click the Favorites button on the toolbar and select the Web page from the left side of Internet Explorer Click the Favorites button when you re finished Or e Select Favorites from the menu and select the Web page To Change Your Start Page e Go to the Web page select Tools Internet Options from the menu and click the Use Current button To Organize Favorites e Select Favorites gt Organize Favorites from the menu Your Organization s Name Here 256 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 9 7 Displaying a History of Visited Web Pages Figure 9 16 3 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Internet Explorer displays Q x A QD search Spe Favorites A media a history of previously visited Web sites Address http www customquide com History Select the day or vew v search L Acer Su week when you last Ej thursday Guide com m viewed the Web E Friday Computer Courseware 6 H T About Us E3 Prices Ordering if page Courseware af 5 65 103 29 189 Print On Demand Access 97 ad doubleciick ad d n ads musiccity ads m Access 2002 uter lesson plans that are easy and fun Excel 97 the ability to edit and customize the con Select the Web BI cgi3 ebay cgi3 eba Exce 2000 organization We also give you unlimited repri site
303. ick the Start button and select Run Enter the path and name of the program you want to run or click the Browse button find the file and double click it Click OK to run the program N Adding Shortcuts to the Desktop AY e Ashortcut is a quick way to open a file or folder without having to go to the actual cation gO Shortcuts always display an arrow L 1 in their corner W e To Create a Shortcut to a File or Folder Drag the file or folder to a new location AN right mouse button and select Create Shortcut Here from the shortcut menu You ney reate a shortcut by right clicking the file or folder for which you want to create a shortc electing Create Shortcut from the shortcut menu Finally you can create a shortcufgy rigMt clicking an empty area of any folder or the Windows Desktop and selecting New S t from the shortcut menu entering the path and name of the program you want th Cut to point to Starting a Program Automatically when Wind orts e To Start a Program Automatically when you Load Windo dd the program file or folder to the StartUp folder in the Programs Menu To get to the St der right click the Start button click Open and double click the Programs folder V Quiz 1 You can move the taskbar to e of the screen True or False 2 Which of the following sta Tants is NOT true A You can change the siz taskbar by dragging its top edge until the taskbar 1s the size you want Move the pointer ARG ottom o
304. ieeieiioanss 248 CUD IAs eane N 68 Web bDrowSel ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 246 dele ener ATRA 60 MEDSE e aeaee 244 EAO aa ONA 60 Web moving to a specific Web page 248 EEE EA A E E E E ET 68 window replace ennaa 64 cascadin T eeraa an 46 SEIS CUNO arsa A 64 CIOSI Ounae ae 36 40 E DOMES a NNER 56 MAXIMIZING O EES 38 tiling WINdOWS ccccceeeesseseeeseeeseeeees 46 maximizing button S S 36 time zone Changing cceeeeeeeees 152 MENUS 00064 g amp mo 52 Hile Da Frasi AO 36 minimizing E TN 36 38 OL e a 54 moving amp sia TEET EE 41 turning off resizing NS EEE NE TATT 42 monitor automatically 165 restoringat BPH cece eee eee 36 38 turning off computel cee 28 turning on computer and monitor 14 U UNCED MiG eeren E 12 Undo command ccceeeeeeeesstseeeeees 66 Update Windows XP ccceeeeeeeeees 230 user groups PETMISSIONS 0ceceeeeeeeeeeessesseeeees 292 a Win ZIP program crosar 259 WordPadcsse e 180 volume Qy cutting copying and pasting text 68 AC USUI prsnu eis O 4 deleno TeX enea 60 ADLET EE es 154 edine tek ic an n 60 nterne TEXTI msiri isi 58 W ka paragraph alignment 00 cccee 73 Wall Papel scisctisccissvccccrsAbipterdnn oitevenissee 158 PADUNE enoia E 67 saving images from JieDWages selecting and replacing text 64 Star NO ae ac
305. ight create a Personal Letters folder to stor your personal correspondence files and a Business folder for your business r files Selecting a folder to save a file in is easy simply double click the Create folder icon on the toolbar amp NOTE If you don t specify a drive or folder when you ing a file the program will save the file in the current folder the drive anid folder that happens to be open at that time This can often make the ore difficult to find in the future 7 Double click the Trade Show folder Orn to save the file m Earlier in this chapter you learned that puter programs save and open files in their own different types or formats just ier from different countries speak different languages But just as some peopl eak more than one language many computer programs can open and save agai file types or formats WordPad normally saves files in Word for manos C3 c format but it s easy to save files in different formats 8 Click the Save as typed gMarrow A list of different typego Q Select Text Docu One more thing b you clicked t Show folder with a diffe The Trade Show folder opens this is wh formats appears s txt from the Save as type list e save the file we want to save it with a different name If e utton at this point WordPad would save the file in the Trade EN e original file name Canada Meeting Memo To save the file me simply type t
306. ijof the Northpole Claus dynasty YOU could deliver presents and eat cookies making the torld s kids love you For Help press F1 Figure 7 1 WordPad is a stripped down word ssor and is one of the best freebies Microsoft tossed in with Windows XP You can AC ad to create letters memos and documents You can S W format your WordPad document various font and paragraph styles Here s how to open the WordPad program 1 Click the Startqgutton and select All Programs Accessories gt WordPad The Word text in the Q appears as shown in Figure 7 1 If you want try typing some ad program and explore WordPad s menus 2 Close tite WordPad program Quick Reference To Open WordPad Descriptio A scaled down word processing program you can use to create simple e Click the Start button and letters and documents Table Z WordPad select All Programs Accessories gt ag of File s Used Word files Rich Text files Text Documents l4 Write files WordPad Features Include Font and paragraph formatting bullets tab stops insert the current date print preview insert objects from other programs and find and replace Features Don t Include Spell checker thesaurus tables headers and footers many other advanced word processing features Found Under All Programs Accessories gt WordPad r amp 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Seven
307. ile when it was last modified size of the file and other ced search options to choose from ja 8 Type Practice folder in the search options dialog bey and click Search The Search Companion searches for folder and displays all fij the results window Close the Search Results window 9 Table 4 6 Search Options Pictures music or Search for pictures and digital MOs jpg gif and bmp files video music mp3 files and digit avi and mpeg files Documents word search for files created_w processing Microsoft Excel x spreadsheet etc Notepad txt All files and folders Search fo Computer or people Search for ers on your network or the name of a person in your address OX Information in Help Se NA Information in Microsoft Windows XP s built in Help system and Support Center Ia Search the Internet Y Ch the Internet for information on a key word or phrase Change Preference hange your search preferences such as if you want to display an animated character or if you want to use advanced search options program such as Microsoft Access mdb diclsoft PowerPoint ppt Microsoft Word doc or r all types 0 files and folders 1 2 3 4 P Search Search button Search by any or all of the criteria below Il or part of the file name A word or phrase in the file Look in Sg Local Hard Drives C When was it modified What size is it More
308. important parts of ndonga taskbar is the control center for Windows where you start and manage all your pro The desktop is your workspace where you actually get your work done Re Because the taskb Ry desktop are so important this entire chapter 1s devoted just to them In this chapte AS earn how to customize the taskbar and desktop so they work best for you Custongzgre the taskbar and desktop is a lot like arranging furniture in an empty living room there right way of doing it just do whatever works best for you In this chapter you ll learn how to move size and hide the taskbar how to add and remove programs and folders to and from the Programs menu and how to add shortcuts to the Windows desktop 1 28 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 5 1 Using the Windows Classic Start Menu Figure 5 1 Taskbar and Start Menu Properties Taskbar Stat Menu You can use the Start HED windons Catalog menu in either Windows a ows a XP mode or Windows rvoe Classic mode both shown OD ema De mA Programs amp My Pictures here GD My Music A Documents m PL My Computer F igure 5 2 My Network Places Settings eg Control Panel i ch The Start Menu tab of the mi sie sy Customize Taskbar and Start Menu Daneman Help and Support C ee customize Properties d ialog box T mail and your favorite programs C I Run m Sia Select this option to use the menu style from tog oft shut Down earlier versi
309. in 116 F ELKE Yonen t 27 74 Favorites Web pages cccccceeeeeeees 254 file extension S esra ioii 104 fil manasementssiandse siseringi 88 files CODY IS ihe a a 100 delent retara ee 98 displaying details 106 EXONS OMS o a tua detaies eareadie 104 PATNI oe acc E E EO O 110 MOVIDO re E te meee 100 jE 1 O16 Seana em mn ae een ee er are ee 62 OPENIN S oeri siete a 62 98 PNN O eroan n N 67 recently opened enced uncut tats 136 renamen eee ee ere eee 98 rules fOr NAMING cceccceeeeeeeeeees 62 SAVING paca ieeeree ee nis 62 saving in different formats and locaton eran 78 selecting multiple eee 108 SONOS a 106 types Olorua n 104 finding TUNES E E AT 110 INCL ohne fe ee cache atone nena 76 information on the Web 2952 floppy disk 2000 CustomGuide com Index 303 COPYN ee ern oe ae renee 209 displaying properties Of 6 90 formatin E oinnia 208 viewing contents Of cc cesses 90 Hoppy disk erann 88 Folder Options dialog box 170 172 folder patien 104 folders COP VINO ar R 96 KNE O T N E A EN 94 delenn tasa a en 96 MOVIDO gean pae an aa 96 ODENIN G ends a e a 92 OPUONS hc Antes a eis 170 172 PADES cuia a 225 282 Ie 0130000 8 S aa a Ree 94 TOOL TONG CE eg aie eth eda ee 93 selecting multiple cece 108 fonts changing type and SiZe ccccc0 70 using bold italics and underlining 72 For
310. in pieces or fragments in several locations all over the hard drive When the computer reads a fragmented file it must read the file from several different areas of the hard drive instead of just one Defragmenting a hard drive using a special utility program can improve its performance by putting fragmented files back together in one place Windows XP comes with a disk defragmentation program called what else Disk Defragmenter In case you haven t 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer 213 noticed by now Microsoft doesn t give its products very flashy names You should defragment your computer hard drive about once a month Here s how to defragment your hard drive 1 Open My Computer from the Start menu Next you need to right click the drive you want to defragment Disk NOTE In theory you could defragment a floppy drive but there is absolutely no ei reason why you would ever need to Hard drives are the only type of drive er Ways to Start Disk that benefit from running Disk Defragmenter amp wiih Right click the C hard disk icon and select Properties from the Click the Start button shortcut menu and select All AS Programs gt Defragmentation and several other maintenance tools are located on the Tools the Properties dialog box Click the Tools tab The Tools tab appears as shown in Figure 8 5 gt Click the Defragment Now button The Disk Def
311. indicating that they contain several subfolders W 6 Click the Windows folder in the left pane of the Explorer wind w to select it The contents of the Windows folder appear in the right pane of the r window Notice the subfolders in the Windows folder are displayed in eS t and right panes You can collapse or hide folders to reduce the amount of infor ijn that is on the screen To collapse a folder click the minus sign beside the r 7 Click the minus symbol beside the Windows The Windows folder collapses all its subfolders are hyklen from view The minus symbol changes to a plus symbol indicating that lt bfolders in the Windows r folder are hidden from view You can adjust the size of either pane of the iow 8 Position the mouse over the bar i g the two sides of the window t until the pointer changes to a RE drag the bar to the right or left about a half inch Just like in My Computer you can View menu 9 Select View gt Icons fromethe menu The contents in the right pa 10 Select View gt Listf The contents in the ri Magne of Explorer are displayed in List View how information is displayed by using the xplorer are displayed in Icon View e menu It s important to remembe the right pane is still My Computer so the procedures for creating opening rena oving copying and deleting files and folders are exactly the aa S amp or files AS Q If there isn t a symbol next to a
312. indows Media Player indows Media Player The WordPad program Ei Document WordPad File Edit View Insert Format Help Cee 464 fm amp Aia m hio Wese Any programs that are currently running appear as icons on the Le 4 10PM taskbar tg Start a just about anything with your computer you need to run a program A program is a plex set of instructions that tells your computer how to do something Your word Start button ocessor is a program and so is the Solitaire game that comes with Windows The easiest way to start a program is by clicking the Windows Start button and then selecting the program KY from the All Programs menu This lesson explains one of the most basic operations you can do with Windows starting a program 1 Click the Start button Remember that the Start button resides in the bottom left corner of the computer screen The Start menu pops up 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Two Working with a Window 35 Great You ve just started your first program Turn the page and we ll e ine the parts of the WordPad window Point to All Programs A menu listing the different program categories pops out above the Start menu as All Programs gt shown in Figure 2 1 7 Point to the word Accessories All Programs Another menu the Accessories menu shoots out to the side of the All Programs menu as shown in Figure 2 2 The program you want to load WordPad is in the Accessories men
313. indows XP Style The radical new look and feel for Wi XP with rounded corners big buttons and bright crayon like colors Windows Classic Style The look and feel you re previous versions of Windows with square corner Color scheme Lets you select a color scheme that changes thgsgolors of many screen elements simultaneously NOTE Unless you have the Aaleaws XP Plus software installed you will limited to only a few color schemes SAJ bly used to from a no nonsense design Lets you change the size of the fonts t used throughout Windows This option is useful if you have bad eyesight of monitor Effects Click to open the Effects dialog in Figure 6 9 and select visual effects for Windows menus icons and f Use the following smooth edges of screen fonts Specifies whether to activate aninf ons for menu commands and other Windows ghange how menus lists and tooltips open and close thod to smooth edges of screen fonts Select Standard rs select ClearType for most laptop computers and other flat elements Animati Use the followi for desktop screen derlined letters for keyboard navigation until press the ALT key ies whether to suppress the underlined letters of keyboard shortcuts until Ctually use the keyboard to navigate in Windows generally with the ALT Advanced QS lick to customize the look of windows menus fonts and icons as shown in Figure 6 10 This option is only useful if you selected Windows Class
314. indows and icons open it can shai be pretty hard to find an empty area on the taskbar There should always be an Cascade Windows empty area just to the right of the last program icon and to the left of the oe Janar system tray the area with the clock on it Sometimes the empty area is a e5 ape oe mere sliver but it s still there ow the Desktop Click Tile Windows Vertically from the shortcut menu e iiaiai Windows organizes all the open windows by tiling them vertically on the screen as A j o shown in Figure 2 17 Had you selected the Tile Windows Horizontally option fro araisa shortcut menu the windows would have been tiled horizontally giving each win Taskbar Shortcut equal space Tiling windows is useful when you only have a few windows ope menu want to view their contents at the same time W Click an empty area on the taskbar with the Right mouse but n A shortcut menu appears Oo Click Cascade Windows from the shortcut menu w Windows organizes all the open windows by neatly overlapping over one another as shown in Figure 2 18 Cascade Windows is the other metho omatically arranging your windows It s useful when you have several vy s open and want to quickly find all of them but not display their contents Guess what Now you know everything there is to know aboutt ing closing moving sizing switching between and arranging windows What i 4 eal ve Quick Reference lt To Tile Windows on the D
315. indows to end the lesson Table 8 3 Symbc sA See in the Device Manager Symbol ____ QDescription The device doesn t have any drivers installed and therefore your computer Y Unknow Ke can t use it You ll have to install drivers for the device see the lesson on installing hardware The device has a problem This can be caused by a resource conflict the device is trying to use a resource on your computer that s already in use an incorrect driver or a hardware failure The type of problem will be displayed in the properties for the hardware r Device Problem m Computer EE Disk drives ce Display adapters The Device Manager lists the hardware devices on your computer in an outline iew N m Computer Disk drives GENERIC IDE i GENERIC NEC aa Display adapters Click the symbol next to a hardware category to display its hardware devices Quick Reference To Open the Device Manager e Click the Start button select Control Panel gt Performance and Maintenance gt System Click the Hardware tab and click the Device Manager button To View Change a Device s Properties e Right click the device and select Properties from the shortcut menu To Remove a Device Driver e Select the device and click the Uninstall button Be VERY CAREFUL when using the Device Manager Don t remove a hardware device or change its settings unless you know what you re doing
316. indows will display a series k yi and select the network domain or workgroup ant to log on to from the Log on To list ave to log on to another network domain Press lt EntAN click OK to log on to Windows Logging On To Os 10 21 Welcome to Windows dialog box Enter your user name and password AA Specify the computer or netwo Q you want to log on to Click Options to display A Log on To list which lets rou RE which a network domain r W o log on to RY t any different than turning your In this brief lesson we ll review the Quick Reference To Log On To Windows 1 If necessary press lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt lt Delete gt to start the log on procedure 2 Enter your user name and password and press lt Enter gt gged back on to Windows XP and are ready to get back to work Your Organization s Name Here 288 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 10 8 Changing Your Password Figure 10 22 Windows Security The Windows XP Security dialog box Copyright 1985 2001 Mioreoft Corporation Figure 10 23 Logon Information The Change Password You are logged on as BRAD Administrator dialog box Logon Date 10 2 2001 ji Change Password j hrethherecter Shee lick to change your logon password Figure 10 22 Change Windows Password Copright E 1985 2001 eoft Corporation User Mame Log on to Displays the computer or domain you are logged on to Old Password N
317. ing the le click you can adjust the double click speed in Start button Recycle Bin icon Close button Quick Reference To Point to Something e Move the mouse so that the pointer is over the object To Click e Point to the object and press and release the mouse button To Double click e Point to the object and rapidly click the mouse button two times O ONN Your Organization s Name Here 22 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 1 6 Using the Mouse Dragging and Dropping Figure 1 9 1 _ Hold down the mouse Dragging and Dropping a Ae button while you drag gi memet with the mouse ae i the mouse across your OE DEAS EB Activate windows i desk Outlook Windows Catalo Figure 1 10 UA rons Wa Microsoft Word F Accessog gt You can start a game of K vicosof Excel a oO Cae 7 Solitaire by looking under N i Programs Games gt PA Ament Solitaire Place the pointer over an object and 33 Windows Messenge Aj Freecel press and hold down the left mouse A Internet I P Hearts Figure 1 11 button While you are still holding the S i iae ay _ button move the mouse to the where eats i eter The Solitaire game which you want to place the object and then avenue D ime comes with Windows release the mouse button Q Microsoft Outlook d internet Spades Gi Microsoft Outlook Newsreader if Minesweeper Figure 1 9 PE e sut Pinball A Solitaire Figure 1 10
318. ing the Media Library in Windows Media Player Windows Media Player File View Play Tools Help be These controls let you create non T playlists of the files you want to Media in listen to Guide Copy from CD ij Caedmon s Ca i Emperor Tomato Ketchu Media Q Look Into The Eyeba Library Ar 2 Aa Cal Radio aS ET j Byrne olab Tuner N n CopytoCD we Gen or Device 1 SPL The media files on your Pe computer are org amp ized in an outline The item a hidden cont Click to display the hidd nts El T s contents are displayed hide the item s contents edia files on your computer such as MP3 files songs that you have recorded from a ND Pato your computer s hard drive or even video files O 1 Start the Windows Media Player b Ming the Media Player icon and click the Media Library tab K The Media Library appears on the Qr ou want to open a media file so 2 Click the category that cont e files of your interest Categories located on the left section of the screen can be video files audio files or even your own playlist Yoff controls at the top of the Media Player to create your playlists The Audio category h Video category has s NOTE A catego tegories called All Audio Album Artist and Genre The gories called All Clips and Author laying a plus sign contains hidden items Click it to display the e the items in a category click the minus sign i
319. inter as the Sy orinter and assign a different name to the printer if you want Click Next and click ring Creating a New User amp e Creating several user accounts on the same computer lets each gD So inci own permissions to shared folders and printers start menu and shortcu wallpaper and screen colors amp X9 Accounts icon and if necessary enter the Administrator t and Password and click OK Click Add Enter the User Name Full Name box and an al Description Click Next and Select the type of access you want to grant the ome Finish and then click OK e To Delete a User Account Click the Start butto elect Control Panel Click the User Accounts icon and if necessary enter the ore account and Password and click OK e To Create a New User Account Click the Start sage Control Panel Click the User Click the user you want to remove and click ove button Logging Off Windows od e To Log Off Windows Save all yoawosk and exit all your programs Click the Windows Start button and select Log Off K ff Logging On To Winda e To Log On To Windows gnecessary press lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt lt Delete gt to start the log on procedure nena name and password and press lt Enter gt A ssword To crair User Password Press lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt lt Delete gt and click the Change Passwor ton Type your old password in the Old Password box and press the lt Tab gt key type your new password in the New Password
320. inter changes to a Pend then dragging the edge until the taskbar is the size you want e Hide the taskba shortcut men clicking any blank area of the taskbar selecting Properties from the ng the Auto hide option and clicking OK e Display a ae taskbar by positioning the pointer near the very bottom of the screen os the Start Menu omize the Start Menu Right click the taskbar and select Properties from the shortcut amp king with the Quick Launch Toolbar oe To Add an Item to the Quick Launch toolbar Drag and drop the program onto the Quick Launch toolbar To Resize the Quick Launch toolbar Drag the right border of the Quick Launch toolbar to the right or left e To Delete a Program from the Quick Launch toolbar Right click the program s button on the Quick Launch toolbar and select Delete from the shortcut menu e To Hide Display the Quick Launch toolbar Right click any empty area on the taskbar and select Toolbars Quick Launch from the shortcut menu 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Five Customizing the Taskbar and Desktop 145 Opening Recently Used Documents e You can open a recent document by clicking the Start button My Recent Documents and selecting the file you want to open e To Clear the List of Recently Used Files Right click the taskbar choose Properties Start Menu tab Customize Advanced tab Click Clear and then OK OK Starting a Program with the Run Command e Cl
321. interesting doesn t it Don t worry lessons later in module explain how to utilize the Windows Media Player Let s adjust the olume ww Click the Start button and then All Programs Accessories gt xo Entertainment Volume Control The Volume Control dialog box appears KY 4 Drag the volume slider up or down to increase or decrease the volume Drag the balance slider to the left or right to change the balance That s all there is to adjusting the volume NOTE The Volume control also contains a Mute check box When the Mute box is checked the computer s sound is turned off completely Try turning it off and then back on 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Six Customizing Windows 155 If you re an audiophile you can also fine tune the volume settings by adjusting the other devices controls in the Volume Control dialog box The other devices are listed in Table 6 2 Controls on the Volume Control Dialog Box NOTE If you want to customize which devices you want to appear on your Volume Control go to Options Properties in the Volume Control dialog box and checkmark the devices you want to control 5 Close the Volume Control dialog box and the Windows Media Player You can also add the Volume Control to the Windows taskbar for quick and easy access To add the Volume Control to the task bar click Start gt Control Panel select Sounds Speech taskbar option Table 6 2
322. ircle is selected You can easily move any object while it is selected Move the selected circle by dragging it to a new position in the Paint window Exit the Paint program Text Tool Q A Fill Tool rea Pieneen ae ae ea ee ae SS picture ZZ l l Resize text after you type it by clicking and dragging any of its sizing handles until the text fits in the box Quick Reference To Use a Paint Tool e Click the paint tool button The mouse pointer tuns into that specific tool To Change the Size of a Paint Picture e Select Image gt Attributes from the menu Specify the picture size and click OK Your Organization s Name Here 1 88 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 7 10 The Solitaire game Figure 7 11 The Minesweeper game Warning Microsoft XP games can be strangely addicting Don t get caught procrastinating with them Quick Reference To Play a Built in Game e Click the Start button and select All Programs Games and selecting the game you want to play e Lesson 7 7 Play Games P Solitaire Mineswe A ml Eg Figure 7 10 t Figure 7 11 Windows XP comes with several simple games yO can play when things get dull at the office These games not only help you pass the ti t they re also a great way to improve your mouse skills You can find these games u the Games group p Table 7 7 Games Included with Solitaire card gang Plo
323. isit the Windows XP Web site The following s are available for your computer To select an update you ee E E Pick updates to install o install K Add and then cick Review and install updates Once you re finished choosing the C Critical Updates 0 eS updates to install review the list and C Driver Updates 0 y Q Review and install updates etaHtems seieetedHia install the updates onto your computer C Review and install updates Recommended Updates Other Options Euro Conversion Tool Download size 182 KB lt 1 minute The Euro Conversion tool allows currency migration to the euro for user C Personalize Windows Uday locales within the European Union This tool does not change currency settings for user locales outside of the European Union Read more E x f Click to add updates and 2001 Microsoft Corpo on Aw rights reserved Terms of use Accessibility enhancements to the download list C View installation history Ify Pe a connection to the Internet you can find and install product enhancements and u system files device drivers and service packs Keeping Windows up to date with the files helps your computer work and run better This is especially important with i XP because it was released with so many glitches patches for XP have come out nce the first day it was available for purchase If your computer doesn t have a connection to A the Internet you can t use the Windows Update feature
324. ite com manny a powerful highly rated search engine and it also has 3 Click the link for the Web REI best customizable home pages on the Internet page you want to look at Google Y 4 Click the Search jine However it doesn t contain many other features other than button on the toolbar to Aa close the search panel WWW Ri Though not as popular as some of the others HotBot consistently To Search the Web for ranks as one of the best most relevant search engines Information Using a Search Engine Lycos is another powerful search engine especially if you re looking for information in formats other than Web pages such as e Type the Web address for MP3 sound files the search engine in the Address bar and press The mother of all Web pages Yahoo is actually more of a directory lt Enter gt Type the word service than a search engine but it makes it very easy to find or phrase you want to topics especially if you re new to the Internet search for in the Web page s search box and press lt Enter gt Your Organization s Name Here 254 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 9 12 The Add Favorites dialog box Figure 9 13 Click the Favorites button to display a list of your favorite Web pages Figure 9 14 The General tab of the Internet Options dialog box You can change your home page here Figure 9 15 The Organize Favorites dialog box Other Ways to Add a Web Page to Favorites e Right click
325. ive If your software comes on more than one disk dig through the box until you find a disk labeled Disk 1 Installation or Setup O Find the Program s disk or disks and insert it or the first disk into the If you re installing a newer program from a CD ROM you might not have to do much more most CD ROM s will automatically start the installation program when the CD is inserted You can move on to Step 8 if this is the case 2002 CustomGuide Inc 6 7 set ups have more similarities than differences Most p guide you through the installation process let you sp program although they have their own default fo program components you want to install Every program and its installation process is different N Qir Many installation programs create their own both a blessing and a curse a blessing Programs menu and a curse because if Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer 21 9 Click the Start button and select Control Panel Add or Remove Programs and click the Add New Programs button on the left side of the window The Add or Remove Programs window appears as shown in Figure 8 14 Here you must select where the program you want to install is located Click the CD or Floppy button and click Next in the Install Program dialog box Windows searches your floppy drive and CD ROM for the program you want to install Most programs come with a special program called SETUP or INSTALL whi
326. iz 1 You can open a program s menu by Select all that apply A Clicking the menu name with the mouse B Pressing lt Esc gt and then the underlined letter in menu C Pressing lt Alt gt and then the underlined letter in menu D Saying Computer open the state the name of the menu here menu O 2 How can you move the insertion point in WordPad Select all that apply amp A By pressing the arrows keys on your computer s keyboard B By using the mouse and clicking where you want to place the insertion point wi pointer C By selecting the Window Move Insertion Point command lt D The insertion point is an immovable object and can t be moved W 3 Which key deletes text before or to the left of the insertion nay A lt Page Up gt B lt Page Down gt C lt Delete gt D lt Backspace gt Qy 4 Typing overwrites or replaces any text that is seedy True or False 5 Which of the following statements is NOT tru Ly A You can undo the last action or mistake you Ke clicking the Undo button on the toolbar or by selecting Edit Undo from t enu B You can print the file you re working ony ing the Print button on the toolbar or by selecting File Print from the nu C You should save your work or file w r you think about it D Files names can contain up to 8 rs 6 The following will cut selected text or information and place it on the clipboard Select all that a lya A Pressing
327. jeci Click the WordPad windo yClose button Close from the shortcut The WordPad program olny otice the WordPad icon no longer appears in the menu Windows taskbar at the bottom of the screen That s all there is to closing a window or program e Press lt Alt gt lt F4 gt NOTE Ifa prog more than one window open you can close all of its open windo olding down the lt Shift gt key when you click the Close button for iow Quick Reference Since oo to be working with the WordPad program in the next few lessons To Close a Window you will peed open it again e Click the window s Close Click Start button button Th ows XP Start menu appears Or 3 All Programs gt Accessories gt WordPad from the Start menu e Right click the program s he WordPad program reappears icon on the task bar and I gram happens to be minimized you need to restore it by clicking its icon on the select Close from the ar before you can see and click the window s close button shortcut menu Or e Press lt Alt gt lt FA gt Tr To Close All Open Windows e Hold down the lt Shift gt key while you click the Close button of any window 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Two Working with a Window 41 Lesson 2 5 Moving a Window Move a window by Figure 2 11 dragging it by its title bar to a new location oving a window to a new on the screen gtion on the screen El Document WordPad Fi
328. kbar appearance Lock the taskbar Auto hide the taskbar Keep the taskbar on top of other windows C Group similar taskbar buttons Show Quick Launch Notification area Show the clock You can keep the notification area uncluttered by hiding icons that you have not clicked recently Hide inactive icons Figure 5 9 Customize Start Menu Es General Advanced Select an icon size for programs 4 g Large icons Programs The Start menu contains shortcuts to the programs you use Clearing the list of shortcuts does not delete the programs J Number of programs on Start menu Show on Start menu Customizing the Start Taskbar and Start Menu Properties Taskbar Start Menu Start menu Select this menu style for easy Intemet e mail and your fayag Classic Start menu Select this option t e menu style from earier versiogs of Winda ss to the ms Cus ze Start Menu Start menu settings Open submenus when pause on them with my mouse Highlight newly installed programs Start menu items E Control Panel Display as a link Display as a menu Dont display this item Enable dragging and dropping C Favorites menu Al Ualn snd Cunnart v Recent documents Intemet Select this option to provide quick access to the documents you E mail opened most recently Clearing this list does not delete the documents List my most recentl
329. key doesn t do anything by itself it needs another key to make things happen For example pressing the lt Tab gt key while holding down the lt Alt gt key switches between any programs that are currently running Just like the lt Alt gt key the lt Ctrl gt doesn t do anything by itself you need to press another key with it to make things happen For example pressing the lt X gt key O while holding down the lt Ctrl gt key cuts whatever is selected The lt F1 gt key is the help key and pressing it displays helpful information ene what you re doing The lt Esc gt Escape key is the Wait I ve changed my mind key and as clicking Cancel in a dialog box For example if you click something The lt Enter gt key is the Carry out my orders key and is the see Clicking the n OK button in a dialog box For example after you ve type ame of a program you want to run in a dialog box press lt Enter gt to run the p The lt Enter gt When you re in a dialog box pressing the lt Tab gt ke m When you re using a word processor the lt Tab gt orks just like you d think it would and jumps to the nearest tab stop whegeyer you press it Quick Reference To Use a Keystroke Combination Press and hold down the first key press the second Ont key then release both keys For example press the lt Tab gt key while you re holding down the lt Alt gt key To Use the Special Keys on the Keyb
330. king with a Windows Program 85 7 True You can t see anything happen when you copy something although it has been placed in the invisible Windows clipboard behind the scenes 8 False lt F1 gt is the Windows help key Your Organization s Name Here Chapter Four Working with Files lt and Folders M Prerequisites e How to use the mouse Chapter Objectives o gt Understanding storage devices folders and m2 to click double click files drag and drop and right click Using My Computer to navigate through folder Opening creating and renaming files and fotlg s e How to use menus Copying moving and deleting files and Ars toolbars and dialog boxes Restoring a deleted file and a N Recycle Bin n Changing how information is displ Selecting multiple files and fol amp gs Finding a file using the Se ompanion Using Windows BPE When you work at a desk unless files begin to pile up and bec occurs when working with become disorganized and ake an effort to stay organized all your papers and ssy It takes a little more time but the same phenomenon S the files you create using your computer start to der and harder to find In this chapter you ll ta file management Y file cabinet does Y time to time just amp organize yo r first step beyond the Windows basics and enter the world of rn how Windows stores information in files and folders just like a nd you will
331. l e Click the control with the mouse Or Press lt Tab gt to move to the next control in the dialog box or lt Shift gt lt Tab gt to move to the previous control until you arrive at the desired control To Use a Text Box e Simply type the information directly into the text box To Use a List Box e Click the option you want from list box Use the scroll bar to move up and down through its options To Use a Combo Box or Drop Down List e Click the Down Arrow to list the combo box s options Click an option from the list to select it To Save Changes and Close a Dialog Box e Click the OK button or press lt Enter gt To Close a Dialog Box without Saving Changes e Click the Cancel button or press lt Esc gt Your Organization s Name Here 58 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 3 4 Entering Text in the WordPad Program Figure 3 9 Document WordPad A simple letter created in File Edit View Insert Format Help the WordPad program S A d amp 12 26 2001 To the La Fanci Nails Company bought a set of your press on nails last monthNaod was extremely displeased with them While pressing my La Fanci Nails o nt to pet my poodle Pizzy and my hand and nails stuck to her shaggy pelt That was in August and were still glued together GA The press on nail glue should not rat so strong Pizzy s barking is driving me mad Please reconsider the st gt h of your product
332. l by clicking the Start button then select Contro Panel Performance and Maintenance rs The Hardware tab appears on top of the System Properties dialog box as nm Figure 8 34 lt 3 Click the Device Manager button G2 a The Device Manager displays your computer s hardware in an outli hardware device to display its properties at the top of d Power 4 Click the Computer icon to expand the hardware cat shortcut menu 2 Click the System icon and click the Hardware tab the Device list Right click Advanced Configurati Interface ACPI PC and select Properties from Here you can see which hardware devices are using whi 5 Close the ACPI Properties dialog box Let s look at another hardware device Y will have to expand a 6 Find and right click any hardware device hardware category first and click A ie Resource tab O ources The Device Properties dialog box appears wn in Figure 8 36 Most hardware devices have two or three tabs They aw e General Displays the stat CY ardware and allows you to disable it e Driver Displays details device driver and allows you update the er driver driver provided you have a e Resources Displaygsthe esource currently used by the hardware It s almost always best to let Wi s manage a device s resources automatically Only manually change aicYice s resources if instructed by the hardware manual or technical ora 7 Close all open y en w
333. l hee e appears Oscar here You are my favorite actor Thank you for making my childhood warm and fuzzy How is Slimey Figure 9 32 Qy lt After you ve read a message you can add your own comments and forward it to someone else Besides the typical business correspondence many pe especially like to forward e mails that contain jokes or words of wisdom Original Message add to the mee 1 Find and open the message you want Erara 2 Click the Forward Message but Sine toolbar oO forwarding You need to specify to whom A window appears with the message you want to send or forward the m 3 Type the recipient s e mail a ss in the To field or use the Address Book to enter the recipien s address You can also add your own ents about the message you are forwarding 4 Optional To add y n comments to the message click the message r comments body area and vat You re ready to se orwarded message 5 Click the Sen on on the toolbar to forward the message Remember t D ing Send normally only sends it to the Outbox folder You ll have to click the and Receive button to actually send the message When longer need a message you can delete it to prevent your Inbox folder from e owaing cluttered with dozens of messages Deleting a message is very very easy s how to do it 6 Select the message you want to delete and press the lt Delete gt key The message is removed from the curr
334. l the hardware an your computer Follow the on screen instructions if Windows automatically recogni new hardware If Windows doesn t recognize the new hardware click the Start bu select Control Panel gt Performance and Maintenance System Click the Hard and click the Add Hardware Wizard button Click Next and follow the on scregn instructions to have Windows search for your new hardware So Using the Windows Internet UpdataFe rure If you have a connection to the Internet you ca and install updated system files hardware To Use the Windows Update N S a connection to the Internet click the Start button and select All Programs Win Update Click Scan for updates to view the updates available for your Add to select the updates you want to download click e Windows Internet Update feature to find nd product enhancements Review and install updates e Install Now button when you re finished Restoring Your Comp Use e System Tools S Restore Make sure the Restore my computer to an earlier time option is sel ick Next Select the most recent day that has a restore point when your ect computer wa properly Close any open programs and then click OK Click Next to restore your computer ibe restore point you selected Click OK to close the System Restore window amp To Creat store Point Click the Start button and select All Programs Accessories gt Syste System Restore Select the Cre
335. l the types of networks to which your computer is connected 4 as shown in Figure 10 5 For example your organization may have both a Novell A network and a Microsoft network If this weren t confusing enough computers may and often are connected by several different types of networks Double click the type of network you want to browse O Windows XP displays all the network domains and workgroups to which yo computer is connected as shown in Figure 10 6 You can think of a netwogk domain or Quick Reference workgroup as a neighborhood where computers reside Network domai workgroups are often organized by departments w To Connect to a Network te Double click the network domain that contains the co o want to aiie l browse 1 Open the Printers folder by clicking the Start Since most large organization may have dozens if not hundr of network Button and ein domains and workgroups you will need to know the name network domain or Settinas Prin ree workgroup where the computer you want to browse resid your helpful network ana acre administrator l When you double click a network it displays all the puters connected to it as 2 Click 6 Add a printer shown in Figure 10 7 from the Printer Tasks Find and double click the computer that Qs the files or folders you ala want to use 3 Click Next The computer s shared folders appear in thityadow as shown in Figure 10 8 4 Select A network although the folders you see wil
336. l undoegly be different You know what to do printer or a printer from here double click the folder yo to open no different than in My attached to another computer option and Computer or Windows Explorer appears in the window when you double P P 5 app M click Next to continue click a computer it either means f computer doesn t have any shared folders or else your network administrator hasg t given you the rights to view those shared folders 5 Select the Connect to this printer option and If a shared folder is passwo tected a password dialog box will appear when you double click the folder Si type the password and click OK If you want Windows click Next to remember your pas r the network folder check the Save this password in 6 Click the next to the your password list bom d you won t have to retype the password the next time you desired network domain try to open the fold or workgroup Find and dou ick the shared drive or folder 7 Click the next to the desired computer or server click the desired printer and click Next KY 8 Specify whether you want to use the printer as the default printer and assign a different name to the printer if you want Click Next 9 Click Finish If you have t per permission you will be able to view open and possible modify and delete s on the shared drive or folder Your Organization s Name Here 280 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 10 3 Mapping a
337. laces E Recyde Bin The right pane displays the contents of the folder or drive you selected This pane works just like My Computer a The le isplays the folder d drives essons in this chapter and haven t been skipping ahead by If you have been followagg the now you should know Mou everything there is to know about file management You learned that you ca how to create o e My Computer program to view the contents of your drives and me copy move and delete files and folders This lesson intreduces the folders pane Windows Explorer which you can use to view and subfolders work with th ents of your computer The folders pane lets you see the organization of all l the folders ur computer as shown in Figure 4 33 The folder pane is especially useful EL Accounting for wha ant to copy and move files you can drag the files from the left pane to the A minus symbol El next to a folder indicates that all the subfolders it contains 2 are displayed Click the minus symbol to collapse or hide the subfolders folder in the right pane To view the folders pane simply click the Folders button re a Windows 95 98 or NT user the folder pane replaces Windows Explorer click the appr fro here in My Computer Q s button anytime you want to view or work with the folders on your computer Click My Computer from the Start menu The familiar My Computer window appears In Windows XP you can view the
338. le click the Printers and Other Hardware icon and click the Mouse icon mouse icon under Control Panel icons to change the mouse settings The Buttons tab of the Mouse Properties dialog box appears as shown in Figure 6 22 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Six Customizing Windows 169 Many people complain that the double click speed setting for Windows 1s too fast To adjust the amount of time between clicks drag the Double click speed slider to the right or left You can test the double click speed by double clicking the folder in the Test area box just to the left of the Speed slider 3 Slide the Double click slider to Slow and then double click the folder in the Test area The folder opens when you complete a successful double click 4 Slide the Double click slider to Fast and then double click the folder in the Test area It may be more difficult to open the folder when the speed 1s this fast e You will have to experiment with the Double click slider adjusting it to find a speed that suits your own personal preferences Most people find that the double click s works best somewhere in the middle or on the slower side of the Double click Y bar lt 5 Click the Pointer Options tab W The Pointer Options tab of the Mouse Properties dialog box appears as si yn in Figure 6 23 Here you can also adjust how fast the mouse pointer moye a oss your screen when you move the mouse by dragging the Pointer speed slid igto the ri
339. le domains and workgroups on your network Figure 10 7 The computers connected to a network domain or workgroup Figure 10 8 The shared drive ona computer attached to the network Lesson 10 2 Browsing the Network My Network Places File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q Back v7 lt J wi K Search Key Folders E S k My Network Places Jon on Server Network Tasks lg Add a network place e View network connections Other Places Desktop Entire Network 3 My 4 ee My Documents QA Printers and Faxes Figure 10 4 Click Entire Network to view all the computers on your network KEk Microsoft Windows Network File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q Back gt wi P Search a Folders E ve 5 Microsoft Windows Network Network Tasks 4 Add a network place e View network connections Other Places Entire Network X My Computer E My Documents eS Printers and Faxes Figure 10 6 X Desktop File Edit View Favorites Togls Help Q Back is f Search ey Folders E 2 CD ROM Hard Disk Scheduled Tasks v Go 2 Printers and Faxes Entire Network My Computer My Documents QA Printers and Faxes Figure 10 8 Entire Network File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q sex QJ D P Search Address Entire Network lg Add a network place ows rk e View network Jetwo connections Network Tasks
340. lect Re e To Empty the Recycle Bin Right click the Recycle Bin and select Empty Recycle Bin from the shortcut menu A Closer Look at Files and Folders e There are two parts to a file the file name which can be up to 255 characters and the file extension which is three characters long and tells Windows what type of file it is Your Organization s Name Here 1 22 Microsoft Windows XP N Changing how Information is Displayed e To Change How Items are Displayed Select View from the menu and select one of the five view modes or select a view from the View button list arrow on the toolbar e The five view modes are Thumbnails Tiles Icons List and Details Selecting Multiple Files and Folders e By selecting multiple files and folders you can move copy or delete a group of f d folders all at once gt 9 e ifthe files are next to each other you can click and drag a rectangle arou iles you want to select e e _ If the files are next to each other you can click the first file you wa OX press and hold down the lt Shift gt key and click the last file you want to select KY e ifthe files aren t next to each other you can select random files by folding the lt Ctrl gt key and clicking the files you want to select Finding a File Using the Search Co Re e To Find a File Click the Start button and sele h from the Start menu Use the Search Companion to enter information file name sj e text within the file
341. lg cli ing Dragging and Dropping and Right clicking What an accomplishment Re RG S 2 Y Right click an object to open a shortcut menu that lists everything you can do to the object Pr My Computer i Local Disk C icon Quick Reference To Display a Shortcut Menu for Something e Point to the object and click the right mouse button Select items from the shortcut menu with the left mouse button To Close a Shortcut Menu without Selecting Anything e Click anywhere outside the shortcut menu with the left mouse button or press the lt Esc gt key Your Organization s Name Here 26 Microsoft Windows XP E O O Lesson 1 8 Using the Keyboard Esc ke Function keys or F keys Figure 1 16 i d A standard keyboard GB Your computer may have E a slightly different layout aada BEBE P oag than the one pictured l here PE e E We E L JEE Figure 1 17 Es ai F b Ag l 1 a a The Shut Down Windows Em E I a a TT j JE za a OT LET dialog box Orago Ctrl key Shift key j Numeric keypad Figure 1 16 Alt key Arrow keys Shut Down Windows Copyright 1985 2001 Microsoft Corporation by What do you want the computer to
342. licate internal components Plus most new computers enter a standby or erat mode after a period of time so they don t really consume that much power Wi method is best That s a decision you l have to make on your own Some eir home computer off when they finish using it and leave their office computer t all One of the great computer debates 1s whether you off at all Some people turn off their computer whenever they ve e a television set Others don t turn their computers off ever r or not you turn your computer off you should always follow the next few steps at d of the day when you ve finished using your computer Or Save all your work and exit all your programs Saving any files you ve been working on is the most important step of all when you shut down your computer You should also consider backing up any vital information if you have a tape backup Zip drive or other backup device You can also save any important files to a floppy 2 Click the Start button The Start menu appears 3 Click the Shut Down option from the Start menu The Shut Down Windows dialog box appears as shown in Figure 1 18 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter One The Fundamentals 29 4 Make sure the Shut down option is selected and click the OK button The computer s hard drive hums as Windows cleans up and shuts itself down fo Shut Down NOTE Leaving nothing to chance Windows checks to make sure you
343. lick the taskbar e bottom of the screen and select Properties from the shortcut menu Group similar taskbar 5 We lays taskbar buttons for files opened by the same program in the same buttons Sp area of the taskbar This option is selected by default Displays the Quick Launch bar on the taskbar The Quick Launch bar is a customizable toolbar that lets you display the Windows desktop or start a program with a single click Showthe clock Displays a digital clock on the taskbar This option is selected by default Hide inactive icons Keeps the taskbar notification area from displaying unused icons This option is selected by default Your Organization s Name Here 134 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 5 5 Working with the Quick Launch Toolbar Figure 5 13 f WINDOWS File Edit View Favorites Tools Help You can add a program to Qw O B Osn E rates the Quick Launch toolbar dd Address C WINDOWS C A regedit E REGLOCS OLD E regopt Sj Rhododendron N River Sumida E Santa Fe Stucco SchedLgU 2 sessmor setup E SET3 tmp f SET7 tmp setdebug Date Modified Thursday August 23 2001 6 00 AM ize 64 KB Dragging any program z file or folder on to the fm WINDOWS jane ee gp 11 53AM Quick Launch toolbar adds it as a button Figure 5 13 The Quick Launch toolbar Jet add a group of buttons to the taskbar that you can use to start your favorite programs cro
344. log jutton The WordPad program closes Now make sure the L saved in WordPad is still there C 7 Start the WordPad program again Once you have started WordPad you will ne open the Letter document you saved 8 Click the Open button on the Stand oolbar The Open dialog box appears as shown document you created and igure 3 12 The Open dialog box is very specify the name and location of the file similar to the Save dialog box exge you want to open 9 if necessary navigate to SS folder or floppy disk The Open dialog box will disalay ny WordPad files that have been saved in the practice folder or floppy aide how to select a file you want to open 10 Click the Letter file Shading appears ove etter file indicating it is selected 11 Click the Open n to open the selected file The Letter do appears in the WordPad window When you open a fj half second or so amp tead of selecting a file and clicking the Open button you can save a ply double clicking the file you want to open NOTE Filenames can be up to 255 characters long and contain letters numbers N Close button Tu Open button Other Ways to Open a File e Select File gt Open from the menu Quick Reference To Save a File e Click the Save button on the Standard toolbar On e Select File Save from the menu To Open a File e Click the Open button on the Standard toolbar Or e Sele
345. lot of information at the same time for example if Your Organization s Name Here 162 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 6 7 Adjusting the Screen Color Depth Figure 6 16 You can change the number of colors displayed on your screen for more realistic images Figure 6 17 The Settings tab of the Display Properties dialog box Display Properties 4 bits per pixel Change the color depth here 24 bits per pixel Figure 6 16 Another change you cage to your display settings is the number of colors that are displayed on the screegf amp once or the color depth Why would you want to change the number of colors di don your screen In the past when technology wasn t advanced this was importa e the speed of your computer depended on how many colors it displayed Nowghowever video cards are so advanced that it s almost impossible to see the difference begmec the available settings Unless you do a lot with graphics you probably about changing the color quality on your computer click a blank area on the desktop and select Properties from the rtcut menu VA Display Properties dialog box appears W Click the Settings tab QY The Settings tab appears in front of the Display Properties dialog box as shown in A Figure 6 17 The Color quality drop down list is where you can select the color depth KY you want to use The Color quality drop down list displays the current color depth setting 3
346. lt color Active Window use large icons amp scheme lindow Message Box i Show shadows under menus Show window contents Hide underlined letter d navigation until I press the Alt key a Y The Effects dialog box W i Figure 6 1 o Windows and buttons v The Advanced Color scheme Appearance dialog box Default blue ____ Sine Normal Normal Selected Window Text Fi gure 6 8 Message Text If you select a windows and buttons setting other than Windows Classic it will override the following settings except in some older programs Item Color 1 Deskin J JE Figure 6 10 Another way to per nalize Windows is to change the screen colors Windows screen colors include all the b Ste parts of a window the title bar the menu scroll bars etc Windows comes with color schemes a far cry from the myriad schemes of older versions 1 igqveclick a blank area on the desktop and select Properties from the rtcut menu e Display Properties dialog box appears Click the Appearance tab The Appearance tab appears in front of the Display Properties dialog box as shown in Figure 6 8 This is where you can use a color scheme to change the appearance of many screen elements all at once Click the Color scheme combo box and select Olive Green from the scheme list The preview area of the dialog box displays how your screen will look with the selected color schem
347. mat command ceeeeeeeeeeees 208 formatting text 16 0 BSS 4 cr ee a 70 LONE ty PO steed ie eon 70 paragraph alignment 008 73 using bold italics and underlining 72 forwarding e mail ceeceeeeeeees 269 fragmentation oniranu ai 213 H Bard dis koeren e 8 Oo defragmenting ccccccceceeeeeeeees errors detecting and repairing 21 y freeing UP SPACE icira isena viewing contents Of 0008 Ls hardware configuring with the Derg ic 234 removing driver AE E ae 234 help Contents WOp uci tenes 74 Index tab W 76 Searc hta Ducere es 76 Help A E a N E E E ETE 2 highlighting texterna aaa 64 history of viewed Web pages 256 HOME KG Vorne ia a anaes 27 DOMENIDA ER 247 home page changing ceeeeeees 255 E ODO T 253 HOMA l estan zantintiesdiinlsadorsitieeseneeadaceteatt 260 hub Network oss scucncmanstocensscasnseasessacetssss 276 BYP era an E 250 I images saving from Web pages 258 insertion PoiNt ornen ee installing HardWare sorra E a Windows components Internet CONNECUNG tOna cs introduction to Internet Connection Wi Internet Service Proyider 246 ISDN Internet conngg Mian ee 247 ISP Aces See t Service Provider S keyboard gt EEEE ae ee 26 keyboard conPOinations ccccceeeees 26 KilOD Yt Oi sevccceevaccstnde Sw dsicceenee 89 kil OF KB nonnina 89 WO
348. ment your computer s ive but it also places the programs you use most often at the ard drive so they start faster Accessories gt System Tools Disk Defragmenter Defragment Now Defragment Now button Quick Reference To Defragment your Hard Disk 1 Open My Computer or Windows Explorer 2 Right click the disk you want to scan select Properties from the shortcut menu and click the Tools tab 3 Click the Defragment Now button 4 Click the Analyze button and click Defragment Your Organization s Name Here 2 1 4 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 8 8 The General tab of the Drive Properties dialog box Figure 8 9 The Disk Cleanup dialog box Lesson 8 5 Freeing Up Space on your Hard Disk Local Disk C Properties amp Disk Cleanup for C Disk Cleanup More Options P You can use Disk Cleanup to free 1 Sy space on C ag R Files to delete Downloaded Program Files OKB Temporary Intemet Files 33 433KB C 32 Recycle Bin 472 488 K __ C a Temporary files 695 KB C WebClient Publisf ry Files 32KB g General Tools Hardware Sharing Security lt p Local Disk NTFS Type File system W Used space I Free space 2 620 309 504 bytes 12 473 044 992 bytes Capacity 15 093 354 496 bytes Total amount of disk sp e you gain 33 433 KB s are ActiveX controls and Java applets from the Intemet when yo
349. menu QY the network drive you want to disconnect from and select Disconnect Network Drive from the 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Ten Networking with Windows XP 297 Connecting to a Network Printer e To Connect to a Network Printer Open the Printers folder by clicking the Start button and selecting Settings Printers and Faxes Click Add a printer from the Printer Tasks panel click Next select A network printer or a printer attached to another computer option and click Next to continue Select the Connect to this printer option and click Next Click the next to the desired network domain or workgroup Click the next to the desired computer or server click the desired printer and click Next Specify whether you want to use the printer as the default printer and assign a different name to the printer if you want Click Next and click Finish Connecting to a Network Printer e To Connect to a Network Printer Open the rinte folder by clicking the Start button and S selecting Settings Printers and Faxes Click L Add a printer from the Printer Tasks CN click Next select A network printer or a printer attached to another computer option gt k Next to continue Select the Connect to this printer option and click Next Click the the desired network domain or workgroup Click the next to the desired computer or s R click the desired printer and click Next Specify whether you want to use the pr
350. mething Select the text or Copy button on the Standard toolbar lt Ctrl gt lt C gt Q e To Paste a Cut or Copied Obje e the insertion point where you want to paste the text or object Click the Paste button tandard toolbar or select Edit Paste from the menu or press lt Ctrl gt lt V gt a Changing the a e and Size e To Change Font lect the pt size from the Font Size list on the Formatting toolbar or select Format eh the menu and select the font size in the dialog box e To Chan yo Select the font from the Font Style list on the Formatting toolbar or select Format t from the menu and select the font type in the Font dialog box Your Organization s Name Here 82 Microsoft Windows XP i QY To Save a File in a Different File Format Select File Save As from the menu select the file Using Bold Italics and Underline e Format text with bold italics or underling by clicking the corresponding button Bold Italics or Underline on the Formatting toolbar or by selecting Format Font from the menu and selecting the formatting from the Font Style list You can also press the lt Ctrl gt key and lt B gt for Bold lt I gt for Italics lt U gt for Underlining Changing Paragraph Alignment rach and then either ar or by selecting ent from the Alignment e Change a paragraph s alignment by placing the insertion point in the par clicking the Align Left Center or Align Rig
351. mouse button used for Whenever you right g it brings up a shortcut menu that lists everything you can do to the object ou re unsure or curious about what you can do with an object point to it and click e right mouse button A shortcut menu will appear with a list of commands related to ject or area you right clicked ht mouse button shortcut menus are a great way to give commands to Windows because ou don t have to wade through several levels of unfamiliar menus when you want to do A something i KY E 1 Move the pointer over the Recycle Bin icon on your desktop and click the right mouse button A shortcut menu appears with a list of commands related to the Recycle Bin as shown in Figure 1 13 Recycle Bin 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter One The Fundamentals 25 2 Point to and click the Empty Recycle Bin option on the shortcut menu with the left mouse button You still use the left mouse button to select menu items even if they are found in a right mouse button shortcut menu A dialog box appears asking you if you are sure you want to delete the contents of the Recycle Bin Better play it safe and 3 Click No with the left mouse button Next you realize the clock displayed on the far right side of the taskbar is ten minutes fast You can display the clock s properties by right clicking the clock 4 Move the pointer over the Clock located on the far right side of the Windows Taskbar and click the
352. mp Folder Let s make sure Double click the Temp Folder to open it The contents of the Temp Folder appear in the windoy Sure enough the My Stuff folder has been copied Click the Up button to move back to the Next we ll delete a folder Click the Temp Folder to select it mgr press the lt Delete gt key A dialog box may appear asking you to Click Yes to delete the folder The Temp Folder and all its cnt deleted and disappear from the window l Windows places any deleted files oMolders in the Recycle Bin in case you change your mind later on and decide you os restore the file or folder We ll discuss the 10 11 directory 12 firm the action 13 Recycle Bin in an upcomin n NOTE Deleting a fo be dangerous Before you delete a folder make sure it y important files If you don t know what the contents of a doesn t com folder are ouldn t delete it Delete the My folder by repeating the procedure in Steps 12 and 13 and then clon e My Computer window ng and moving folders to locations on the same drive but you can a different drive by dragging it to the drive icon where you want it t see the drive or folder where you want to move or copy something you d My Computer window and drag the folder from one window to the other Can Open a sec Quick Reference To Move a Folder e Drag the folder to the desired location you might have to open other My Computer dow er 1
353. mputer s drives and folders Two controls on this toolbar are particularly helpful 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Working with a Windows Program 63 e Look in gt Practice Look In List Click to list the drives on your computer and the current folder then select the drive and or folder whose contents you want to display i Up One Level button Click to move up one folder If necessary follow your instructor s directions to select the appropriate drive and folder where your practice files are located Next you need to give your file a name 3 Click the File name text box The File name box is where you give your file a name some symbols You can t use the symbols lt gt in a file name xO 4 Type Letter in the File name text box This will save the document you created in a file named Letter in the flop 5 Click Save to save your document to the floppy disk lt sO disk d of a floppy disk d or even turn off d can be retrieved The floppy disk hums as your computer saves the Letter file to it NOTE You can also save any files you ve created to your compute which is normally where most people save their files ins Now that you ve saved the file to a disk you can safely close the computer knowing that your WordPad Letter file is sto whenever you want to work on it again 6 Close the WordPad program by clicking its C
354. n D Open the Control Panel double click Add Remove Programs and click Install Your Organization s Name Here 240 Microsoft Windows XP 7 Which of the following statements is NOT true A You can remove most programs on your computer by opening the Control Panel double clicking Add Remove Programs selecting the program you want to remove and clicking the Add Remove button B Everything included on the Windows XP CD ROM is installed when you install Windows C Pressing lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt lt Delete gt opens the Close Program window which you can use to forcefully end a program that has stopped responding D The default printer is the printer Windows always prints to unless Oy otherwise A 8 The most common printer port is COM1 True or False amp A Computers have a limited amount of resources whi used by hardware devices If two hardware devices try to use the same oP you have a hardware conflict 9 Which of the following statements is NOT true eo B Windows XP should automatically recognize a all any Plug and Play hardware devices that you ve added when you first tu e computer C You can use the Add Hardware Wizard i the Centro Panel to install your hardware if Windows XP fails to recognize it D Plug and Play devices get their name e you spend a lot of time playing around with them to get them to work E Homework 1 Use Disk Cleanup to cle ecessary files from yo
355. n the illustrations at the beginning lesson Illustrations show what your screen should look like as you follow the lesson and describe 24 Microsoft Excel 2000 controls dialog boxes and processes Figure 4 3 The Numbers tab of the Format Cells dialog box Figure 4 4 The Expense Report worksheet values before being formatted Figure 425 Oo The oe worksheet values a An easy to understand introduction explains the task or topic covered in the lesson anc what you ll be doing in the exercise V You can also format values by using the Formatting toolbar or by selecting Tips and traps appear in RY Format gt Cells margin from the menu and Icons and pictures r in the A margin showin hat to click or look fo Lesg6Q74 2 Formatting Values or e Format Cells 21 xi Preview of the selected number format Select a number category Select a number format Date formats display date and time serial numbers as date values Use Time Formats to display just the time portion Ee G c G A A B Expense Report Submitte Expense Report Submitte 1 15 99 1 15 99 Date Type Payment Price Per Quantity Tax Total Date Type Payment Price Pert Quantity Tax Total 1 3 99 Mileage 0 46 14 72 3 Jan 99 Mileage 0 46 14 72 1 3 99 Parking Cash 0 7 3 Jan 99 Parking Cash J 0 7 00 1 3 99 Cell Phone AMEX 3 Jan 99 Cell Phone AMEX 23 4
356. n use AY Table 6 4 Common Screen Resolutions The highest resolution you can as depends on how much memory 1s installed on your video card Most video S enough memory to display at least 800 by 600 resolution a No longer supported in Windows XP 640 by 480 resolution setting Larger and cheaper monitors de 640 by 480 resolution obsolete S This has been the standard resoluti g for most computers and is the lowest setting on newer monitors This a good in between resolution allowing you to display quite ae iss on the screen without having to use a magnifying glass to Use this setting if you have a 15 inch or 800 by 600 17 inch monitor the images can st g small and difficult to read at this point unless you To Change the Screen LT i The new standard a68 puts a lot of information on your screen but Quick Reference have a large monitor Yse this setting if you have a 17 inch or larger monitor Resolution 1 Right click a blank area on the desktop and select Properties from the how expensive the graphics card in your computer is there may shortcut menu igher modes of resolution which continue to display more and 9 Click the Settings tab rmation and smaller and smaller images 3 3 Slide the Screen resolution slider to the right or left to select the resolution you want to use 4 Click OK you re worki large spreadsheet graphic files or multiple windows or when you amp t see a
357. n window Click an icon to switch all the other windows E ccanent worred GM D to its window Figure 2 13 Figure 2 15 Pressing lt Alt gt lt Tab gt lists all the programs that see are currently running A Backspace CE ji c o MMA g E CIIL lee calculator poong s JEJEJE EPEE oH O JLIGIE Figure 2 15 The active window s icon is darker blue to show it is pressed down on Ty start Meam fa F Calcuiator et the taskbar Figure 2 N onl k in one window at a time The window you re working with is called the active l and always appears on top of any other windows that you have open If you think t it you do the same thing when you work at your desk When you want to work on a ce of paper you place it on top of everything else on your desk You j ove several programs or windows open and running simultaneously but you can This lesson explains how to switch between the programs you re running There are actually KY several ways to switch between windows and we ll cover all of them in this lesson First you need to make sure you have several programs running 1 Make sure the WordPad program is still open If it isn t open click the Start button and select All Programs Accessories gt WordPad Notice an icon for the WordPad program appears on the taskbar Next you need to open another program that comes with Windows XP the calculator 2002 CustomGuide In
358. n you g k ith the station drop lists to To Open the Station Drop Ac 7 10 Radio Station Drop Lists Lists Neist Description e Click on the arrows on AS Featured Windows Media Player displays a list of stations it thinks might interest you right side of the radi Stations station drop lists bars listed in Table 1 10 Recently Played Windows Media Player displays a list of the radio stations you ve listened to most Stations recently My Stations You can put your favorite radio stations in this list 2002 CustomGuide Inc Lesson 7 13 Copy Chapter Seven The Free Programs 195 Music to a CD or Portable Device with Windows Media Player Check the songs that you would like oa OEE lt Close of Autumn This World Bus Driver Coming Home to copy S of whee l Metronomic Underground Cybele s Reverie Percolator Les Yper Sound Spark Plug Olv 26 The Noise of Carpet Tomorrow Is Already Here Emperor Tomato Ketchup Monstre Sacre Motoroller Scalatron Slow Fast Hazel Anonymous Collective 18 Item s Total Time 80 Minutes Figure 7 18 Not only can you add music to your Media Library but you can Mso take those songs from the Media Library and copy them onto a CD or a portable While copying music you should not perform any ot music takes a lot of computer power 1 ace such as an MP3 player S on your computer copying To copy mu
359. nce you ve learned these basic skills in WordPad you can apply them to just about every other Windows program This is one of the longest chapters about Windows XP so we have a lot of ground to cover Let s get started 52 Figure 3 1 Starting the WordPad program Figure 3 2 The Insert menu Figure 3 3 The Insert Date and Time dialog box Start button QY gs Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 3 1 How to Use Menus Ei Document WordPad File Edit View Insert Format Help Dae 44 gt My Documents FR Activate Windows Internet S Windows Catalog 3 Windows Update Microsoft Word 7 HyperSnap DX 4 fan Accessibility A Communications a Accessories fn Administrative Tools Common fan Applications AS 7 Microsoft Excel Design ran Entertainment Windows Media Playe an Games an Internet at Palm Desktop E Reference an Entertainment fan System Tools WOD Address Book amp Calculator Command Prompt F Notepad YW Paint Windows Messenger v v v v v v v Yv v Y fan Startup Internet Explorer 4 Microsoft Outlook a Microsoft Outlook Newsreader Program Compatibility Wizard Q synchronize Tour Windows XP All Programs Windows Explorer s G Windows Movie Maker Logoff O Shut D E WordPad Figure 3 1 AShilable formats 12 26 2001 01 12 26 2001 12 26 26 Dec 01 Wednesday December 26 20 December 26 2001 Wednesda
360. nd was very displeased with them While presS my Wa Fanci Nails on went to pet my poodle Pizzy and db my hand and palm cW to her shaaay little pelt That was in July For Help press F Cut button Other Ways to Cut B QPyou should already know how to select text in a document Once text is selected you e Select Edit Cut from Coat it to another place in the document by cutting it and then pasting elsewhere Cutting the menu a sting text is one of the more common tasks you will use in your programs Anything o Press lt Ctrl gt lt X gt u cut is placed in a temporary storage area called the Windows Clipboard The Clipboard is A available to any Windows program so you can cut and paste text between different programs 1 Select the entire subject line Paste button Remember how to select text Point to the beginning or end of the text you want to Other Ways to Paste select hold down the left mouse button drag the cursor across the text and release the e Select Edit Paste mouse button from the menu Now you can cut the selected text to the Windows clipboard e Press lt Ctrl gt lt V gt 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Working with a Windows Program 69 10 11 Click the Cut button on the Standard toolbar The selected text the current date disappears from WordPad and is placed in the Windows Clipboard ready to be moved to a new location NOTE The Windows Clipboard can only hol
361. nd drivers for your hardware A devices such as a driver for a discontinued foreign printer KY e Music A new file format called MP3 is revolutionizing the music industry MP3 files are sound files that you can listen to on your computer They have digital CD quality sound but use compression so that they are 11 times smaller than the CD equivalent and small enough to be easily downloadable from the Internet e Viruses Just kidding the last thing the world you want to download from the Internet is a computer virus Since you won t always know where a program or file you want to download comes from you should make sure your computer has a virus protection program installed before you download anything from the Internet 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Nine Exploring the Internet 259 Other than the slight risk of contracting a virus if you don t have virus protection software installed the only other downside of downloading files off the Internet is how long it can take especially if you re downloading a huge file over a 33 6 modem connection to the Internet In this lesson you ll learn how to download files and images from the Internet and save them to your hard disk When you come across a picture or image on the Internet that you really like here s how you can permanently save it to your computer s hard drive 1 Right click the image you want to save and select Save Picture As from the shortcut menu
362. nd keyboard and start programs How to minimize maximize move and switch between programs File management How to copy move rename delete and find files How to customize Windows to suit your own personal tastes An overview of applications included with Windows XP How to work on a network How to use the Internet CustomGuide com 1502 Nicollet Avenue Minneapolis MN 55403 888 903 2432 www customguide com 2001 by CustomGuide Inc 1502 Nicollet Avenue South Suite 1 Minneapolis MN 55403 This material is copyrighted and all rights are reserved by CustomGuide Inc No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of CustomGuide Inc We make a sincere effort to ensure the accuracy of the material described herein however CustomGuide makes no warranty express or implied with respect to the quality correctness reliability accuracy or freedom from error of this document or the products it describes Data used in examples and sample data files are intended to be fictional Any resemblance to real persons or companies is entirely coincidental The names of software products referred to in this manual are claimed as trademarks of their respective companies CustomGui
363. nding on how it is set up Start Menu Figure 1 4 Quick Launch Toolgg System Tray Area You might find the Windows CG a bit confusing and overwhelming the first time you see it Nothing on the screen AS amiliar to you where do you even start This lesson will help you become familiagwith the main Windows screen known as the desktop There isn t a step by step exercise re in this lesson all you have to do is look at Figure 1 4 and then refer to Table jor Parts of the Windows XP Screen to see what everything you re looking at mean ost of all relax This lesson is only meant to help you get aquatinted with Windows yot lon t have to memorize anything 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter One The Fundamentals 17 Table 1 2 Major Parts of the Windows XP Screen Description Desktop This is the large background area of the Windows screen You can customize the desktop by adding shortcuts to your favorite programs documents and printers You can also change the look of the desktop to fit your mood and personality My Documents My Documents is a special folder that provides a convenient place to store files and documents you create on your computer My Computer My Computer lets you see everything on your computer Double click the My amp Computer icon on the desktop to browse through your files and folders My Network If you re on a network the My Network Places icon will appear on your deskto Places
364. need to clean and organize your files and folders from ou would the contents of a file cabinet This chapter explains how to ter by creating folders to store related information how to move and copy files b folders how to delete and rename files and folders and how to retrieve a deleted file if ySu change your mind You can perform file management using several different programs My Computer Windows Explorer Files and Settings Transfer Wizard and the Open and Save dialog boxes found in most programs 88 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 4 1 Understanding Storage Devices Folders and Files Figure 4 1 How information is stored in a file cabinet Figure 4 2 How information is stored on a disk A file cabinet s information is S A folder may contain several organized and grouped into files and even several folders subfolders Figure 4 1 ea O Love Letters Letter to Bill A computer stores a information on disks xO Letters Letter to Mary nforrfation on a disk is A folder may contain several nized and grouped into files and subfolders olders or directories Figure 4 2 In order to unders ed file management you need to understand how your computer stores information Fileng cabinets store information in files which are organized and grouped in folders and i big drawers Computers also store information in files which are also organized ouped in folders and stored not in big drawers but on
365. nformation nee W Used space QY 7380 bytes 2 31 GB s or remove programs Local Disk C Figure 4 4 G a MN Free space 3 616 bytes 11 7GB i i Capacity r093 354 496 bytes 14 0GB The Properties dialog box Selita Devices with Removebts Storage for a Local Disk C drive Oy yet hacen i My Documents Figure 4 5 gt Control Panel A O The My Computer toolbar Details _ Compress drive to save disk space _ My Computer D Allow Indexing Service to index this disk for fast file searching System Folder melissa on Shared server G Folders o Figure 4 3 Moves back Moves back Changes how or up to the or up to the contents previous previous of the folder folder or level are displayed pa Search ay Folders ki Search for files Displays a and folders on history of files your computer you have or on the opened network recently can vy ie information stored on your computer s drives in much the same way by ope e drive you want to access This lesson will show you how to look at the drives sg Start oltre and files in your computer Start button Click the Start button and select the My Computer icon A The My Computer window appears as shown in Figure 4 3 The main window lists all the drives on the computer Since your computer may have different drives the contents of your computer may differ from those shown in Figure 4 3 Want to see rg what s inside something All you have to do is double
366. nienn e e e a i 80 Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders s nnnnnnnnnnonsosonsosesonsesonsessosesessessesens 87 Lesson 4 1 Understanding Storage Devices Folders and Files cccccccceeeeeeeeeees 88 Lesson 4 2 Using My Computer to See What s in Your Computer 00000000000000000000000 90 Ibessom4 3 Opening a Old ks eet eee E Wet aad eran O eae anes 92 Lesson 4 4 Creating and Renaming a Folder ou ccccccecsccceceeeeeeceeeceeeeeceeseeeseseeeeseeess 94 Lesson 4 5 Copying Moving and Deleting a Folder cccccccccccccccccecceendygecseceeeseeeeeeees 96 Lesson 4 6 Opening Renaming and Deleting a File eee eees E E 98 Lesson 4 7 Copying and Moving a File ccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees A asks 100 Lesson 4 8 Restoring a Deleted File and Emptying the Recycle Bin A T E T 102 Lesson 4 9 A Closer Look at Files and Folders ccccccecceeeges Ue eres 104 Lesson 4 10 Changing How Information is Displayed KA See 106 Lesson 4 11 Selecting Multiple Files and Folders gt ene 108 Lesson 4 12 Finding a File Using the Search Companion p R 110 Lesson 4 13 Managing the Search Companion RA 112 Lesson 4 14 Using the Folders Pane Windows ExploraQ ee eee ee ee ee te 114 Lesson 4 15 File Management Using the Folders Par ig 0 0 0 ccccccccccccccceeeeeeeees 116 Lesson 4 16 Using MS DOS cn OO Sag Aandi ences dentine E AT 118 Chapter
367. nk area on the desktop and select Properties from the QY shortcut menu A The Display Properties dialog box appears KY 2 Click the Settings tab The Settings tab appears in front of the Display Properties dialog box as shown in Figure 6 14 The Screen resolution is where you can change the resolution setting Look at the numbers of pixels that are displayed that is the current display resolution 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Six Customizing Windows 161 Table 6 4 Common Screen Resolutions Description Higher Resolutions Require More Speed and Video Memory Slide the bar in the Screen area all the way to the left Depending on how new your monitor is the number of pixels should change to 800 bv 600 an older monitor might go to 640 by 480 If your slider is already set at 640 by 480 or 800 by 600 move the slider one notch to the right to 800 by 600 or 1024 by 768 Click Apply A dialog box similar to the one shown in Figure 6 15 appears giving you 15 seconds to decide if you like the new resolution setting If you do like it click the Yes button if you don t click the No button If you don t do anything Windows assumes you don t like the new resolution setting or your monitor can t display the new resolution and amp switches back to the original resolution Click No to return to the original resolution setting AS For a more complete description of the various resolution settings you ca
368. ntrol Panel in Classic View e Click F Classic View in the panel on the left side of the window Your Organization s Name Here 152 Microsoft Windows XP Vv ee Lesson 6 2 Changing the Date and Time Figure 6 4 Date and Time Properties 4 Change th gt by clicking Date amp Time Time Zone O The Date amp Time tab of Date the Date Time Properties November dialog box 1 2 3 Figure 6 5 45 6 7 8 amp o 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 j j 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 a Using the time and dates i aa 15 16 17 control in the Date Time roo a 422 23 24 Properties dialog box entemb 3 29 30 Current time zone Central Standard Time i Figure 6 6 L o Cancel _ The Time Zone tab of the pi ii day a E ls To Date Time Properties Figure 6 4 change the day click the correct day dialog box Date and Time Properties E Date amme a Click the number you BB GMT 06 00 Central Time US amp Canada 3 want to adjust hour minute or second 1 08 15PM Click the up or down arrow to increase or decrease the selected hour minute or second Figure 6 5 Your compaaterhas its own built in clock that has many purposes including determining when you cr agt 4 modified a file For this reason you should make sure the date and time are set our computer This lesson will show you how to set the date and time for your if you find it needs adjusting r right area of the taskbar normally di
369. ntry and overwrite the existing information Select the cell range G5 G17 and click the Currency Style button on the Formatting toolbar A dollar sign and two decimal places are added to the values in the selected cell range Q Ways to Apply Select the cell range F5 F17 and click the Percent Style button on Currency Formatting the Formatting toolbar Excel applies percentage style number formatting to the information in the Tax s Notice there isn t a decimal place Excel rounds any decimal places to the neare e number That isn t suitable here you want to include a decimal place to acgurately sh the exact tax rate With the Tax cell range still selected click the Increa imal button on the Formatting toolbar Excel adds one decimal place to the information in the tax rate Format Date umn using the Next you want to change the date format in the date column sn button on the Formatting toolbar so you will have to format the da Format Cells dialog box The Formatting toolbar is great for quickly applying the most cggjymon formatting options to cells but it doesn t offer every available formatting o s e and or use every possible character formatting option you have to use the Fo alog box You can open the Format Cells dialog box by either selecting Form rom the menu or right clicking and selecting Format Cells from the shortcut me 7 With the Date cell range still sel fect Format Cells from the menu select
370. o ick Launch toolbar If necessary enter your user name and password and click Conne Displaying a Specifa feb Page e To Display a sree Page Type the Web address in the lrtexiee Address bar and press lt Enter gt Sometimes ee may not be available for viewing This can be caused by a Web server being down where the Web page is stored by Internet congestion or by the Web page no longer men ees to the Web page later Browse Web rlink is a link to another Web page or file The pointer changes to a whenever it is itioned over a hyperlink o Use a Hyperlink Click the hyperlink with the t pointer amp Q To Go Back to the Previous Page Click the Back button on the toolbar e To Stop the Transfer of Information Click the Stop button on the toolbar e To Refresh a Web Page Click the Refresh button on the toolbar e To Return to a Web Address you Typed in the Address Bar Click Address bar s arrow and select the Web address 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Nine Exploring the Internet 271 Search the Web e To Search the Web for Information Using Internet Explorer Click the Search button on the toolbar type the word or phrase you want to search for in the Search the Web for box and click Search then click the link for the Web page you want to look at Click the Search button on the toolbar to close the search panel e To Search the Web for Information Using a Search Engine Type the We
371. oa e a y mode or even turn itself off if the computer has been idle 1 SUS ick a blank area on the desktop and select Properties from the ut menu Wy de the Screen Saver tab The Screen Saver tab appears in front of the Display Properties dialog box as shown in isplay Properties dialog box appears gt Figure 6 17 N Click the Screen Saver list arrow KY A list of the available screen savers appears 4 Select the 3D Pipes screen saver from the list A preview of the 3D Pipes screen saver appears in the preview area of the dialog box You can also preview the screen saver in full screen mode by clicking the Preview button You can change the settings for the selected screen saver by clicking the Settings button 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Six Customizing Windows 165 5 Click the Settings button A dialog box appears with settings for the selected screen saver The options listed in this dialog box will differ depending on the screen saver There may be options for how many and what type of objects should appear on the screen how fast the objects should move or if you want to hear sounds when the screen saver is active it depends on which screen saver is selected 6 Click Cancel to close the 3D Pipes Setup dialog box You can assign a password to your screen saver to protect your computer from unauthorized use by clicking the On resume password protect check box Windows will not clear
372. oard e Refer to Table 1 6 Special Keys and Their Functions gojects If you re working with text the lt Delete gt ght of the insertion point Use the ee to fix your typing mistakes it erases characters to the left of the inserti Your Organization s Name Here 28 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 1 18 The Shut Down Windows dialog box Start button Lesson 1 9 Exiting Windows and Turning off Your Computer Shut Down Windows f Copyright 1985 2001 Macrosoft Corporation What do you want the computer to do Shut down Click the arrow and select Shut down Ends your session and shuts down Windows so that you can safely turn off power and click OK Figure 1 18 At the end of the day when you ve finish ising your computer you need to shut down Windows before you turn your comp off Shutting down gives Windows a chance to tidy up after itself saving information 1 omputer s memory to the local disk cleaning up temporary files and verifying tha ve saved any changes you made to any files you worked on Should I turn my compute should turn your comp finished working on itg People who turn th rains off at night say that keeping the computer on 24 hours a day 7 days a week w the computer s mechanical components and wastes electricity Other people say that fgavi g your computer on keeps temperature fluctuations down which is better for the g uter s de
373. of most Windows programs There is often more information about o use a program under the Help feature than there is in the program manual Many peo tually learn how to use entire programs by simply using the Help feature of the when they don t know how to do something A p allows you to try new exciting things in programs all by yourself It simply cannot be ressed how important and useful the Help feature is There are several ways you can get help A in Windows we ll look at them in the next couple of lessons For this lesson imagine that you ve seen several of your co workers use different sized fonts in their WordPad documents You decide it s time you learned how to change the size of fonts in WordPad so you decide to use the help feature Most Windows applications have a Help menu listed at the far right of the menu bar You can also open Help pressing the lt F1 gt key 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Working with a Windows Program 75 Make sure the WordPad program is opening loading the active window and press the lt F1 gt key The Help window appears with the Contents tab in front as shown in Figure 3 25 One The lt F1 gt key displays way to get help is by going to Contents Using Help s Contents is similar to using a help on what you re book s table of contents Help s Contents is a good way to get general information on a doing topic especially if it s a subject you re not familiar wi
374. olitaire program opens as shown in Figure 1 11 amp 5 Play a game of Solitaire and practice dragging and dropping the cards If you don t know how to play Solitaire you can still practice your dragging and dropping Just point to a card click and hold down the mouse button and move Ue around the screen Release the mouse button to drop the card If you try drop a card in an invalid location the card will be whisked back to its original pile A taire 6 Click the Close button located in the top right corner of the S The Solitaire program closes Close button program to exit the program when you ve finished playing Okay there have to be more things to drag and drop besides cards Alth we ll be covering this stuff later on Table 1 5 Things you can drag and drop ome examples of when you can use drag and drop Table 1 5 Things you can drag and drop 5 You can do this By dragging this Fe Move a window to a new Drag the window by its it Ona drop it in a new location on the location on the screen screen amp Move a file to a new folder Drag the file and drop Ram the desired folder Change the size of awindow Drag the be iG corners of the window Quick Reference To Drag and Drop Scroll a window to see Drag the scR box the little elevator up or down the scroll bar and a o ea something located off screen drop it anew location bale aceon eae tae pit want to drag and drop Move just about anything on
375. om a list button to the left of the To field click the name of the recipient in the Name list then click the To button Click OK when you re finished 4 Click the Subject field and enter the message s subject 5 Click the pointer in the lower pane and type the message 6 Optional Check the spelling of your message by selecting Tools gt Spelling from the menu 7 Optional Attach a file by clicking the Attach button on the toolbar and then selecting the file in the Insert Attachment dialog box 8 Click the Send Message button on the toolbar to send the message Your Organization s Name Here 264 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 9 11 Adding a Name to the Address Book Figure 9 26 atone ma RE The Address Book window m B et S amp Eo aye Monique monicacota hotmail com The Select Names window i J Ae he Figure 9 28 The Contact Properties Add to Bcc list dialog box me D Figure 9 26 Properties Name Home Business Personal Other NetMeeting Digital IDs C Enter name and e mail information about this contact here y First Middle Title 7 Display E Mail Addresses O f C Send E Mail using plai ext only wO Unidyr only write to two or three people it s almost impossible to memorize the e mail
376. omputer These programs are usually named Setup Install or something similar Quick Reference To Install Software 1 Find the Program s disk or disks and insert it or the first disk into the disk drive 2 Click the Start button click Control Panel Add or Remove Programs 3 Click the Add New Programs icon 4 Click the button where the program you want to install is lf this doesn t work click Cancel close the Control Panel open My Computer find the disk drive or folder where the program you want to install is located and double click the installation program usually called SETUP 5 Follow the on screen instructions to install the program Your Organization s Name Here 220 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 8 17 The Add or Remove Programs window lists all the Windows programs that are installed on your computer Figure 8 18 The Confirm File Deletion dialog box Lesson 8 8 Removing Software F Add or Remove Programs cor Currently installed programs Sort by Name Change or EJ Adobe Acrobat 5 0 Size Remove Programs Click here for support information Used occasionally i LastUsedOn 1 3 2002 i F To change this program or remove it from your CRE computer dick Change or Remove Sabamin Add New Programs i5 AvantGo Client j5 b3d Projector BlueKite 0 89MB Add Remove Code Jedi Shadow Plan for PalmOS 2 69MB Windows Components CuteFTP
377. on t press lt Enter gt when you reach the end of a line WordPad will automatically move the text to the next line for you This feature 1s called word wrap When you re finished typing compare your letter with the one in Figure 3 9 While you type gord wrap continues text from one line to the next without making you press Enter Quick Reference To Open WordPad e Click on the Start button then All Programs Accessories then WordPad To Enter Text in WordPad 1 Place the insertion point in WordPad by clicking in the WordPad screen 2 Type your text Your Organization s Name Here 60 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 3 10 Use the keyboard or the mouse to move the insertion point in a document AS point to the very beginning of the line 4 Thank you for your int available un wl _ Placing the insertion point Lesson 3 5 Editing Text Ei Document WordPad File Edit View Insert Format Help Cae Sk mo amp v 10 Subject Glue Trauma 9 29 01 To the La Fanci Nails Come gbt a set of your press on nails last month and was very N m While pressing my La Fanci Nails on went to pet my po iz my hand and nails stuck to her shaggy little pelt That was in August Move the insertion i or by using the point with the arrow pgi ee te mouse to click keys on your ip press O OOO OOOO where you want to computer s place the inse
378. on and speak into the microphone 2 Click the Stop button when you re finished To Play a Sound e Click the gt Play button Your Organization s Name Here 184 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 7 7 Create pictures and maps with the Paint program Table seers Lesson 7 5 Paint is untitled Paint Paint Tools To see what a tool does point to it for a second The name of the tool will appear after a second Colors Select an outline color by clicking the color with the left mouse button Select a fill color by mw ist iit Lis clicking a color with gal ea eee the right mouse button H Figure 7 7 Paint is a drawing program that gogmase ith Windows XP You can use Paint to create and view pictures and graphics incl a maps artwork and photographs 1 Click the Start b Qna select All Programs Accessories gt Paint The Paint progr Sypcars as shown in Figure 7 7 Paint includes a lot of tools to create pictu Q Table 7 6 The Paint Tools for their descriptions Paint is the most c ex of the free accessories that come with Windows If you want to learn more about how to use paint take a look the tables in this lesson then move on to the next lesson ry _ aint Desn Use Paint to create edit and view pictures and graphics E of File s Used Bitmap BMP graphic files Draw shapes add text paint use maximum number of possible colors
379. once e control with the mouse or press lt Tab gt to move to the gt lt Tab gt to move to the previous control until you arrive at e To Select a Dialog Box Control next control in the dialog box or the desired control Entering Text in sge WordPad Program e Place the inserti Gir WordPad by clicking in the WordPad screen and type your text Editing Text e Move th to pla O Tage Text Move the insertion point where you want to insert the text and then type the text nt to insert fon point by pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard or by clicking where you want insertion point elete Text The lt Delete gt key deletes text before or to the right of the insertion point The Por key deletes text after or to the left of the insertion point e To Save a File Click the Save button on the Standard toolbar or select File gt Save from the menu select the drive and or folder where you want to save the file give the file a name and click Save Moin and Opening a File e To Open a File Click the Open button on the Standard toolbar or select File gt Open from the menu select the drive and or folder where the file you want to open is located select the file and click Open 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Working with a Windows Program 81 Selecting Replacing and Deleting Text e Selecting Text with the Mouse Move the insertion point to the beginning or end of the text
380. ons of Windows TEF Windows XP Start Windows Clas Toolbars b Menu Start ney Cascade Windows 7 Tile Windows Horizontally Figure 5 1 A Tile Windows Vertically T Show the Desktop The new Windows XP Start me s a lot of getting use to especially if you re familiar with the Start menu used in earlier Wrsions of Windows such as Windows 95 and 98 Don t Task Manager i PA worry if you can t get use to t w Windows XP Start menu it s easy to change the Start ee a menu back to the classic S enu that you re familiar with Here s how to do it 1 Right click a bR amp ok area of the Windows taskbar Taskbar shortcut kas menu A shortcut men the taskbar appears 2 Select P ies from the shortcut menu The Taskbar Mid Start Menu Properties dialog box appears uick Reference Q 3 Click Start Menu tab To Change Start Menus Th Menu tab appears as shown in Figure 5 2 You can select how the Start menu 1 Right click a blank area of nd behaves by selecting one of the following two options the Windows taskbar and WS Start Menu Use the new Windows XP Start menu that gives you quick access sc GG Properties mom to your documents pictures and music and recently used programs the shortcut menu 7 gt 2 Click the Start Menu tab 3 Select the Start menu style that you want to 4 If you want click Customize to further customize the behavior of the Start menu 5 If you want click
381. ontrol Panel Open the Control Panel by clicking the Start button and selecting 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Six Customizing Windows 151 NOTE Microsoft has completely reorganized the Control Panel in Windows XP If you prefer the interface of the old Control Panel go to the blue side panel and click H Switch to Classic View 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware The Control Panel categorizes the window by tasks and icons If you know you want to perform a specific task look under the Pick from a task heading If you want to browse the options for a specific piece of hardware click on its icon in the bottom half of the window Let s return to the Control Panel window 3 Click the Back button to view the Control Panel window e 4 Look at the various topic headings in the Control Panel and refer to T NE 6 1 What s in the Control Panel to see what they do ey If you want to see more go ahead and click any of the icons or heading titles lt u Control Panel to display the window that lives behind each one Just don t touc anything beyond that window you ll get your chance soon enough lt 5 When you re finished close the Control Panel O tl Ready to start customizing your computer Then move on to the esson and let s get started e Table 6 1 What s in the Control Panel Description P Ss Appearance and Customize the Start menu or taskbar appysiheme or screen saver or change Theme
382. ooser tab is not displayed on the Windows Media Player s taskbar ith a long list of possible skins Click on different skins to see what hen you find one you want to use Click th Apply Skin button in the upper left corner of the Media Player Win edia Player changes to skin mode and displays the skin you just selected e doesn t take up very much space on your screen but it doesn t offer as RS atures as the full sized Windows Media Player Iternate between skin mode and full mode the normal Windows Media Player A really fun feature of Windows Mey you can shrink the Media Player t Player skins come in a variety of s Start the Windo and click the click the Eda NOTE Do you want to choose from even more skins You can if you have an Internet connection Click on More Skins in the Skin Chooser tab of the Windows Media Player Windows will open a Web page on the Internet that offers you more skins Just click on the skin that you want to use and it will appear in your Windows Media Player list of skins Roe the mode button 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Seven The Free Programs 197 Lesson 7 15 Windows Movie Maker Requirements S Untitled Windows Movie Maker BEE File Edit View Clip Play Help 2 B X pi ca Gmk E ection B Collections es My Collections Video sources can also be a VCR DVD Player Web Camera or Television Broadcast Figure 7 20 Fig
383. ory from the component list to remove the checkmark This will remove all the Internet Explorer components from your system Since you really don t want to do this click the Cancel button 6 Click the Cancel button to close the Windows Components Wizard window without saving your changes Since you clicked Cancel you didn t actually add or remove any Windows components in this lesson Had you clicked OK Windows would have removed and added the components you selected One more thing if you re adding components make su ou have the Windows XP CD ROM handy Table 8 2 Windows Components Description Accessories and Utilities Install a variety of accessories including games small applicat wallpaper Allows faxes to be sent and received Indexing Service Locates indexes and updates documents to provide ig A text searching Internet Explorer Adds or removes access to Internet Explorer fro th Start menu and Desktop Internet Includes Web and FTP support along with s rt for FrontPage transactions Information Active Server Pages and database co nts Services IIS Management Includes tools for monitoring and imp ovfig network performance and Monitoring Tools Message Programs for playing so Queuing additional sound effect Online Services Provides guaranteedenessage delivery efficient routing security and transactional supa Explore the wg 0 Wad your e mail talk to your online buddies enj
384. other types of graphic files that use different extensi location All of the rograms in the Start Menu and some of the items on your Shortcuts that point to the program files located elsewhere vierence between a shortcut and original file because the shortcut N ZI in the lower left corner Since Windd G signs pictures to help you distinguish between the different types of files normally the three letter file extensions are hidden from view but you can tell Windows to display the extensiton we ll cover that when learn how to customize Windows Te eS Your Organization s Name Here 106 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 4 10 Changing How Information is Displayed e Practice ollx Figure 4 22 EEk Practice File Edit ASM Favorites Tools Help ay Toolbars gt A bullet e appears next Ge status ar E Folders F3z f o o_ Explorer Bar gt to the current view Here no Bo umbDnalls D Tiles the window is displayed in D Oe Icons view ne ae pease m 12 26 2001 12 34PM Details Trade Show 12 26 2001 12 34 PM Figure 4 a 23 X Arrange Icons by N W Canada Meeting Memo 19KB Microso vo 1 28 2001 11 17 AM Curent Choose Detals eens 14KB w 8 5 1997 9 00 PM udget Customize This Folder Current Budget Mici el Worksheet 4 13 2001 12 07 PM The window displayed In ies re i BF Homework 3 gicrosoft Word Document 10 9 1999 10 03 AM Details view EJ Refresh Open Me ext Document 7 13 1999
385. ou re already set up with an Internet provider the Dial up Connection dialog box appears as shown in Figure 9 4 If this is the first time you ve ever tried connecting to the Internet you may be by the Internet Connection Wizard as shown in Figure 9 3 Microsoft includ e Internet Connection Wizard to help you get connected to the Internet and Fin Mage j Internet Service Provider If you want you can follow the step by step insgfuctions and the Internet is let the Internet Connection Wizard help find you a Internet Service ew you can find your own Ask a computer savvy friend or an employee at A omputer store for the name and number of a local Internet Service Provideq Onc you are set up O with an Internet Service Provider come back finish the rest of thi 2 Enter your User name and Password if necessary a ick Connect If you have previously entered your user name and passwor checked the Save password option the user name and password characters ready appear in their respective text boxes Your password will appear maske asterisks If you listen to your computer you should hear a dia then your modem dial the phone and finally a screeching sound as your I ers the phone NOTE If you re connected to the Internet t h a network at work an ISDN or DSL line or a cable modem you MoN anything at all since these are all digital connections Actually it wou probably pay off if you checked if the Internet is av
386. ou need to send a message to more than one person you can repeat Step 5 to add the other recipients When you re finished move on to the next step 6 Click OK The Select Recipients dialog box closes and the recipient s appear in the To field 7 Optional To send a copy of a message to someone click in the Cc field and or the Bcc field and Repeat Steps 3 6 to enter their e mail addresses only click the Cc or Bcc button instead of the To button Table 9 4 Ways to Address an E mail Message gives a description of carbon copies Cc and Blind Carbon Copies Bcc Next you have to enter the subject of the e message so your recipient s will know what your message is about The subject will appear in the heading of the message in the recipient s inbox 8 Click the Subject field and enter a subject for the e mail gt Now you can type an actual e mail message lt 9 Click the pointer in the body of the message in the lower pane ethen type the message as you would in a word processor Keep in mind that all the generic Windows programs commands port hres as cutting copying pasting and formatting text will work in Owtlook xpress 10 Optional To check the spelling of your message sele ols gt Spelling from the menu Qy Outlook Express checks the spelling in your message BA it can t find in its dictionary and suggests an alternate word To replace a own word with a suggestion select the suggestion
387. ouble click it D Wear a cactus as a hat t the program s name thirty times while tapping your keyboard with a chicken Which of the follo A Shortcuts have B When you d atements is NOT true in their corner a Shortcut it also deletes the file or folder it points to C You canc Shortcut by dragging the file or folder to a new location with the right mo tton and selecting Create Shortcut Here from the shortcut menu D The itegns in the Start menu s Programs menu are actually shortcuts HomkWork amp N xo Position the taskbar at the top of the screen then move it back to the bottom of the screen Display the Taskbar Properties dialog box Display the Volume control for your computer Display a list of recently used files Create a new folder in the Programs menu named Financial Programs Delete the Financial Programs folder eee YS SS Use the Start menu s Run command to start the NotePad program Hint It s located in the C Windows folder 8 Create a shortcut to the NotePad program on the desktop Delete the shortcut when you re finished 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Five Customizing the Taskbar and Desktop 147 Quiz Answers on a oS SS True You can move the taskbar to any edge of the screen C You can only move the taskbar to the edges of the screen True A and D You can easily add and remove programs from the Start menu and deleting progr
388. ow appears over the button briefly identifying what the button is in this case Date Time as shown in Figure 3 4 3 Click the Date Time button The Date and Time dialog box appears as shown in Figure 3 5 presenting you with several different date and time formats to insert 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Working with a Windows Program 55 4 Click the OK button WordPad inserts the current date and time in the WordPad document 5 Backspace over the date you just entered to delete it OK button Only one date remains on your screen You will learn more about deleting text in a later lesson Compare your screen with the one in Figure 3 6 To Use a Toolbar Button amp e Click the toolbar button e amp To See What a Toolbar Button Does Oo Quick Reference Ww e Position the pointer over the toolbar button and QY wait a second A X ScreenTip will appear gt above the button Your Organization s Name Here 56 Figure 3 7 The Font dialog box Figure 3 8 A Scroll Bar You can select a control in a dialog box by clicking the control with the mouse or by pressing the lt Tab gt key until the control is selected Text Box List Box x xe Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 3 3 Filling Out a Dialog Box Font style Size x A Aral Black Aral Narow Book Antiqua F Bookman Old Style O Century Gothic O Comic Sans MS Effects F
389. ows XP CD ROM oe 7 Optional Specify If prom insert the Windows XP CD ROM and click OK Wind pics the necessary files on to your computer If you told Windows you wanted West page printed it would be sent to the new printer at this point If you printed a test page verify that the test page printed correctly and click Yes That s 1t your printer is installed and should appear as a new icon in the Printers folder whether you want to use the printer as the default printer and assign a name to the printer if you want Click Next 8 Specify if you want a test page printed and click Finish Your Organization s Name Here 226 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 8 11 Changing Printer Settings and the Default Printer ektro Phase erox Propertie Figure 8 T 25 amp Printers and Faxes aianei Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help i van lor Management Right click any printer in Ow O B Osii E rn E S the Printers folder to Address Printers and Faxes Eco RA AS acrobat Distiller change its settings okt on pen Comment rs Add a printer as Default Printer Figure 8 26 See what s printing eee Model Tektronix Phaser 86 DP Select printing Pause Printing Features P preferences P The printer Properties Si Pause printing Sharing one q i 1 B Share this printer Use Printer Online Double sided Yes dialog box will be different p Staple No for ev
390. ows the mouse as you move it across the desk or mouse pad Pointing is the most basic action you can do with the mouse To point to something simply place the mouse pointer over it by moving the mouse You must point to objects in order to click or double click them 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter One The Fundamentals 21 2 Move the mouse pointer until the tip of the pointer is over the Start button Leave the pointer there for a few seconds A message Click here to begin appears by the pointer after several seconds Clicking means pressing and releasing the left mouse button one time The mouse makes a clicking noise whenever you press and release one of its buttons hence the name clicking The next steps will show you how to open the Start menu by clicking it 3 Move the pointer over the Start button and then click the left mouse button When you click the Start button the Windows XP menu pops up as shown in Figure 1 8 Congratulations You ve just made your first click NOTE Most mice have two mouse buttons Normally you use the left mouse oe unless someone has changed the mouse options and reversed the buttons D You can assume you will use the left mouse button whenever you see th words click or double click The right mouse button has its own RN we ll discuss it in an upcoming lesson You can close the Windows XP menu without selecting anything by click outside the Start menu 4 Move the
391. owsing for it 5 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 QY This time instead of typing the program s name and path browse for the No program lt 6 Click the Browse button lalog box to A Browse dialog box appears as shown in Figure 5 18 Use the Bro otepad help you enter the program s name and path 7 Open the Windows folder then find and double clic program The path to Notepad appears in the Run dialog box a 8 Click OK wy The Notepad program reopens Q 9 Close the Notepad program You ll rarely if ever use the Run command to start ams One instance when you might use the Run command is when you re installing Seeman and the installation manual tells you to install a program by entering some Wee D SETUP EXE Now when you run across instructions like that you ll know how it N Re RG S 2 Y Quick Reference To Start a Program with the Run Command 1 Click the Start button and select Run 2 Enter the path and name of the program you want to run or click the Browse button find the file and double click it 3 Click OK to run the program Your Organization s Name Here 140 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 5 8 Adding Shortcuts to the Desktop Figure 5 19 Create a shortcut to a file or folder by dragging the object with the right 7 mouse button and 7 selecting Create Shortcut 2 spr ee Dart Here from the shortcut E menu s arlene xplorer WINDOWS
392. oy online music and video ANG More uka mation and video on your computer Also adds Networking Containg yw fety of specialized network related services and protocols Services Other Network File and Print Services g Update Root g Automatically downloads the most current root certificates for secure email WEB Certificates browsing and software delivery s files and printers on this computer with others on the network RN Q S Quick Reference To Add or Remove Windows Components 1 Click the Start button click Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs 2 Click Add Remove Windows Components 3 Click the box beside the component category you want to add M1 or remove 0 You can also add or remove specific components in a category Select the category click Details and then click the box beside the component category you want to add M1 or remove 0 4 Click OK Your Organization s Name Here 224 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 8 10 Installing a Printer amp Printers and Other Hardware DER Add Printer Wizard Figure 8 2 1 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay E ax O B P Search f Folders EFF gt Select a Printer Port i Computers communicate with printers through ports The Printe rs and Other Address gt Printers and Other Hardware m Se 28 Printers and Other Hardware Hardwa re window Select the port you want your printer to us
393. p more computer space if it is recorded with a higher quality setting and the record etting Now decide how much video you want to record time limit Choose the length of time you want the video to record in the Record 5 Click the Play button and QY tme imit box the Record button again l l You are ready to begin to recording 6 Save your video 6 Click the Digital Video Camera Play button to play the video and then Misti D A click the Record button to begin recording Pe thee ae eae Your video plays on the Windows Movie Maker screen and your computer records it 7 When your video is done recording save it to a desired location e Click the Stop button underneath the video Your video is stored in a series of video clips screen Now you can close out of Windows Movie Maker or you can do some movie editing 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Seven The Free Programs 199 Lesson 7 17 Using the Storyboard Untitled Windows Movie Maker File Edit View Play Help iPa x Clip Bee a Collections 3 My Collections 3 Movooo01 2 Movoo003 2 Movoo004 3 Movooo0s 23 Movooo06 S Movo0007 E New Collection wi be Clip 3 00o 0000 9 s c CIC Sesee __ x BERESERERUREURUUEEEU Ue Boece eee i x ren nnnn Hl Seseeeaees fi enn nnnnnensnnnnnnnnnnnnnn seeseeseseseeeesa EELEE Add a dip to the end of the storyboard timeline Fi
394. pace on your hard drive If you find you still need more room on your hard disk you have several more options to free up some space Here are some things you can do to reclaim space on your hard disk e Remove Unnecessary Programs One of the best methods of reclaiming space on your hard disk is removing old programs you don t use anymore Open Add Remove Programs in the Control Panel to have Windows delete these programs for you 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer 21 5 e Remove Unnecessary Windows Components Although this won t free up a lot of space you can remove optional Windows components by opening Add Remove Programs in the Control Panel clicking the Windows Setup tab and removing the checkmarks from the Windows components you want to remove e Use the DriveSpace 3 Compression Program Please please please don t use this method to increase space on your hard drive Yes disk compression can double the amount of space on your hard disk but not without a price Many people who compress their drives have had nothing but problems You re better off living with less room on your hard disk or buying a new hard disk than you are if you compress your hard drive DriveSpace 3 doesn t even work on hard disks using the new FAT32 file system If you still want to compress you hard drive open the DriveSpace program located in the Accessories menu under System Tools Table 8 1 T
395. pear in front you work with Win ou ll find yourself switching between programs and windows By throughout the da QY e Press and hold down the lt Alt gt key and press the KY lt Tab gt key to display the task list Press the lt Tab gt key until the program you want is selected then release the lt Alt gt key Your Organization s Name Here 46 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 2 16 Right click any empty area of the taskbar to display its shortcut menu Figure 2 17 Tiled windows allow you to view the contents of all your open windows at once Figure 2 18 Cascaded windows neatly overlap each other Y My Pictures Ei Document WordPad xo Lesson 2 8 Tiling and Cascading Windows Ter a My Pictures EAEE E Calculate E j x Bi ner STD BEA ay A a a amp JO search E gt Folders Ftz ddre ss Bc Documents and Settings Melissa My paoman Pictures gt Go Norton AntiVirus fa is E Calculate Other Places Z Toolbars Cascade Windows Tile Windows Horizontally Tile Windows Vertically Show the Desktop Undo Cascade Task Manager Figure 2 16 Right click any blank area of the taskbar to display its shortcut menu Sometimes there may only be a small blank area of the O BD Psh Py Folders F taskbar available A dress C Documents and Settings Melissa My Documents My Pictures
396. pen E mail Microsoft Outloo E My Pictures amp My Music PL My Computer ite Control Panel we Connect To 3 O amp f 2 Printers and Faxes c java Gp srchasst regedit AA Adobe Acrobat 5 0 4 Media system 4 setdebug My Recent i asystem32 E TASKMAN Help and Support ieceeeia Temp Mi bwunk_1 E ka HyperSnap DX 4 r _ S Cmui C twain_32 BB twunk_32 pe Search yg jolsslogs web Bunvise32 PCHEALTH E Winsxs 4 winhelp All Programs gt 3 Run C Prefetch M default winhlp32 lt h f O RegisteredPackages ctpu z C Registration E delttsul Log Off oJ Shut Down repair W explorer as Resources hh security BF IsUninst ShellNew KeyHH speech NOTEPAD Figure 5 16 Coo gt My Network Files of type Programs v Figure 5 18 If you ve gotten this ia already know at least a couple different methods of opening or starting p s You can start a program by clicking the Start button selecting All Programs and ding and clicking the program You can also start a program by opening My Com fer or Windows Explorer finding the program which can be tricky and then double cligking the program In this lesson you ll learn yet another way to start a program byg gir the Run command in the Start menu The Run nd is a more technical way to start a program and hopefully you won t have to use if ever Still just in case here it is AY
397. pletely erased from your hard disk If you created any files or documents with the program you want to remove it s probably a good idea to back them up but removing a program usually doesn t affect any files it created 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer 221 3 Click Yes to confirm the program s removal and finish removing the selected program by following the on screen instructions Since every program is different the steps for removing the programs may differ slightly as well They usually involve nothing more than confirming that you want to really want to delete the program and possibly having to select which components of a program you want to delete You may also have to restart your computer After following the prompts and instructions the selected program is deleted from your computer Of course you can always reinstall the program should you ever decide you need it again What if the program I want to remove doesn t appear in the list Sorry but then there is no easy way to remove the program The program was probably written for an older version of Windows or even MS DOS and cannot be automatically removed by Windows There age still several things you can try to remove the program First check the menu group where the program is located in the Start menu Usuall Y several additional programs or icons If one of the options says something like Unt Br
398. pointer anywhere outside the Windows XP Start Men and click the left mouse button move on to uble clicking ccession You will uble clicking it 5 Position your pointer over the Recycle Bin igan and double click it with your left mouse button Q Recycle Bin opens to reveal its contents as sho a igure 1 8 NOTE A lot of people have problems the fi double click doesn t seem to worW holding the mouse steady whil double clicking fast enough inadvertently slide the m your double click won mouse steady while ygu do the Windows ContrgePa el 6 Close the Recycle Bin ow by clicking its Close button as shown in Figure 1 8 a Table 1 4 Things youR click and double click ae ae Double click when you want to Select something Open a file Press a butto R 1 gioolbar or in a dialog box Display the properties or settings for an object in certain programs Move to the area or field you want in a program or dialog box Now that you re feeling comfortable with pointing and clickin something a little more tricky double clicking Just as it sou means pressing and releasing the mouse button twice in ra usually open an object such as a file folder or program e they try double clicking If your probably because you re either not ou re double clicking or else you re not click the mouse button too hard you may ore you ve finished double clicking and r If you re certain that you re hold
399. pot on the taskbar and select Properties Start Menu tab Customize The Customize Start Menu dialog box appears 6 Make sure the Advanced tab is in front and then click Clear List in the Recent Document section of the dialog box It appears as though nothing has happened but Windows has removed the list of files from the Documents menu 7 Close the dialog boxes Verify that the Documents menu has been reset and is empty c 8 Click the Start button and select My Recent Documents K The My Recent Documents list is empty As you create and open files they will ann in the My Recent Documents list gt Quick Reference lt To Open a Recent File amp e Click the Start button gt ry My Recent Documents and select the file you O want to open WwW To Clear the List of Recently Used Files 1 Right click the taskbar choose Properties gt QY Start Menu tab gt AS Customize gt Advanced KY tab 2 Click Clear to clear the list and close the boxes Your Organization s Name Here 1 38 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 5 16 The Run option in the Start menu Figure 5 17 The Run dialog box Figure 5 18 You can browse for a program to run Lesson 5 7 Using the Run Command to Start a Program Internet Explorer Type the name of a program folder documen e Internet E2 My Documents fF Internet resource and Windows will open fo 4 My Recent Documents gt O
400. power strip or surge protector it really should be check and make sure that the power strip is turned on r Eventually you should see the Welcome to Windows dialog box If you re connected t a Novell Network the dialog you see may be slightly different but the message will amp usually be the same press Ctrl Alt Delete to log on If necessary press lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt lt Delete gt to start the log on iO procedure W The Windows Log On dialog box appears as shown in Figure 1 2 lt Enter your user name and password and press lt Enter gt Depending on how your computer is setup the Getting Started with sO XP dialog box may appear Here s how to close it If the Getting Started with Windows XP dialog box ap click the Exit button to close it If you didn t already know how to turn your computer on ons You ve just taken your first step in learning how to operate a computer and Micro indows XP V Quick Reference To Start Windows af 1 Turn on your computer amp 2 If necessary press lt Ctrl gt Oo lt Alt gt lt Delete gt to RAN start the log on procedure Q 3 Enter your user name and AA password and press Ry lt Enter gt Your Organization s Name Here 1 6 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 1 3 Understanding the Windows XP Screen Figure 1 4 Those are the major parts of the Windows XP screen More items will probably appear on your computer depe
401. ppropriate drive and folder where your practice files are located First let s review how to select a single file 2 Click the Paris file to select it The Paris file is highlighted indicating that it is selected Now you could delete move or copy the Paris file To deselect a file just click in any empty area on the window 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 109 3 Click any empty area of the window to deselect the Paris file The Paris file is no longer selected You can select more than one file or folder at a time so you can delete move or copy a whole bunch of files at once Like so many Windows functions there are several methods to select multiple files If the files you want to select are next to each other you can move mouse pointer to empty area on the screen hold down the mouse button and drag a rectangle around the files you want to select as shown in Figure 4 24 4 Move the pointer to any empty area in the folder window click and hold down the mouse button and drag a rectangle around several files as shown in Figure 4 24 The only problem with this method is that it only works when you want to select files that are next to each other 5 Click any empty area of the screen to deselect the files nt ou Another method of selecting adjacent files and folders is to click the first fil Qy to select hold down the lt Shift gt key as you click the last file of the
402. program starts Close the Notepad program Of course you can always delete a shortcut fro ck Launch toolbar if it s no longer needed Right click the Notepad icon on the Q Launch toolbar and select Delete from the shortcut menu The Notepad shortcut is deleted from th Resize the Quick Launch tool a b ck to its original size If you don t use the Quick Laun ar at all and a lot of people don t you can hide it entirely and reclaim oe vawrable taskbar real estate om the taskbar and select Toolbars Quick enu to hide the Quick Launch toolbar uick Launch toolbar Right click any empty ar Launch from the tool Finding an empty are taskbar can be difficult if you re running several programs If you are kg ts trouble finding an empty area on the taskbar to right click go to the far right jJ ore the clock there s always a sliver there Displaying the Repeat A aunch tool is just as easy as hiding it o display the Quick Launch toolbar Open Run as Scan with Norton AntiVirus Pin to Start menu Send To gt Cut Copy Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties Right click any button on the Quick Launch toolbar to delete rename or modify it Quick Reference To Add an Program to the Quick Launch toolbar e Drag and drop the program onto the Quick Launch toolbar To Resize the Quick Launch toolbar e Drag the right border of the Quick Launch toolbar to the
403. puter personality to eee flect your own personal tastes In this lesson you will learn how to start personalizing akis eae Windows by adding wallpaper to the Windows desktop Wallpaper in Windows is a graphical picture you can stick to the desktop the background area of the Windows screen New Se 1 Right click a blank area on the desktop and select Properties from the Desktop shortcut eheneuEment menu The Display Properties dialog box appears NOTE You can also reach the Display Properties dialog box through the Control Panel Go to the Start menu 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Six Customizing Windows 159 Here s one more wallpaper tip if you re sur Click the Desktop tab The Desktop tab appears in front of the Display Properties dialog box as shown in Figure 6 11 This is where you can select a file to use as wallpaper In the Background section select the Red moon desert file from the list A preview appears of what your desktop will look like with the selected wallpaper Notice the Position combo box you can display your wallpaper using one of three different methods e Center Centers the image in the middle of your desktop Use this setting if you have a large picture you want to display such as a scanned picture c e Tile Makes a repeated pattern from the image Use this setting for small to medium sized pictures and for all the default files listed in the Wallpaper box amp e Stretch S
404. r sah aot Mai 4 LON Message window appears as shown in Figure 9 24 ready for you to write Other Ways to Compose WON i message The first thing you have to do is specify the recipient s e mail a Message Q ess in the To field You can either type this address in the To box or you can click e Select Recipients from a list button that appears immediately to the left of the To e Select Compose gt X bor New Message from the ey If the recipient of your e mail isn t in the Address Book or if you want to type out their menu l A A address in the To field move on to the next step If you want to select your recipient s e Press lt Ctrl gt lt N gt name from the Address Book providing that they are in the address book skip to Step K 2 4 3 Type the recipient s e mail address in the To field To If you need to send a message to more than one person simply enter all the recipient s e mail addresses making sure you separate them with a comma like this Select Recipients JohnWilson acme com BettyT yahoo com Skip to Step 7 when you re finished from List button 4 If the recipient is in your Address Book click the Select recipients from a list button to the left of the To field The Select Recipients dialog box appears as shown in Figure 9 27 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Nine Exploring the Internet 263 5 Click the name of the recipient in the Name list and click the To button If y
405. r Options 2 Refer to Table 6 7 Custom Setting Options and make the desired changes Your Organization s Name Here 172 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 6 25 The View tab of the Folder Options dialog box see Table 6 8 Advanced Folder Options for descriptions of the various options Lesson 6 12 Customizing Folder View Options Folder Options General View File Types Offline Files Folder views You can apply the view such as Details or Tiles that you are using for this folder to all folders Reset All Folders Advanced settings D Files and Folders Automatically search for network folders and printers Display file size information in folder tips Display simple folder view in Explorer s Folders list C Display the contents of system folders Display the full path in the address bar C Display the full path in the title bar C Do not cache thumbnails 9 Hidden files and folders Do not show hidden files and folders Show hidden files and folders Hide extensions for known file types Figure 6 25 Yet another lesson on folder O A Yep in this lesson we will conclude our tour of how to customize how Windows me d acts This lesson explains how to change how information is displayed in My Comagyter ahd Windows Explorer Remember the three letter file extensions that are tac at the end of every file such as TXT Normally Windows hides those extensions fr but you can
406. r are a little too easy When you ome pron you already know how to do go ahead and skip the lesson unless you rg assroom of course then go ahead and show everyone what a computer whiz you ar Ready Did you take that deep breath Then turn the page and let s get started 1 2 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 1 1 A Look at Windows XP and What s New OF Heip and Support Center Oo tal re i we iT Frvortes 3 Hony T seco Options Figure 1 1 If you want to read about the changes that have been made in Windows Spee What s new in Windows XP XP click the Start button aes a select Help and select the aoe Windows XP SEd hick new re iais Pheata ee ees take an What s New in Windows aCCessones and communicstons and enbertamment progr d articles containing full desonpbons for performing key tasks from start to frish famibar terms m the XP topic ghesary Lean the benefits of regestening your copy of Windows XF onine Ser Absa Eh Windoss Gassary D Wines berpbaard shortcuts crv Ei Toots D Ga te a Virgie eevee Figure 1 1 Before we start pointing and clicking gything it helps if you actually understand what exactly Windows XP is Windows n operating system Okay so what s an operating system An operating system is a are program that controls and runs just about everything on your computer e s what an operating system does e Controls Your Co s Hardware Windows controls the diff amp tent de
407. r if you might ne file again Don t delete a file unless you re absolutely sure you will never a in And NEVER delete a file if you don t know what it is W Close the My Computer window A AS File Open Explore Search Sharing and Security Send To Cut Copy Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties er Ways to Rename a e Right click on the file and select Rename from the shortcut menu Other Ways to Delete a File e Right click on the file and select Delete from the shortcut menu Quick Reference To Open a File e Double click the file To Rename a File e Click the file to select it select Rename this file from the File and Folder Tasks menu type a name for the folder and press lt Enter gt Or Right click the file select Rename from the shortcut menu type a name for the folder and press lt Enter gt To Delete a File e Click the file to select it and select Delete this file from the File and Folder Tasks menu Click Yes to confirm the folder deletion e Select the file and press the lt Delete gt key Click Yes to confirm the folder deletion Your Organization s Name Here 100 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 4 7 Copying and Moving a File Figure 4 14 Practice J Move Items File Edit View Favorites Tools Help To move a file drag the Q BG Preach Py Folders E7 Selon E an ER aa ee file to the desired lo
408. r user or group name can co Nr to 20 uppercase or lowercase characters including spaces User names cang tain the following characters lt gt Now that you have entered the user name you can enter the user description if you want 6 Type the user s full name in the Full Name box an description of the user in the Description box finished name anda optional Next when you re Next you need to enter the user s password as show igure 10 17 7 Type the user s password in both the Pa rd and the Confirm Password boxes Click Next when youre f ished The last step in adding a new user account ning their level of access You have three options e Standard user Users can mo e computer and install programs but cannot read of modify files ng to other users e Restricted user Users rate the computer and save documents but cannot install programs Q make changes to the system files and setting tP pes of user access such as Administrators who can elong to other users and share folders on your e Other Select from o read of modify file computer amp 8 Select the type of The new user can appear in User Accounts he User Accounts dialog box 9 Click OKt That s all there is Or a new user account to your Windows XP based computer if you re able to lo an administrator that 1s You will almost certainly want to have the new user lo to Me computer using their assigned user name and p
409. ragmenter window pops up as shown in Figure 8 7 pd drive is highlighted Near the bottom of the window is a row of b defragment your computer Click the Analyze button amp The Defragment program analyzes the selected hard iy displays the status of the hard drive in the Estimated disk usage before shoe 10n color bar A dialog The Properties for the selected drive appear in the General Properties dialog box x the C hard s you will use to box appears and tells you whether you should or sho ot defragment your drive as shown in Figure 8 6 Click Start to begin defragmenting the e ed drive The Defragmenting Drive window display ogress of the defragmentation up to several hours 8 Kr drive is being defragmented Just like the hurt anything but any changes you make to ragmentor to start over Defragmenting a hard drive can take a NOTE Don t touch Windows while Error checking program your hard disk causes When the defragmentation proess is finally complete a dialog box appears asking you if you want to quit Disk ementer Click Yes to close the amp isk Defragmenter program A couple last notes o contains errors so if errors on rs een ementation First you can t defragment a hard disk that ally a good idea to run Error checking to find and repair any e before you defragment it Second the Disk Defragmenter program has O Ai mized in Windows XP Not only does it defrag
410. raphic file instead of only displaying an unhelpful file name Table 4 5 Different Methods of Viewing Items Quick Reference To Change How Items are Displayed e Select View from the menu bar and select from one of the five view modes Thumbnails Tiles Icons List or Details Or e Select a view from the View button list arrow on the toolbar To Change How Items are Sorted 1 Follow the above step to display the window in Details View 2 Click the column heading you want to use to sort the window Click the column heading again to sort in reverse order To Automatically Arrange Icons e Select View Arrange Icons by Auto Arrange from the menu Your Organization s Name Here 108 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 4 11 Selecting Multiple Files and Folders Figure 4 24 S Practice Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help To select several files that D D P sah E Folders are next to each other hold down the mouse File and Folder Tasks File and Folder Tasks button and drag a Pea ee aa aen Gp Move the selected Publi is er to rectangle around the files ee ee l w A am you want to select Homework 3 Open Me iao hew Other Places z 5i ee Gee Figure 4 25 Details B When you want to select a ie Folde group of consecutive files Figure 4 24 Move the pointer to 2 Hold down the mouse button select the first file you an empty area in
411. ready know that you can use e mail to send N essages to the staff at the office or to people all over the world You probably also know that e mail is fast almost instantaneous and economical many e mail accounts are completely free Just like you need to know a person s street address if you want to send them a letter you need to know a person s e mail address if you want to send that person an e mail message Figure 9 23 is an example of what a typical e mail address looks like Windows XP comes with an e mail program called Outlook Express Outlook Express is a stripped down version of Microsoft s full featured e mail program Outlook which comes with Microsoft Office Outlook Express allows you compose send and receive e mail 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Nine Exploring the Internet 261 messages over the Internet The remainder of the lessons in this lesson will show you how to accomplish these tasks Move on to the one and only step in this lesson and we ll take a quick look at Outlook Express before we move on and learn how to compose send and receive e mail 1 Open Outlook Express by clicking the Outlook Express button on the taskbar s Quick Launch toolbar folders in the left pane of Outlook Express These folders categorize your messages and work just like the In and Out boxes you ve seen at the office Table 9 3 E mail The main screen of Outlook Express appears as shown in Figure 9 26 Notice
412. ri ey connect to the shared printer Additional Drivers Open Explore Search S RPenables other computers on the network to access the files and folders saved on your ter s hard drive and a printer connected to your computer You can specify exactly Sharing and Security information you want to share with people on the network and which users have Format aa rmission to access that information For example you might want to share only a particular folder with other users rather than entire contents of your computer s hard drive This lesson cies explains how to share your computer s files so other users can read and modify them This lesson also explains how to share a printer so other users can use it to print their files Properties Your user account must have administrative privileges in order to share a folder If you don t Other Ways to Share a p aeh k admin f Folder ave administrative rights have your network administrator log on for you e Right click the folder and select Sharing and Security 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Ten Networking with Windows XP 291 Make sure that you are logged on to Windows XP with a user account that has administrative privileges Only user accounts with administrative rights can share folders on a computer so you will need to make sure that you re logged onto Windows XP using the Administrator account or a user account with administr
413. right mouse button S Windows clock Another shortcut menu appears with commands related to the Windows clock as shown in Figure 1 14 Notice one of the commands listed on the shortcut menu is KA Adjust Date Time You would select this menu item if you really wanted to adjus date and or time You don t want to adjust the date or time however so you cate e on to the next step and close the shortcut menu without selecting anything W 5 Click anywhere outside the Clock shortcut menu with the left nuse button to close the menu without selecting anything O The final object we ll right click in this lesson is the computer s loca ysk To get to the local disk you have to open My Computer Do you remember to do it 6 Double click the My Computer icon Ko computer You want ht click the Local disk The My Computer window opens displaying the contents o to see how much space is left on your computer s local disk C icon to get this information 7 Right click the Local disk C icon A shortcut menu appears with a list of omonge to the local disk 8 Click the Properties option on the shortc enu with the Left mouse button A dialog box appears showing a graph wittagy much space is left on your hard drive as shown in Figure 1 15 9 Click Cancel to close the C Properties dialog box You re done You ve learned all the act can perform with the mouse Quick What are they again Pointing Clicking Doub
414. rom the listed options and click Next The next screen in the Schedule Tasks Wizard appears as shown in Figure 8 13 Here you must specify when Task Scheduler should run the selected program You should always try to schedule a time when the computer won t be in use such as late at night Of course the computer still has to be on for Task Scheduler to work 6 Specify when you want the program to run and click Next The last screen of the Scheduled Task Wizard appears reporting that you have successfully added a new scheduled task c 7 Click Finish N The Scheduled Task Wizard closes and the selected program appears in the Schedule Tasks window NA When you no longer want a program to be scheduled just delete it from the serena window just like you would delete a file W Quick Reference To Schedule a Task amp Click the Start button and A select All Programs gt Accessories gt System Q Tools Scheduled Tasks Q 2 Double click the Add Scheduled Task icon and O click Next w 3 Select the program you want to schedule from the Q list and click Next 4 Specify when you want amp the program to run and O click Next 5 Select an interval when O you want to run the selected program from Q QY the listed options and X click Next 6 Specify when you want QY the program to run click N Next and then click KY Finish To Remove a Task from the Task Scheduler e Open the
415. roperties dialog box Click the Add Hardware Wizard button amp The first page of the Add Hardware Wizard appears Add Hardware Wizard Click Next and follow the on screen instructions to have Windo for your new hardware Add Hardware button me it finds h your First Windows looks for any new Plug and Play devices on your compu any you will probably be asked to insert the disk or CD ROM that c new hardware device or the Windows XP CD ROM Next Windows searches for hardware that is not Plug and Play c in Figure 8 29 Your computer s hard drive will growl as Wind hardware A dialog box appears to display the progress of th are search because it will take a long time After a while Windows will repo und any hardware that is not Plug and Play compatible also known as leg rdware If Windows finds any hardware that is not Plug and Play compatible you will probably be asked to insert the disk or CD ROM that came wi ur new hardware device or the Windows XP CD ROM tible as shown arches for new cy programs that install the Quick Reference having to do a thing If d ee oe ee To Add New Hardware to W R Your Computer ill can t find your new device or if the 1 Install the hardware and news you might have a hardware conflict turn on your computer ces on your computer These resources are as Follow the on screen instructions if Windows automatically recognizes the new hardware
416. rs lt gt 6 Double click the Practice Folder to open it lt s nothing Quick Reference To Create a New Folder 1 Open the disk or folder where you want to place the new folder 2 Select Make a new j folder task from the File 9 Select Rename this folder from the Filed Folders Tasks panel and Folder Tasks panel type Temp Folder and press lt Enter gt Or The Practice Folder is renamed Temp Foldgg aeania Foder Table 4 3 File and Folder Tasks folder from the menu Or wp D p Make a new folder Creajgs ae folder Right click any empty area in the window and mi Rename this folder Gives the selected file or folder a new name select New Folder 7 7 from the shortcut menu E Move this folder J ves the selected items to the destination you choose 3 Type a name for the Copy this folder y opies the selected items to the destination you choose folder and press lt Enter gt To Rename a Folder E publish this folder to Transfers a copy of the selected items to a public Web page so that you can share them with other people e Click eae to select z it select Rename Share this ne Makes the selected folder available to computers on a network mie oda onhe FE 4 so that other people can access it and Folders Tasks panel E mail t r s files Sends an e mail message with copies of the selected items type a name for the folder attached and press lt Enter gt 2 Dele
417. rsonal Address Book from the Put This Entry box Select OK The New cc Mail Address Properties dialog box appears amp Type the recipient s first and last name in the appropriate fields gt Enter the recipient s name in the Display Name box then enter gpg mail address You can also click on the other tabs in the New Internet Mail Address oC dialog box to add additional information such as phone numbers and addrgs about the recipient KR Click OK to close the Properties dialog box gt You return to the Windows Address Book window where the Q ntact appears Click the Address Window s Close button to S amp H Q Quick Reference Q To Add a Name to the Oo Address Book WwW 1 Start Outlook Express WwW 2 Click the Address Book button on the Outlook O Express toolbar 3 Click the New Entry e button on the Windows amp Address Book toolbar Oo 4 Choose Internet Mail KA Address and Personal WO Address Book the recipient s e mail io address 6 To add additional KY information about the recipient click on other tabs in the New Internet Mail Properties dialog box 7 Click OK then close the Address Book Yor 5 Type the recipient s first Ww and last name and enter Your Organization s Name Here 266 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 9 12 Receiving E mail K Inbox Outlook Express Figure 9 29 File Edit View Tools Message Help BS r This area displays the ad Pe i A
418. rtion keyboard point with the pointer After typing a document you will often gcWer that you need to make some changes to your text perhaps you want to rephrase Og ven delete a sentence Editing a document by inserting and deleting text is very simple Tog text you move the insertion point the blinking bar to where you want to insert the t u move the insertion point using the arrow keys on the keyboard or by using the mouseto c ick where you want to move it as shown in Figure 3 10 Once the insertion point is ou want just start typing There are a couple way deWte text One way to delete text is to place the insertion point to the eft of the text you delete and press the lt Backspace gt key Another way to delete text is to place the 4 point to the right of the text you want to delete and press the lt Delete gt key In this lesson ygu ll Set practice inserting and deleting text and revising the letter you created in POPA 1 PrG the Up Arrow Key lt 1 gt button MYPinsertion point moves up one line 2 press and hold the Up Arrow Key lt T gt to move the insertion point to the yy very top line in the document Now you need to move the insertion point to the beginning of the current line Press and hold the Left Arrow Key lt lt gt button to move the insertion Type Subject Glue Trauma and press lt Enter gt twice The text and blank line is inserted at the insertion point before the rest o
419. rusted with your valuable data 5 Click Close to close the Results dialog box and click Close again to close the Format dialog box 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer 209 Lesson 8 2 Copying a Floppy Disk a Copy Disk Copy from H 344 Floppy A make sure the floppies are the same density most floppies are the Hig sity 1 44 MB type so this shouldn t be a problem Second make sure that the desti oppy the one hou may need as the where the information is being copied doesn t contain any infor copy command will delete and replace any previously stored a n with the information exact copy of a floppy disk You should check two things before e iet Oppy disk First you are copying Unless you have a couple extra floppies on hand this isn t or exercise When you do need to copy a floppy disk however here s what to do 1 Insert the original floppy disk you arg into the floppy drive 2 Open My Computer from the Start Magu The My Computer window appears 3 Right click the drive containi A and select Copy Disk The Copy Disk dialog box appears Not many options are listed here just select the drive you want the files copi Om and where you want the files copied Yes you can choose the same drive as fe ask you copy from loppy disk you want to copy usually e shortcut menu 4 Click Start It will take about a for Windows
420. s and Folders Tasks panel type a name for the folder and press lt Enter gt You can also rename a folder by clicking the folder to select it selecting File gt Rename from the menu typing a name for the folder and pressing lt Enter gt 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 121 Copying Moving and Deleting a Folder e Move a Folder Drag and Drop Method Move a folder by dragging it to the desired location such as another folder or on the desktop you might have to open another My Computer window if you want to copy it to another folder e Move a Folder Click the folder to select it and click E Move this folder from the File and Folder Tasks menu select the folder or disk where you want to move the folder and click OK e Copy a Folder Drag and Drop Method Hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while you drag the folder to the desired location you might have to open another My Computer window if you want to copy it to amp another folder e Copy a Folder Click the folder to select it click B Copy this folder from the File and Foldee amp Tasks menu select the folder or disk where you want to move the folder and click OK e To Delete a Folder Select the folder and press the lt Delete gt key Click Yes to confirm thegol r deletion W e Files and Folders file select Rename u can also rename a file typing a name for the Opening Renaming and Deleting a File e
421. s and post messages to and from people with similar interests TAREA thousands of newsgroups on topics such as computers education romance hobbies politics religion and more lt Chat with other online Chatting lets you communicate with people on the nig stantly no users matter how far away they are Most chats are text lagsed Meaning you have to type when you converse with people on th net A growing number of chats have voice and even video ca all without having to pay long distance changes Download software You can download pictures demo programsNgatches and drivers for your computer and many other types of files an 8ave them to your computer Listen to music and You can listen to sound on the Web bd as radio stations or music by watch videos your favorite artists Q Your Organization s Name Here 246 Microsoft Windows XP E O OS Lesson 9 2 Connecting to the Internet Internet Connection Wizard Dial up Connection Figure 9 3 Set Up Your Internet Connecti Microsoft s Internet saa Connection Wizard will set 7N pover and have cane al ihe neces connecten ormation you can c o your account using your you up with an Internet rs ie you ar connected to a local area never Intemet over the LAN Service Provider Which method do you want to use to connect to the Figure 9 4 Connect using my phone line Connect using my local area network LAN The Dial up Connection di
422. s items on the desktop You can also chagac aWof Windows appearance from XP to classic style under this topic Network and Configure network settings to wor home create a small office or home Internet network connect to the Interne ange modem phone and Internet Connections settings Add or Remove Installs or removes pragr sand additional Windows components on your Programs computer Sounds Speech Change the systems sound scheme or configure the settings for speakers and and Audio Devices other sound eq Mt on your computer Performance and your hard drive schedule regular maintenance checks Maintenance saving settings cf Printers and Other Cha settings for hardware such as the printer keyboard mouse or Hardware caneg gt o User Accounts W ge settings and passwords for individual users Date Time 3 anges the date time and time zone information on your computer the language to use and region specific display options for numbers currency time and dates Accessibility Adjust settings for an individual user s vision hearing and mobility needs Options You ve returned to the original Control Panel window N Printers and Other Hardware Back Back button Quick Reference To Open the Control Panel e Click the Start button and select Control Panel Or e Open My Computer and double click the Control Panel folder To View the Co
423. s on the desktop The default names Windows gives to shortcuts usually aren t very meaningful so you will usually want to rename thema Rename the Shortcut to Notepad shortcut Notepad button find the file and Remember how to rename files Right click the file select Rename from hfye double click it menu rename the file and press lt Enter gt Now try using your new shortcut Double click the Notepad shortcut lt The Notepad program opens O Close the Notepad program the program you want the shortcut to point to or click the Browse Since a shortcut only points to a program or file deleting a shor es not delete the original file it points to 10 Delete the Notepad shortcut a To change the settings for a shortcut such as what kind of wind starts in or if the location of the program changes right click the shortcut and select or Quick Reference NOTE You can even create shortcuts to your fi olders For example you could To Create a Shortcut to a create a shortcut to a folder that contains War frequently used files on the File or Folder Desktop Oo e Drag the file or folder to a Ww new location with the AU right mouse button Select Create Shortcut Oo Here from the shortcut menu amp Or ry e Right click the file or folder for which you want e Oo to create a shortcut and RAN select Create Shortcut QY from the shortcut menu X Or e Right click an empty area QY of any folder or the A Windows De
424. s to Change X Fonts You are going to add your name to the document here but first you want to use a different font to make it stand out Font list 1 e Select Format Font fom the menu Select Click the Font list arrow on the Formatting toolbar the font options you KY A list appears with all the fonts that are available on your computer listed in want from the font alphabetical order Since there isn t enough room to display all the font types at once dialog box then click you may have to scroll up or down the list until you find the font type you want OK 3 Scroll up the Font list until you see the Bookman Old Style font then click the Bookman Old Style font Anything you type at this point will appear in the selected Bookman Old Style font 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Working with a Windows Program 71 4 Type Jane Plain The name Jane Plain appears in the Bookman Old Style font You can also select text and change it to a new font 5 Select the line To the La Fanci Nails Company In the next step we ll change the selected text to Courier New font type 6 Click the Font list arrow and select Courier New from the Font list 0 w The selected text changes to the Courier New font Font Size list You can also change the size of a font and make it larger or smaller Font size is er Ways to Change measured in points the bigger the point number the larger the size of the font 10 AS Font Size
425. s you back to the pay you last viewed A Home N B Stop lt C Refresh O D Back w Which of the following statements is NOT true A Internet Explorer keeps a history of visited Web pages for S B A search engine lets you search for Web pages for owa nterest you C Eudora is an e mail program that comes with Window D You can download and save images from a Web A O your computer When you ve finished writing a letter in O Express clicking the Send button on the toolbar will instantly send the nfessage to its destination True or False Which of the following statements ee true A When you reply to a message O xpress includes the content of the original message to make it easy for th ent to know which message you re replying to B E mail messages can containgiles such as pictures and word processing documents called attachments C You can send anonymou il using the Blind Carbon Copy Bcc field D You can save a list of ages you visit frequently in Internet Explorer s Favorites list Ww Homeworks Get a su tion to the Internet O rnet Explorer Go to 4 Yahoo Web site www yahoo com Search the Internet for information on Russia PS YS Spend at least 30 minutes browsing the Web on whatever topics you want Your Organization s Name Here 274 Microsoft Windows XP Quiz Answers 1 A A Web server is a computer that holds Web pages and is connected to the
426. sic to a CD insert a rian MGM nt your recordable CD drive NOTE You MUST have either a CD RRgympact Disc Recordable or a CD RW Compact Disc Rewritabl in order to copy music onto a CD A dialog box appears asking yo ou want Windows to do Click Cancel to close the gialo box i Player ta Player and choose the Copy to CD or Device Device tab is not displayed click the Ea arrows Player taskbar Now we can start Windows Start the Windows M tab If the Copy to on the Windows Are you ready to Pour songs Here we go In the left s aunder Music to Copy click All Audio and then check the songs wpe to copy as shown in Figure 1 18 NOTE op of the right hand screen there is an area that says where you are opying the songs to It should say CD Drive If you want to copy the songs to ortable device select a different destination in this area Make sure your portable device is plugged into your computer Let s get that music copied Click Copy Music at the upper right corner of the Media Player To cancel the copy click Cancel You re done When you copy songs to a CD Windows ejects the CD from its drive when the copy is complete The screen will also signify when the copy is complete QO Figure 7 18 All Audio lists all of the songs that you can copy Copy Music utton Quick Reference To Copy Music to a CD or Other Portable Device 1 Insert a blank CD into your CD R or CD RW drive
427. sites you viewed during that day or week KY appear A EI Web site symbol appears by each Web site 4 Click the Web site you want to revisit The Web site s individual Web pages appear each with a Web page symbol beside them 5 Click the Web page you want to view The Web page appears 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Nine Exploring the Internet 257 6 Click the History button on the toolbar when you ve finished working with your history of recently view Web pages The History panel disappears Oo Quick Reference lt To Display a History of Visited Web Pages O 1 Click the 2 History button on the toolbar O 2 Click the day or week you viewed the Web page Yor 3 Click the Web site you X want to revisit 4 Click the specific Web V page you want to view 5 Click the History button on the toolbar when you ve finished working with your history of recently view Web pages Your Organization s Name Here 258 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 9 8 Saving Pictures and Files to Disk Downloading Latest 50 free downloads Dopis Figure 9 17 men ES Strat Wars n ey i Watch as starfighters battle it out in this screensaver laa ee There are many files and OS Windows 95 98 Me 2000 XP yd ohana programs on the Internet Above Infinity Documents g Design build and battle with fighters i that you can download om e a with your own space fighters in B OS Windows 95 98
428. sktop and KY select New Shortcut from the shortcut menu Enter the path and name of the program you want the shortcut to point to or click the Browse button find the file and double click it Your Organization s Name Here 142 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 5 9 Starting a Program Automatically when Windows Starts Figure 5 20 Any programs files or folders you place in the Internet Ss My Documents StartUp folder in the ESE Eanes C Programs Menu will start CA E mail 3 My Recent Documents gt or open automatically ibani E e TT every time you load Windows Updat i y Microsoft Word 97 jna Ei Accessories Notepad lez Games fim Applications Design fim Entertainment Internet Ay Adobe Acrobat 5 0 fim Palm Desktop kal HyperSnap Dx 4 All Programs Microsoft Excel BREE QuickBooks Pro These programs will automatically start every time you load te off fo Shut Down a E G cys Figure 5 20 If you use the sgme program each and every day you can save five seconds or so by having Windows statgethe program automatically every time you turn the computer on This lesson shows you automatically start a program when you start Windows and how to stop mye automatically starting Let s get started ht click the Start button then click Open he Start Menu window appears K Double click the Programs folder The Programs window appears We want to open the Startup folder This is where the
429. soft has already added several buttons to the Quick Launch toolbar to launch progra they think you will use frequently Depending on who has used your computer there Cy a variety of icons on the Quick Launch toolbar The default buttons on the Quic ch toolbar include Micragoft internet Explorer This launches your Web browser letting you surf the Kee use the Internet this is a great button to have r soft Outlook Launches Microsoft Outlook a program you can use to send a mail If you use a different program to send and receive e mail such as America you probably can safely delete this button Windows Media Player New in Windows XP the Windows Media Player is a center for playing and organizing multimedia on your computer and on the Internet N o the taskbar always appears at the bottom of the screen the Quick Launch toolbar is A probably the fastest and most convenient place to add shortcuts to your favorite programs If the shortcut icons from Quick Launch start to crowd your taskbar you can resize the Quick Launch toolbar by dragging its right border to the left Some of the icons will disappear Resize the Quick Launch toolbar by dragging its right when you do this To see them simply click on the arrows on the Quick Launch toolbar border to the right or left 1 If your Quick Launch toolbar is visible on left hand side of your taskbar Skip to step 4 If the Quick Launch toolbar isn t
430. somewhat fami ith the layout and function of the menus in other Windows progam s Table 3 2 Common Windows Program Menus Table gi a preview of some of the different menu items you will come across Table 3 2 Common Windows Program TEA Fie Commands to open s amp ge icli se print and create new files pe Commands to copy paste find and replace text in a document View Commands to Cpa g how the document is displayed on the screen Lists items th can insert into a document such as graphics page number ue e current date o format text paragraphs tab stops etc Strangely the command page i e margins etc is located in the File menu under Page Window focument open WordPad doesn t have this option since it can only have one file open at a time v Hep Y Get help on the Windows program you are using OK button amp can open menus by QW sicking the menu name with the mouse or by pressing the lt Alt gt key and the underlined letter in the menu name You can close a menu without selecting any commands by clicking anywhere outside the menu or by pressing the lt Esc gt key Quick Reference To Open a Menu e Click the menu name with the mouse Or e Press lt Alt gt and then the underlined letter in menu Your Organization s Name Here 54 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 3 4 Move the pointer over a button and wait a few seconds for the button s description Figure 3
431. splays the time your computer thinks it is To isplay the date you merely need to move the pointer over the clock and wait a few seconds Monday November 12 2001 i Move the pointer over the clock on the taskbar and wait a few seconds A small box that displays the date appears Display the Current Date To change the date or time double click the clock on the taskbar 2 Double click the clock on the far right edge of the taskbar The Date Time Properties dialog box appears as shown in Figure 6 4 To change the time setting click on the area of the clock you want to adjust and then adjust the settings using the up or down arrows 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Six Customizing Windows 153 3 Click the hour part of the time and click the clock s Up arrow to advance the time one hour as shown in Figure 6 5 You could adjust the minutes the same way by clicking the minute part of the time and then clicking the up or down arrows You can also manually type the numbers using the keyboard You can change the date in the right area of the dialog box Change the month and year by clicking their corresponding text boxes located above the calendar 4 Click the Month list arrow and select January from the list then click the Year text box and click the up arrow to advance the year several years e The calendar actually displays the days in the selected month The current day is highlighted To chan
432. t button and select All Programs gt Accessories gt System Tools System Restore 2 Make sure the Restore my computer to an earlier time option is selected and click Next 3 Select the most recent day that has a restore point when your computer was working properly 4 Close any open programs and then click OK 5 Click Next to restore your computer to the restore point you selected 6 Click OK to close the System Restore window To Create a Restore Point 1 Click the Start button and select All Programs Accessories gt System Tools gt System Restore 2 Select the Create a restore point option and click Next 3 Enter a name for your restore point and click Next 4 Click OK to close the System Restore window Your Organization s Name Here 234 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 8 34 The Hardware tab of the System Properties dialog box Figure 8 35 The Device Manager lists all the hardware devices that are installed on your computer and if any devices are disables or have hardware conflicts Figure 8 36 The Resource tab lets you change the resources a particular device uses Figure 8 37 The Device Manager toolbar shows the different tasks and options available for a selected item A Warning Be extra careful when you use the Device Manager You can cause serious problems A with your computer i you accidentally KY remove or incorrectly
433. t recovery of bad sectors 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer 211 e Automatically fix file system errors Select the Automatically fix errors check box to have Windows fix disk errors without asking your approval first If you don t select this check box Windows XP will prompt you to fix each and every error it finds All files must be closed to run this program and the drive is not available to run other tasks while the disk is being checked If it is in use you will be asked if you want to reschedule the disk checking for the next time you start your computer Checking or unchecking the Scan for and attempt recovery of bad sectors box does one of two things e Scan for and attempt recovery of bad sectors unchecked Checks only the files and folders on the selected drive s for errors A standard test take only a minute or two to run and is the computer equivalent of a 10 point amp maintenance check they do on your car during a routine oil change e Scan for and attempt recovery of bad sectors checked Check files and folders on the selected drive s for errors and the surface of drive for physical damage This can take a long time up to several houN if you have a large hard drive A thorough test is the computer equivalent f an annual vehicle inspection Check the Scan for and attempt recovery of bad sect ption This will run a thorough test on the C
434. t the font from the Courier New v Fo nt Style list on the Formatting toolbar Or e Select Format Font from the menu and select the font type in the Font dialog box Your Organization s Name Here Te Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 3 12 Using Bold Italics and Underline Figure 3 20 WordPad s Formatting toolbar Figure 3 21 The document with bold and italics formatting Figure 3 20 To the La Fanci Nails cones Align Align Font list Font script list Bold Underline Lef ight E w lor Center Bullets g Font Size Italics ate Subject Glue Crisis Italics button Other Ways to Italics e Select Format Font from the menu select Italic from the Font Style box and then click OK e Press lt Ctrl gt lt I gt H 1 Bold button Quick Reference 2 To Format Text with Bold Italics or Underlining e Click the Bold Italics or Underline button on 3 the Formatting toolbar Or e Select Format Font from the menu and select the formatting from the Font Style list pam K e Press the lt Ctrl gt key and lt B gt for Bold lt I gt for Italics lt U gt for Underlining e bought a set gf your press on nails last month gt was very displeased with them While pressing my L stuck to her she Figure 3 21 Fanci Nails on went to pet Q7 poodle Pizzy and my hand and nails Bold Italics In the previous lesson you
435. talogs to airline schedules and much much more Web pages are stored on Web servers A Web server is a computer not unlike your own computer only bigger and faster There are hundreds of thousands of Web servers located all over the world Web servers are always connected to the Internet so that people can view their Web pages 24 hours a day So what can you do once you re connected to the Internet Plenty Table 9 1 What Can I do on the Internet shows just a few of the many things there are to do on the Internet 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Nine Exploring the Internet 245 Table 9 1 What Can I do on the Internet Send and Receive Exchanging electronic mail or e mail is the most used and most popular E mail feature on the Internet Just like regular paper mail you can send and receive e mail with people around the world as long as they have access to a computer and the Internet Unlike regular paper mail e mail is usually delivered to its destination almost instantly Browse the World Wide The World Wide Web is what most people think of when then think of the Web Internet although it s really only a part of the Internet The World Wide Web is an enormous collection of interconnected documents stored on Web servers all over the world The World Wide Web has information on every subject imaginable bf Join online discussions Newsgroups are discussion groups on the Internet that you can joj with newsgroup
436. te In the teats of the Windows Media Player screen double click a Os 7 16 Windows Media Player s Media Library organizes the media files on your computer Quick Reference To Use the Media Library 1 Start the Windows Media Player and click the Media Library tab 2 Expand the media category you want by Clicking its sign 3 Double click the sound you want to play To Create a Playlist Click Eteesi enter a name for the playlist and click OK To Add a File to a Playlist 1 Select the playlist from the My Playlists list to the left 2 Click the LJ button and select Add File 3 Browse to and select the file you want to add to the selected playlist Your Organization s Name Here 194 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 7 12 Listen to Internet Radio Stations with Windows Media Player e Windows Media Player Figure 7 17 EE a i hOn OO B The Windows Media Raion Mata an Re FROM YOUR FAVORITE ARTS Player s Radio Tuner lets Pavin ce stured stations o you listen to radio stations cude p D Billboard Radio Z ee hese areas as shown in from around the world that rea D gt Bloomberg WBBR 1130 AM Radio Table 7 10 Radio Station Drop Lists or H R are broadcast on the Media D CyberRadio2000 com 80s Pop Hits Library gt Jazz FM 102 2 FM Internet Radio D gt MEDIAmazing com Modern Rock Tuner i gt MSNBC Today s Hits Search for the type of
437. te this folder Deletes the selected items and sends them to the Recycle Bin pie l Right click the folder select Rename from the shortcut menu type a name for the folder and press lt Enter gt The contents of the Practice Folder appear in the window That s rig there The Practice Folder is an empty folder since you just created it 7 Click the zj Up button to move back to the root dire You can easily change the name of a folder Here s how a 8 Click the Practice Folder icon S Now let s rename the folder Here s how Your Organization s Name Here 96 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 4 5 Copying Moving and Deleting a Folder Figure 4 10 naaal Favorites Tools Help Mave Items Q B Plah gt Folders Fi Select the place where you want t To ee a eae drag it to an A ick the Mave Enkin a new location on your computer in this case to o a a a My Documents the Temp Folder File and Folder Tasks 3 M Computer fm Rename this folder R f ag 312 F Fi 4 1 1 iy Move this folder J 4 J S F igure gt Copy this folder To A OD Pubich this folder to the b w Items ree k an oni a wae sce E Shared Folders on Server H ox lets you specify where ene Software on Server I you want to move or copy a file or folder Figure 4 10 You probably don t reorganize the folders our file cabinet very often and you probably won t n
438. ter screen by dragging it by its A Title bar B Status bar C Move handle D Tail 6 You have several programs open at the same time ho you switch between these programs Select all that apply A Restart the program Click the Start button point to nA onran menu click the menu and any submenus where the program you vale switch to is located and click the name of the program you want to view W Click the program s icon on the taskbar 4 Click on any visible part of the window you w ppear in front Press and hold down the lt Alt gt key and pre One key to display the task list Press the lt Tab gt key until the program S is selected then release the lt Alt gt ey Homework Click the Start button selec Programs and click the Accessories menu Jaw Start the NotePad prog cated under All Programs Accessories Make the NotePad w fow a few inches bigger Maximize the Not window Restore the N window to its previous size Move the d window to a different location on the screen Open re culator program Tile vindows on the screen by right clicking a blank area of the taskbar CY oth windows KA A z Answers o P eo SS YS QR 1 B A 2 C The little bar along the window s top that lists the program name is the Title bar KY 3 B and D Double clicking the window s Title bar or clicking the window s Maximize button will maximize the window so it fills the entir
439. th The Help s Contents are organized in outline form The book icons that appear to the left of a topic tells you there are sub topics and information under this topic To view this information you have to open or expand the topic by double clicking it O Click the WordPad icon and then click the Format Text topic to expand amp iig it A Options The topic opens and a list of sub topics appear under it as shown in Figure 3 26 amp Options button Click the Change a font type style or size topic it has a question mark H icon that appears to the left of it S W Information on text formatting appears in the right pane of the Help windo in Figure 3 27 You can easily print any Help topic Click the Options button at the top of the dialog box and pO e own Print item The Print Topics box appears We just want to print one topic Select Print Selected Topic and click OK ot The Print dialog box appears ready to carry out your print nd Since you already know how to print in Windows save the paper AY el the print job Click the Cancel button to close the Print dialo Help topic to the printer Q x without sending the AV Quick Reference Q To Get Help by Contents 1 Press lt F1 gt or select amp Help from the menu and ry click the Contents tab if necessary O 2 Scroll down the screen and double click the help topic you re looking for Ww 3 Double click any Help subtopic s Oo To
440. the na a contents of the current drive wouldn t fit on one screen and you wouldn t be able to in the current folder view them all To run a program in DOS go to the program s folder and type the program s name 5 Type EDIT and press lt Enter gt The DOS based EDIT program appears DOS programs aren t as standardized as their more advanced Windows successors so even the most basic commands such as how to exit a program will vary greatly between programs 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 1 19 ES gt Ll eee 6 Press the lt Alt gt key then lt F gt to open the File menu gt then lt X gt to exit the EDIT program You exit from the EDIT program and return to the desolate MS DOS screen 7 Type cD and press lt Enter gt This cryptic command changes to the previous parent folder Let s return back to the warm and user friendly world of Windows 8 Type EXIT and press lt Enter gt The MS DOS Prompt window closes Table 4 8 Common MS DOS Commands A Description AR A Drive Letter drive letter Change the current drive QY Example D would change to the D drive Displays the names of all the files and foldgr in a folder Example DIR w displays the conte e current folder in wide screen view COPY source file destination XCOPY source file XCOPY is a super destination Example xcopy a C NEW would
441. the File and Folder Tasks pressing lt Ctrl gt lt X gt menu in the blue side panel 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 97 Select Fr Move this folder from the File and Folder Tasks menu The Move Items dialog box appears as shown in Figure 4 11 This is where you tell Windows where you want to move the selected folder The Move Items dialog box displays the drives and folders on your computer in a hierarchical view A plus symbol or a minus symbol E beside a folder means a folder contains several subfolders Normally these subfolders are hidden You can display the hidden folders within a folder by clicking the plus sign H beside the folder Click the Plus Symbol to the left of the PL My Computer icon My Computer expands and displays its contents The Local Disk C is where you want to move the My Stuff folder 7 Click the gt Local Disk C icon and click OK amp The My Stuff folder is moved from the Temp Folder back to the root directory of i C drive 8 Click the Up button on the toolbar to move back to the root dire If you can move a folder you can copy a folder because all you need to gt copy a folder is hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while you drag the folder to where y nt it copied bn 9 Hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while you drag the My Stuff 4gIderto the Temp Folder Although you can t see it the My Stuff folder has been copied e Te
442. the Number tab and specify the number formatting you want to apply Your Organization s Name Here Chapter One The Fundamentals lt Chapter Objectives M Prerequisites What s new in Windows XP O e An IBM compatible computer e Windows XP installed on the computer Start and log on to Windows Understand the Windows XP screen Use the mouse to point click double click S click drag and drop V Use the keyboard Exit Windows and turn off the c Understand the new Windows XP interface starting at the right chapter This chapt the bare bones basics about learning how to start your computer and load Windows lI learn how to operate the mouse by clicking double clicking dragging and droppir amp g nd right clicking Youll also learn about your computer s keyboard and what tho ptic looking keys on it are used for Finally youll ur computer down learn how to exit Windows and Before we start take a o and relax You may find this difficult to believe but Welcome to Windows XP If you re new ovs or to computers altogether you re computers aren t nearly as It and complicated as you probably think they are No matter what your previous ex computer illiterate p peal with computers has been this chapter assumes you re the most D the world and keeps everything as simple as possible Actually yov re probably goi ind that some of the lessons in this chapte
443. the and drag a rectangle around want to select hold down window the files you want to select the lt Shift gt key and click the last file Practice Bia Practice DAR Fi ure 4 26 File Edit View Favorites Help d Fie Edit View Favorites Help ay g oe B Preach Py Folders F Q EB P search Folders E Use the lt Ctrl gt key when a n i i ere EA Be Press and hold File and Folder Tasks Ctr ade Show l File and Folder Tasks eE wn h you want to select several B Nove ne r Meeting Memo B vove TE l Ycarta weetn Memo a ey random files the selected 2 copy the selected emer while you click SE d ran eae i ye lt Shift gt key a ce ae z Ban each file you A Fiia the selected d click the x paete the selected a air last file you want to select want to select Figure 4 25 By now you know as move or delege it In this lesson you will learn how to select more than one file ador folder at a ti you can move copy or delete a group of files at the same time te to and open your Practice folder or floppy disk n you can use the following toolbar buttons to find your way around your mputer Lookin Practice 7 Address List Click to list the drives on your computer and the current folder then select the drive and or folder whose contents you want to display gy B Up One Level button Click to move up one folder If necessary follow your instructor s directions to select the a
444. the bottom we a movie cR king the Start button and selecting ndows Movie Maker the collection that has the video clips Quick Reference To Add a Clip toa Storyboard e Select a collection from the Collections window select a clip from the collection and click Clip Add to Storyboard movie and then click Clip Timeline To Remove a Clip from a Storyboard e Click the video clip in the storyboard and click the X Delete button To Rearrange Clips ona Storyboard want to remove and click our video clip collection Now e Place the mouse pointer over the clip you want to move and then drag it to a new location on the storyboard Your Organization s Name Here 200 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 7 24 The Save Movie dialog box Figure 7 25 The Save As dialog box D Open button gt Play button El Save Movie Save Movie A button KY Lesson 7 18 Saving a Project as a Movie Save Movie fiii My Videos v Playback quality D gt Setting Medium quality recommended w A Profile Video for e mail and dual channel ISDN 128 Kbps 42 e amp Video Profile 320x240 pixels 15 frames per second R e 160 0 KB ge E A 0 00 46 28 8 Kbps modem 0 00 23 56 Kbps modem 0 00 10 128 Kbps high speed AS Display information Vehicles on the Street 5 lt Erin Billy gt 12 12 2001 v
445. the desired computer or erver to display its printer s panel click the desired printer and click Nex 3 Click Next Windows wants to know if you want to N ter as your default printer 4 Select the Network Q Specify if you want the selected rk printer to be your default printer ae option and click and click Next ces Windows XP correctly identifie ke and manufacturer of your printer Move on 9 Select the Connect to this printer option and to the next step to finish adding the twork printer click Next kai 10 ne Pen i K o 6 Click the Next button Windows may ask you to the Windows or the printer drivers A khea ieo he software e i 11 AVZ desired network domain If prompted inse printer driver CD ROM and click OK or workgroup essary files on to your computer 8 Click the next to the Windows copies That s it you re c AN desired computer or server click the desired folder i amp printer and click Next 9 Specify whether you want to use the printer as the default printer and assign a different name to the printer if you want Click Next 10 Click Finish to the network printer which appears as an icon in the Printers Your Organization s Name Here 284 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 10 15 The User Accounts dialog box Figure 10 16 Enter a User Name full name and an optional description to the Add New User dialog box Figure 10 17 Specify the level of access you want to give
446. this folder from the File and Folder Tasks panel and click Permissions If the user account or group you want to assign permissions to isn t listed click Add If you don t know the exact name of the user account s or group s click Advanced to open the Advanced Select Users or Groups dialog box and click Find Now to browse all available user accounts and groups Select the user account s or group s and click OK OK when you re finished lf the user account or group you want to assign permissions to is listed select the group or user account whose permissions you want to modify and then check or uncheck the permissions you want to grant or deny Repeat for all the groups and or user accounts 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Ten Networking with Windows XP 299 Quiz p P A large corporation would probably use a peer to peer network as its network True or False What are the benefits of networking Select all that apply A A network allows you to share information such as files and folders O B A network allows you to share equipment such as printers C A network allows you to use software designed for networks such as e mail and multi user databases N D A network allows you to share electricity and conserve power K Which is NOT a required part of a network O A A network operating software B Cables lt C A Network Interface Card NIC O D A Network administrator You
447. tings Show pop up description for folder and desktop items computer properly are hidden so they are not accidentally removed or changed When you open a folder this option specifies that it is opened as a separate part of memory This can increase the stability of Windows however it might decrease your computer s performance Specifies that any folder settings you selected are retained vA whenever you reopen it When this box is not checked all folders return to their original state after you close them Shows a description of the selected item in a small pop up window If your folder is being displayed as a Web page selecting this option has no effect because the same information already appears in the left pane of the folder Your Organization s Name Here 174 Microsoft Windows XP Chapter Six Review Lesson Summary A Look at the Control Panel AS e The Control Panel is where you can change the various settings of yo iu and Windows e Open Control Panel by clicking the Start button and selecting Co QP ine or by opening the Start menu clicking My Computer clicking Other Places roy e side panel and Control Panel Changing the Date and Time gt e Point at the clock on the taskbar for several seco play the current date e To Change the Date and or Time Double clic using the calendar and clock controls and cli ock on the taskbar adjust the date and time e To Change Time
448. tion changing Cy DIR command DOS 9 Disk Cleanupiccxdicomsccacucs 14 Disk Defragmenter ee 213 display color depth changin N NA 162 screen colors ka Ni ET 156 screen saver adden J 164 wallpaper addps 158 DOC file extension ccccccees 180 documents list if Start menu 136 DOS comma dA 119 DOS ey a E E E 118 doubl qh go eects 20 down EIES eee 258 dra and dropping cceeeeeeees 22 ING a WINdOW ccceeeeeeeeeeenees 42 ndow to new position 000 41 ye downloading from Internet 258 rEMOVIN uaa 234 drives YDES Olorire aa e ea 88 DriveSpace 3 disk compression 215 DSL Internet connection 000000 247 E COMING EX occ os ct tocaae a heathen 60 e mail address book adding names 264 address OVELVICW cceeeeccceeeeceeeeees 260 attaching files to ecceceeeeeeeees 263 COMPOSING cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees deleno onra EE POL WAL QUIN 2 eresse Donnain introduction to printing receiving and reat replying sending S a laste etae 262 using Outl OI KEN SE nee 260 emotion di g in e mail 268 emptying Bietan 102 Pod koere inie a Zi Ener r compliant monitor 165 Exiting Windows XP ccccceeeeeeeeees 28 Explorer dragging and dropping
449. tions 00ccceeeeeeeeees 29 Shutting down Windows XP 5 2 Small Icons VICW ceeeeeeeeessssntteeeees l N software e Mstan staae e Q POMIO VAIO ea e vatemseeens lt 0 Solitaire W dragging and dropping u 6 22 sound adjusting volumne Oo PA E AE 154 assigning to syste wA ee 166 e chaging system re sateen 166 muting o_O re 154 Q SE atemaece 183 recording Sound Recordd D cccccseeeeseeees 183 speaker 1COg Dp eceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 154 Stand by OptrOMml ee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 29 Start DUG ciranean aal 16 Sta A Mand eeose 34 Start u Qaes HSan o an 136 Ay A COMMANG oaei 138 S rting PORTIS ee a aehuceo enor ecteet aes 34 programs automatically 142 WANdOWS oet e eE A 14 Sarup Tolder asn 142 SAS DAL onn e 36 stop transfer of Web pages 00 251 switching between program 44 SY SCCM RESTOTE orire a 232 T LAO KCY R PE E N 2 Task Sched let saretan 216 Task WINdOW acanssieradonasni etaa 44 taskbar CLOCK E E A 152 Midin esnan a tac cs 130 INNO V1 onai a EA 130 Quick Launch toolbar 00 134 POSIZANG enorer hea 130 Speaker 1CON acacia aes 154 switching between programs 44 task Dare yatoetiarmenuanaanes 16 text Your Organization s Name Here 306 index COP YS ainicin e AR 68 Web address 0sccicasienrescsaneaiiaa
450. tretches the image so that it fills the entire screen Click the Position combo box and select Center QY You re ready to add your wallpaper AS Click Apply The Red moon desert background appears centered on your screen I Cy nt to use a picture that isn t listed in the Background section such as a scanned of your family click the Browse button Click the Browse button A Browse dialog box appears asking you to specify the na ocation of the file you want to use as your wallpaper Close the Browse dialog box X To remove wallpaper from your screen just repeat stg l1 and 2 and select None from the Wallpaper section In the Background section select None the list and then click Quick Reference WR To Add or Change The Display Properties dialog box closes screen wallpaper is removed from the Wallpaper 1 Right click a blank area he Web with Microsoft s Internet Explorer on the desktop and select the Web browser that comes with Win and happen to see a graphic or picture you Properties from the like you can use it as your wallpaper Jus amp gght click the graphic and select the Set as shortcut menu Wallpaper option from the shortcut m ny to save the image from the Internet and display it as 2 Make sure the Desktop wallpaper tab is selected then select the wallpaper you O want to use from the WO preset list or click Browse and specify the K name and location of your own
451. tyle to Classic if you don t like XP styl B You can change the colors for all Windows objects at once using cheme C Double click the clock on the taskbar to adjust the time and d r computer thinks it is amp D You can only use preset patterns as your desktop wallpap 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 are all eal D A Color depths B Dimensions for the three largest patios in the wo C Screen resolutions Q Se a calculator to solve D Multiplication problems that you would nee ow The Dukes of Hazard Which tomize your computer to show en show You re a huge fan of the early 1980s of the following are ways you could everyone your devotion to this fo A Change the desktop wallpaper tA priederate flag like the paint job on the Duke boys car B Apply the The Dukes of npr desktop theme which comes with Windows XP C Addasystem sound so enever someone turns your computer on they hear Sheriff Roscoe exclaim Mem Dukes them Dukes D Windows XP doem Aw you to personalize your computer in such poor taste You can Sth A Slee double click speed by clicking the Mouse icon in Printers Ko Hardware heading of the Control Panel True or False Which ng following is a major difference between Windows 95 and Windo Ag Wlejrames in Windows XP can contain up to 256 characters instead of only 8 racters in Windows 95 indows XP responds to voice commands computer like a Web page D Windows
452. u Can you find it Click the word WordPad Accessories The WordPad program appears on the screen in its own window as shown in Figure Accessories 2 3 WordPad is a simple word processing program that is included with Microsoft Windows S e NOTE The All Programs menu is merely a list of the programs that should be A available on your computer When installed programs should automati Qy A WordPad f u add themselves to the Start menu Occasionally old MS DOS prog programs that are poorly written may not put themselves on the Star WordPad program when you install them and you will have to find and add the poagn to the All Programs menu yourself You l learn how to manually Ko rams to the Start menu in an upcoming lesson A Most programs run in their own separate Qy window on the screen Quick Reference lt To Start a Program 1 Click the Start button ry 2 If the program appears on the Start menu click it O otherwise point to the All WO Programs option Yor 3 Click the menu and any X submenus where the program you want to run is located 4 Click the name of the KY program you want to run Your Organization s Name Here 36 Microsoft Windows XP Figure 2 4 The parts of a typical window Lesson 2 2 Understanding the Parts of a Window Minimize Maximize button oy Ei Document WordPad ells Close button File Edit View Insert Format Help Dah Sl
453. u want to download select Save Target As from the shortcut menu 2 Navigate to the drive and folder when you want to save the file give the file a different name if you want and click OK Your Organization s Name Here 260 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 9 9 Introduction to E mail K Outlook Express Figure 9 20 File Edit View Tools Message Help Microsoft Outlook Express TOA A E EVS is the e mail program that s is included with Windows Folders XP E Outlook Express S S Local Folders for Jonathan High E mail folders a Inbox 1 Find a a _ see Table 9 3 Outbox i of the da ene E mail Folders os T o anes cure tne tack y for their B Drafts Create a new Mail message move and i IC e tas Outlook Express s toolbar se caption Read Mail a you want to Figure 9 22 E theinternes perform here Set up a Newsgroups account Any e mail you Contacts Y ee ena a send when offline Many people prefer to use Monique will go in the Aw fanny 1 Open the Addre ook cares arf ee Web based e mail such Carmia BA Find People ae ee H t il i Aala Sexy Me hotmal com When Outlook Express sta irectly to my Inbox 4 Previous Next gt as Hotmail since you can Lui use it anywhere on any computer that has a Figure 9 20 connection to the Internet Figure 9 23 a http Ic1 law 13 hotmail passport com cgi bin login Microsoft Internet Explorer DE Sends any messages Fie Edit View Brd
454. u view certain stored in the Downloaded Program hard disk Q ED mg gt C Compress drive to save disk space Allow Indexing Service to index this disk for fast file searching Lo Cancel Figure 8 8 After working at your desk for ay days you create unnecessary paperwork that you throw away to free your desk from clutter Windows does the same thing as time passes except instead of paper it creates un ary files that don t do anything except waste valuable space on your hard disk T Cleanup utility program erases these garbage files for you This lesson explains nome the Disk Cleanup utility to clear these unnecessary files from your computer Open MaM puter right click the C hard drive icon select Properties rom the shortcut menu and click the General tab if necessary The erties for the selected drive appear as shown in Figure 8 8 he Disk Cleanup button widows looks at the hard disk and determines how many unnecessary files you can lete and how much space will be freed by deleting these files After several seconds the Disk Cleanup dialog box appears and displays this information as shown in Figure 8 9 The files you can safely delete fall into several categories see Table 8 1 Types of Files you can Safely Delete to Save Hard Disk Space for descriptions of them Click OK Disk Cleanup deletes the selected types of unnecessary files That s all there is to using Disk Cleanup to free s
455. ually hidden Displays the path of the folder in the address bar of th dow such as C Windows Program Files instead of just Files Displays the path of the folder in the title bar of tf ey dow such as C Windows Program Files instead of jusp regram Files When you store images in a cache file Hin a can reuse them instead of recreating them each time you a folder By disabling this automatic function folde t contain thumbnails might take longer to open Hides program or system files tha Ro fild not be changed Select this option to protect critical hiddevwiles from accidentally being changed or deleted and to e Clutter in your folders Right click a file and s erties to find out whether it is designated as hidden Specifies that both n and system files do not appear Select this option to pr r hidden files from being accidentally deleted and to reduce clutter in your folder windows es including hidden and system files appear g amp in this folder Power Windows users like to use Display the full path in the address bar Display the full path in title bar Do not cache thumbnails Hidden files and folders Do not show hidden or system files Show all files Hide file extensions y v y v for known file types y Hide protected operating system files Recommended Launch folder windows in a separate process N folder s view set
456. uments are now on the Start menu making it your single source s finding documents and changing computer settings Start menu takes a lot of getting use to especially if you re familiar 1 in previous versions of Windows Once again there isn t a step by step sson all you have to do is look at Figure 1 5 and then refer to Table 1 3 indows XP Start Menu to see what everything in the new Windows XP Start The Windows XP Start menu appears as shown in Figure 1 5 K Keep the Start menu open and refer to Table 1 3 Items in the Windows XP Start Menu to find what s new in the Windows XP Start menu The new Windows XP Start menu takes a lot of getting use to especially if you re familiar with the Start menu used in earlier versions of Windows such as Windows 95 and 98 Don t worry if you can t get use to the new Windows XP Start menu it s easy to change the Start menu back to the classic Smart menu that you re familiar with we ll cover that very topic in another chapter 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter One The Fundamentals 19 Table 1 3 Items in the Windows XP Start Menu item sid Description ___ O O e Internet Explorer Opens your Internet browser G Outlook Express Opens your e mail software Gives you quick access to the programs you use most often If a Recently Used Programs program doesn t appear here you will have to look under All Programs Left Side Gives you a
457. und card and na record sounds with Sound Recorder and you ll need speakers if you ear what you recorded 4 True You can use the calculator in stand or scientific mode 5 C Starcraft doesn t come with Windo although it is a great game 6 C Bitmap BMP files are the defaGyprmat used by Paint 7 A Amagic 8 ball will not co o your computer Thus sadly it cannot be a video source Q 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Eight Optimizing and lt Maintaining your lt Computer Chapter Objectives VI Prerequisites e How to use the mouse Formatting and copying a floppy disk cdda aieia Defragmenting and fixing errors on your Gy disk drop and drag and oni 4 hard iO right click acKing up and restoring your hard dis e How to use menus Freeing up space on your hard di QO toolbars and dialog boxes Scheduling tasks WwW e How to view and Installing and removing sof navigate through the contents of your Adding and removing Wind amp ys components computer disk drives and folders e Installing a printer Installing new har Using the Winddg xP update feature maintenanc are simple and routine such as changing oil every 3 000 miles Others are more complicaWd such as installing a new radio Computers are no different Your computer requires routine maintenance to prevent and or correct problems when you want to add or remove hardware or software and to keep it runnin
458. ur hard disk 2 Start Error checkin a standard scan of your hard disk and have Windows automatically fix ors it finds 3 Open the Task uler Would you know how to add a task to the Task Scheduler A floppy disk with bad sectors is unreliable don t use it True 3 C Error checking will find and repair most disk errors it finds but it s oblivious to V computer viruses You will need a virus scanning program for that 4 B Since you don t use the Drive Converter FAT32 program much if ever it s not located under the Disk Properties dialog box 5 D Adding programs to the task scheduler runs them on the days and times you specify A B and D All of these are methods to install software B There are many Windows components that are often not installed when you install Windows XP to save space and because most people would not use them 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Eight Optimizing and Maintaining your Computer 241 8 False The most common printer port is LPT1 9 D Although this statement certainly seems to be true Plug and Play devices actually get their name because you supposedly can plug them in and start using them Your Organization s Name Here Chapter Nine Exploring the lt nternet Chapter Objectives V Prerequisites e How to use the mouse Understand and connect to the Internet to click double click Find a specific Web page drop and dra
459. ure 6 19 The Screen Saver tab of the Display Properties dialog box Lesson 6 8 Using a Screen Saver 3D Pipes Setti Display Properties ipes Settings Se Pipes Pipe Style Themes Desktop Screen Saver Appearance Settings Single Joint Type a arance a O Multiple Elbow Surface Style Speed Solid O Textured Display Settings Figure 6 1 Displays a creen saver will look soreen sae Specify regen time must elapse before iil isplays the selected screen saver password to your screen saver to ct your computer from unauthorized use To adjust monitor power settings and save energy f i itk F Op ows will not clear a screen saver until this Monitor power ssword is typed correctly Change the energy saving features of your monitor A screen saver is a moving a on the computer screen when you haven t used your computer for a while Screen sWers were originally used to protect screens from screen burn which could occur whe atic image was left on the screen for hours and hours You may have seen examples o burn on older cash machines You don t have to worry about screen burn with K monitors but many people still like to use screen savers for entertainment and to p lize their computers This lesson will how to make a screen saver appear if your computer hasn t been touched for a whi ou will also learn how to conserve power by having the monitor switch t
460. ure 7 21 If you are a home video nut you re going to love Windows Movi Maker With Windows Movie Maker you can edit and play movies that you transf m a video source a camcorder VCR DVD player Web camera or televisi adcast to your computer In order to use Windows Movie Maker you ll need sge equipment as shown in Table 7 11 Movie Maker Equipment xO Table 7 11 Movie Maker Equipment Equipment Purpose Cables You will need these to Wgnnect your computer to your video source if you want to transfer video to enablg video transfer Commonly used connectors are FireWire Ports Connector Depending o pe of video source you are using you will need a connector or Care REN Cards USB Ports or Cards or Video Capture Cards Minimum Your uter must have the following minimum requirements if you want to Computer use ows Movie Maker Requirements 2 GB of free local disk space 64 MB of RAM 300 MHz Pentium II or equivalent Sound aptitude if you want sound with your video OF 7 20 need a video source to transfer video into Windows Movie Maker Figure 7 21 The Windows Movie Maker Quick Reference Common Video Sources e Camcorder VCR DVD Player Web Camera or Television Broadcast To Record Video from a Video Source onto your Computer You Will Need e Cables e A Connector e Minimum Computer Requirements Your Organization s Name Here 1 98 Microsoft Windows XP
461. user account that S as administrative The Select Users or Groups dialog box appears as shown in Figure 10 28 Here is amp privileges 2 Find and select the drive or folder you want to share and click ax Share this folder from the File and Folder Tasks panel 3 Click Permissions 4 If the user account or group you want to assign permissions to isn t listed click Add otherwise skip ahead to Step 6 5 If you know the name of the user account s or group s enter it them in the text box and click OK If you don t know the exact name of the user account s or group s click Advanced to open the Advanced Select Users or Groups dialog box and click Find Now to browse all available user accounts and groups Select the user account s or group s and click OK OK when you re finished 6 Repeat Step 5 for each user Or group you want to have access Click OK when you re finished 7 Select the group or user account whose permissions you want to modify and then check or uncheck the permissions you want to grant or deny Repeat for all the groups and or user accounts Your Organization s Name Here 294 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 10 11 Specifying Security Options to a Shared Folder Figure 10 31 Temp Properties Enter the name of the user account or group you want to select General Sharing Securty Customize
462. ustomizing Windows 175 Adjusting the Screen Color Depth e Color depth has to do with how many colors are displayed on the screen at the same time e To Change the Screen Resolution Right click a blank area on the desktop and select Properties from the shortcut menu click the Settings tab click the Color quality list select the Color Depth setting you want to use and click OK Using a Screen Saver e To Set Up a Screen Saver Right click a blank area on the desktop and select Properties from the amp shortcut menu Click the Screen Saver tab expand the Screen Saver list select a screen saver and click OK amp e You can password protect your screen saver by clicking the On resume password protect te box Windows will automatically assign your Start Windows password to the screen ae e You can adjust the energy saving features of your monitor by opening the Screen Saver Mui the Display Properties dialog box clicking the Power button in the Monitor power sectioatend adjusting the interval after which the monitor shuts off O Changing System and Program Sounds gt l e To Use a Sound Scheme Click the Start button click Control Panel ck the Sounds Speech and Audio Devices icon Click Change the sound schem t a scheme from the Sound scheme list and click OK e To Assign a Sound to a Specific Windows Event Click the Nion click Control Panel and click the Sounds Speech and Audio Devices icon S he event for which
463. ve saved Shut Down button everything you ve been working on such as letters you created in your word Other Wavs to Shut processing program If Windows notices you haven t saved a file it asks if D aes SaaS you want to save the changes you made to the file before it completes the shut down procedure e Press lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt l lt gt i After a minute or two Windows finishes shutting down and tells you it s safe to turn Delete gt A dialog box off your computer ill appear and you can oose to shut down 5 Turn your computer and monitor off This final step is optional S Congratulations You ve completed the chapter and are well on your way to mastering Windows XP You re probably wondering What were those other Shut Down options Table 1 7 Shut Down Windows Options explains them AG Table 1 7 Shut Down Windows Options aT Shut Down Option What it Does Stand by Use Stand by if you have a laptop and are going ve your computer briefly but want to conserve as much energy ble while you are away After you return your computer to its running state you will be able to pick up exactly where you left o ke sure you save everything you were working on first Use this option if you want to turn omputer off It saves your Windows settings and saves ation stored in memory to the local disk Restart Saves any Windows sep rites any information stored in your computer s memory to t al disk and r
464. vices of your computer system It s what makes your printer print what graphics and text appear on your monitor and what makes your mouse point a Actually you make the mouse point and click but Windows is what puts th pointer Fs on the screen and electronically connects it to your mouse e Runs Y T omputer s Programs Windows what runs all your programs Without Windows your word processor Web nternet and games wouldn t work Windows lets your programs talk to your so for example your word processor can print things to the printer va hs nizes Files Yndows stores information in files and folders on your computer s local disk just like Sou store files and folders in a filing cabinet ink of Windows XP as an orchestra conductor who makes sure all the parts of your A computer your hardware and programs work together Operating systems have been KY around for a long time what makes Windows special is its ability to make computer operations easy In the computer stone age about 15 years ago people had to type hard to remember cryptic commands into their computer to make them do what they wanted With Windows all you have to do is point and click to do something much much easier So what s the difference between Windows XP and other versions of Windows such as Windows 98 and Windows ME Table 1 1 Whats New in Windows XP discusses some of the major differences 2002 CustomGuid
465. visible keep reading Let s track down that cute little Quick Launch toolbar 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Five Customizing the Taskbar and Desktop 1 35 10 11 12 13 Right click on an empty space on the Taskbar and choose Toolbars The toolbar menu appears We ve found Quick Launch If Quick Launch doesn t have a checkmark by it click on it The Quick Launch toolbar appears on the left hand side of your taskbar and the toolbar menu closes Open My Computer The procedure of adding a program or file to the Quick Launch toolbar is almost the same as adding a shortcut to the desktop so you need to find the program you want to add Open the Windows folder in the Local Drive C Now find the Notepad program and add it to the Quick Launch toolbar S Find the Notepad program and drag it down to the Quick Launch toolbar area of the taskbar as shown in Figure 5 13 i Since there isn t a lot of room on the Quick Launch toolbar you will probab e to resize it to see all of its contents Again here s how to resize the Quick aS toolbar on Drag the Quick Launch toolbar s right border to the right ab inch You ve just resized the Quick Launch toolbar The only problem making the Quick Launch toolbar bigger is that you make the rest of the tas aller Try running the Notepad program from the Quick Launch toolbar Click the Notepad icon on the Quick Launch toolb The Notepad
466. while performing a graphical other tasks on Media representation rs your computer of the current Copy from CD song ww Libra Radio Tuner M Copy cD w Dev ce Sn Chooser Total Time 57 19 clicking Wiese buttons Figure 7 14 New in Windows XP the Windows Media Player is a center for playing and organizing multimedia on your computer and on the Internet The Windows Media Player is like having a radio CD player and MP3 player all in one You can use the Windows Media Player to listen to radio stations from all over the world to play and copy CDs to play MP3 files and more This lesson is your introduction to the Windows Media Player In it you ll learn how to play an audio CD and even copy music from an audio CD onto your hard drive First here s how to play an audio CD 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Seven The Free Programs 191 1 Insert the CD you want to play into your CD ROM drive The Audio CD dialog box appears Let s tell it what we want to do 2 Select the Play Audio CD Using Windows Media Player tab and click OK The Windows Media Player appears as shown in Figure 7 13 and the CD starts playing If you re connected to the Internet the Windows Media Player will download and display the name of the CD and its songs If you re not connected to the Internet only the tracks on the CD will be displayed To play a specific song on the list double click the song
467. will progra have Not responding message after them WordPad hasn t stopped responding but forsake of this lesson we ll pretend it has 3 Select WordPad and click End Task Windows forcibly closes the WordPad program Sometimes a program may cause your entire computer to lock up and even pressing lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt lt Delete gt won t do anything What should you do when this happens There is only one thing you can do turn your computer off and restart it Your Organization s Name Here 228 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 8 13 Installing New Hardware Found New Hardware Wizard Add Hardware Wizard Figure 8 E 28 Welcome to the Found New Please wait while the wizard searches Hardware Wizard The Found New Hardware NE AEE PARET E Wizard Standard PCMCIA Card Modem packers eat ae coro amp Figure 8 29 if your hardware came with an installation CD N lt 4 or floppy disk insert it now QY The Add Hardware Wizard lt What do you want the wizard to do se a ie h e S fo r n ew Install the software automatically Recommended h d rdwa re i Install from a list or specific location Advanced lt Figure 8 _ 30 Click Next to continue Windows displays the hardware it found Figure 8 28 Found New Hardware Wizard Please select the best match for your hardware from the list below I Standard PCMCIA Card Modem Description Version Manufacturer Siera Wireless AirCard
468. win you make four stacks of cards on the home cells one for each SigisSeerCked in order of rank Multi player card game The object of Hearts is to have the lowest score at the end of th gaine Newin VWitidows XP Internet Backgammon lets you play a game of DEKE ammon against another players on the Internet w M esweeper Find all the mines on the playing field as quickly as possible without uncovering any of them Pinball A classic pinball game that doesn t required a quarter to play The object of the game is to use all the cards in the deck to build up the four suit stacks from ace to king Spider Solitaire An advanced solitaire card game 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Seven The Free Programs 189 Lesson 7 8 Character Map P Character Map Figure 7 12 The Character Map 5 6 7 8 9 lt gt A B C D E F G VJ K L MIN O P Q R s T UlvM4x Z 11 I _ alble d e f a h i ijk ifm njojp falr s t ulviwixiyiz e i s ileje sS Jet 7 e mcte a RE 414 241 AAAA AA B N f 000 j ater rfaln gg lb y AjajAjajAjaj jCje a Characters to copy e Select _ C Advanced view U 0021 Exclamation Mark Figure 7 12 Believe it or not you can enter many more characters and symbols in a doctf be found on the computer s keyboard For example you can insert the c ight symbol accented and foreign characters silly charact
469. window from the task list While still holding down the lt Alt gt key press ang fycase the lt Tab gt key until the WordPad program is selected then reledse the lt Alt gt key When you release the lt Alt gt key the selected win program is activated and displayed in front of any other windows NOTE lt Alt gt lt Tab gt is especially useful you use programs that fill the entire computer screen such as MS DORs and some games When you can t see the taskbar or any paggf another window lt Alt gt lt Tab gt is the only way you can switch between ms Document WordPad WordPad button on the taskbar Quick Reference NOTE When you re working wit ple programs be careful not to accidentally run a second copy of the Same program This wastes memory and makes To Switch between Open things confusing For example if you ve been using the Calculator program Programs and want to bring it amp ekup make sure you check the taskbar to see if it s e Click the program s icon already running ulator icon appears on the taskbar If it is use any of on the taskbar the methods earned in this lesson to switch to it Ifa program is Or already run N you load it again from the Start menu a second copy of the progra s and two icons for the program will appear on the taskbar i Click on any part of the Yog window you want to Think you have a had ritchin between programs and windows Good because when ap
470. with a wonderful called undo that does just that it undoes your last action making it as though it nev pened You may not want to admit this but you re sour ma mistakes when you use Windows puters in general are often terrified of using ill make a mistake and seriously mess things up your computer than you think it is Secondly you you do make a mistake you can easily cancel it Many people that are new to Windows or computers because they are afraid th First of all it s more difficult to will learn how to use Undo so ev 1 Select the subj Qc Crisis line and delete it by pressing the mistake 2 Click the button on the Standard toolbar to cancel your last changee Poof re lt Delete gt key Whoops You om want to delete that Watch how you can undo your ad cancels your last action and the deleted text Subject Glue Crisis rams Undo will only cancel your last action or change if you don t catch your mis Wht after you make it Undo may not be able to help Or xo e Press lt Ctrl gt lt Z gt KY 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Working with a Windows Program 67 Lesson 3 9 Printing a File Figure 3 16 General Select Printer The Print dialog box E Add Printer o 4 Acrobat Distiller ATektronix Phaser 860DP by Xerox on SERVER Status Ready C Print to file Page Range Al Number of copies 1 E O Pages 1 6
471. without holding down the mouse feature that allo ou to highlight or drag button To set briefly press the mouse button To release click the i mouse button again without holdi n the mouse button Figure 6 22 Buttons Pointers Pointer Options Wheel Hardware Mouse Properties a Motion T Select a pointer sphed Drag the slider to change the pointer J speed Slow Y Enhance pointer precision This option automatically points to the Snap To default button in a dialog box a Automatically move pointer to the default b oe ed oe Oe Click here to leave a trail of pointers as you move across the screen good option Visibility for laptop users on Display pointer trails oni Drag the slider to change the length of the pointer trail Hide pointer whilg Uncheck this default setting to show the l Show location pf pointer When I press the CTRL key cursor on the screen at all times Check this box to find your cursor easily Ac n complaint many users have about Windows is they don t like how the mouse weksvThe mouse either is too slow or too fast does not respond very well to your double or worst of all if you re left handed its buttons are in the wrong places is lesson shows you how to adjust the mouse settings to make it easier for you to work A with KUY 1 Open the Control Panel by clicking the Start button and clicking Control Panel Q The Control Panel opens k 2 Doub
472. wn personalized Start menu and desktop For example say you re logged on as Joe Schnook and add a desktop shortcut to an encyclopedia program The encyclopedia program shortcut won t appear on Mary Johnson s desktop when she logs on to Windows XP because Joe Schnook added to his own personal Windows XP desktop To create a new user account you must be logged on to Windows XP as an administrator or know the administrator password 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Ten Networking with Windows XP 285 1 Click the Start button and select Control Panel The Control Panel appears Time to see if you have the permissions needed to add a new user account or if you will have to make a call to your company s computer support department 2 Click the User Accounts icon If you re not logged on with administrative privileges Windows will prompt you to enter the password for the Administrator If you don t know the administrative password you will need to make a call to your network administrator or computer support person and have them create a new user account for you Otherwise move on to the next step to start adding a new user account 3 Enter the Administrator account and Password and click OK You re ready to start entering the new user account AY 4 Click Add The Add New User dialog box appears as shown in Figure 10 16 Ww 5 Type the user name in the Username box User names cannot be the same to any othe
473. word about the Recycle Bin any files you in the Recycle Bin So be extra careful when you re delet Delete the Current Budget file from the Desktop There is theoretically a limit to how many deleted files and folders the Recycle bin can hold The maximum size of the Recycle bin is normally set 10 percent of the hard drive So for example if you have a 1OGB hard drive the maximum amount of files the recycle bin could hold would be 1GB When the Recycle Bin reaches its limit Windows automatically starts deleting files from the Recycle bin starting with the oldest file You can adjust the properties for the Recycle Bin so you could adjust its maximum Other Ways to Empty size from 10 percent of the hard drive to 5 percent by right clicking the Recycle Bin Recycle Bin and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu amp ght click the Recycle Usually it s best to let Windows automatically handle the Recycle Bin but you can K Bin and select Empty also manually empty the Recycle Bin if you need more free space on your ae Ay Recycle Bin from the Double click the Recycle Bin to open it NA sah oe in The contents of the Recycle Bin appear Click Empty the Recycle Bin from the Recycle Bin Tasks pane A dialog box may appear and ask you to confirm your deletion Click Yes if asked to confirm the deletion s Oo W the Recycle Bin icon no longer displays any trash indicating that it 1 ty s automatically t have to manually the R
474. ws XP is the folder task pane which makes working with files and folders even easier If the My Computer window is small the contents of the folder task pane may be hidden from view at first 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Four Working with Files and Folders 95 3 If necessary click the amp File and Folder Tasks arrow in the folder task Open panel Explore Search The contents of the File and Folder Tasks panel appear 4 Select E Make a new folder task from the File and Folder Tasks panel Sharing and Security Send To a A new folder appears with a temporary name New Folder as shown in Figure 4 9 e Now all you have to do is move on to the next step and give the new folder a name Copy 5 Type Practice Folder as the name for the new folder and then press Create Shortcut lt Enter gt Delete Rename Your new Practice Folder is located in the root directory or first folder of the c C drive You can create a folder inside any existing folder the same way by as opening the folder and then repeating Steps 3 5 You can create as many folders as y Other Ways to Rename a like to develop your own filing system to help organize your files and folders onde Folder Practice Folder to display its contents e Right click the folder and select Rename from the shortcut menu NOTE A file name can contain up to 255 characters including spaces Flagg cannot contain the following characte
475. x Be 1 Lay already open start Outlook Express by clicking the Outlook Inbox folder ress button on the taskbar s Quick Launch toolbar e Outlook Express main program screen appears Click the Inbox folder in the left pane of the Outlook Express window AA The contents of the Inbox folder appear in the upper right pane of the Outlook Express window as shown in Figure 9 29 Let s check and see if you have any new e mail a gy 3 Click the Send and Receive button on the Outlook Express toolbar Send Recv Normally Outlook Express automatically checks your mail server for new messages Send and Receive every 30 minutes If it finds any new messages on your mail server it downloads them button and saves them to your computer You can force Outlook to check for new messages by Other Ways to Send and clicking the Send and Receive button If you connect to the Internet with a modem Receive Messages connection Outlook Express will automatically dial out and connect to the Internet to establish a connection with your mail server e Press lt Ctrl gt lt M gt y 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Nine Exploring the Internet 267 Your new messages are saved in the Inbox folder Any new unread messages appear in bold and have a closed envelope icon 4 next to them Here s how to open and read a message Click the message you want to read The contents of the message appear in the lower right pane of Outlook Express an
476. xpands and displays its contents The Desktop folder in Local Disk is where you want to move the Current Budget file Click the Local Disk C icon select the Desktop folder and TN Move S The Current Budget file is moved to the Desktop folder in the C drive Click the Address Bar arrow and select Local Disk So You re back in the root folder of the C drive The method for copying a file is identical to copying a folder Hop the lt Ctrl gt key and drag the file to the location where you want it copied Open the Desktop folder Hold down the lt Ctrl gt k Current Budget file to the Windows Desktop S t Now there are two copies of the Current Budget file on NOTE Some people actually do save their aes files to the Desktop so that drag the esktop they won t lose them Just make sure t don t save too many files there nobody likes a messy desktop We don t want to clutter your computer s x with practice files so let s delete the Current Budget files from the Desktop Close the My Computer window The My Computer window closes Current Budget files Hold down the Shift key togselett both files at the same time select the Current Budget files wees lt Delete gt Windows deletes both of O rrent Budget files g you to view the Desktop and the copied Quick Reference To Move a File e Drag the file to the sired location you may e to open another Si window r
477. y 26 December 20 __ 26 December 2001 3 10 45 PM NI 1N AF DM v Figure 3 3 To make a program do Window program in s bidding you give it commands You can give commands to your different ways by using menus toolbars right mouse button shortcut menus an oke shortcuts This lesson explains the most common method of issuing comman indows programs through menus You can find a program s menu near the top of g window just beneath the title bar In Figure 3 2 notice the words File Edit View Insert t and Help that appear near the top of the WordPad program Those words the next few steps will show you why they re there the Start button e Start menu appears Select All Programs Accessories WordPad from the Start menu N That means you should click All Programs then click the word Accessories from the All Programs menu and then click the word WordPad from the Accessories menu as shown in Figure 3 1 The WordPad program appears Move the pointer to and click the word Insert on the menu bar as shown in Figure 3 2 A menu drops down under the word Insert as shown in Figure 3 2 The Insert menu contains a list of commands to insert things such as the Date and Time which inserts the current date and or time and Object which inserts a file created in another program 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Three Working with a Windows Program 53
478. y opened documents Figure 5 12 tten this far in the chapter you ve already learned the most important ways that stomize the Windows Start menu and taskbar This lesson deals with the remaining so important ways to customize the Start menu and taskbar There are a lot of trivial menu and taskbar options we won t be actually covering any of these options in this on but we ll show you how to get to them Let s get started Right click the taskbar and select Properties from the shortcut menu The Taskbar and Start menu properties dialog box appears as shown in Figure 5 9 The most common options for customizing the Windows Start menu and taskbar appear here We won t be going through each of these options but you can learn more about them in Table 5 1 Taskbar Options Click the Start Menu tab The Start Menu tab appears as shown in Figure 5 10 This is where you can select the type of Start menu that you want to use by selecting one of the following two options 2002 CustomGuide Inc Chapter Five Customizing the Taskbar and Desktop 1 33 e Start Menu Use the new Windows XP Start menu that gives you quick access to your documents pictures and music and recently used programs e Classic Start Menu Use a Start menu that has the same look and behavior as earlier versions of Windows You can further customize the Windows Start menu by clicking the Customize button 3 Click Customize The General t
479. you want any errors to be automatically fixed and if you want to scan for and attempt recovery of bad sectors 5 Click Start Your Organization s Name Here 2 1 2 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 8 4 Defragmenting Your Hard Disk Figure 8 5 Local Disk C Properties General Tools Hardware Sharing Security Quota The Tools tab of the C ee j or checking Properties dialog box This option will check the volume for emors Figure 8 6 Check Now Disk Defragmenter Disk Defragmenter reports Defragmentation if the disk needs to be amp This option will defragment files on the volume defragmented Figure 8 7 Backup Ie ge This option will back up files on the volume se The Defragmenting Drive displays the defragmentation process Figure 8 5 Disk Defragmenter File Action View Help Es Free Space Estimated disk usage before S iagmentation e Estimated disk ysz te defragmentation Create a fragmentation report on the selected drive agmented files Contiguous fles J Unmovable fles Free space Defragmenting 28 Compacting Files igure 8 7 Defragment the selected drive KUY Normally computers store each file in a single location on their hard drive just like a song is recorded on a continuous area on a cassette tape Over time however a hard drive can become fragmented and instead of storing a file in one single location it begins storing files
480. you were in an accident Opening disk drives and folders and being ab gt navigate through the contents of your computer are among of the most important We s skills you can learn amp AS a My Pictures B My Documents Desktop 8 4 My Computer N a 312 Floppy A amp Local Disk C 3 DVD Drive D Shared Folders on Server H S Software on Server I Control Panel My Network Places gj Recyde Bin Address Bar Quick Reference To Open a Folder e Double click the folder To Move Back or Up to the Previous Level or Folder e Click the zj Up button on the toolbar Or Click the O Back button on the toolbar Or e Click the Ej my Documents Address Bar on the toolbar and select the appropriate drive or folder Your Organization s Name Here 94 Microsoft Windows XP Lesson 4 4 Creating and Renaming a Folder Figure 4 8 Hard Disk C File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q sex QJ t P Search iy Folders E The expanded File and Folder Tasks menu Address lt C EJ co System Tasks CI Co ma J Figure 4 9 CustomGuide Database Documents Palm Practice File and Folder Tasks j Every Wi XP folder provides A newly created folder G9 Moke 2 new folder g a o easy a o common file and folder Peer 4 Program Files Temp WINDOWS m t tasks You can select a EZ Share this folder 7 file er and then click one o
481. ypes of Files you can Safely Delete to Save Hard Disk Spale File Type Description Temporary Internet The Internet saves Web pages on your hard disk for quick viewing so when Files you return to a Web page it can fetch it much faster from ug than it can from the Internet This collection of files used to speed Se ternet is known as a cache You can safely remove these temporary Mnet files from your computer without deleting your Web settings and b arks or favorite locations Disk Cleanup does not normally delete the 7 since they help speed up the Internet Downloaded Program Files Similar to Temporary Internet Files Downloade am Files are small programs ActiveX controls and Java applets want to be technical that have been downloaded from the Internet My you view certain pages Offline Web Pages Offline pages are Web pages that ar ggora on your computer so you can view them without being connected to the InteMet If you delete these pages now you can still view your favorites o ater by synchronizing them You can safely remove offline Web pag your computer without deleting your Web settings and bookmarks or Recycle Bin The Recycle Bin conta J you have deleted from your computer These files are not permangg Temporary Files Programs sometimes store temporary information in a TEMP folder usually located in the Weadows folder Before a program closes it usually deletes this information TUM Offline Files d Es es ar
482. ze window is already maximized and Restore buttons appear in the upper right corner of most programs Figure 2 6 A window in a restored State only fills up part of the screen Figure 2 7 A window in a maximized State fills up the entire screen E Document WordPad Figure 2 8 A window in a minimized State appears only as an icon on the taskbar Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 One of the b of Windows XP is that it enables you to open and work with several programs same time To make working with several programs at once easier you can changesth e of the windows You can maximize or enlarge a window so it takes up the entir minimize or reduce a window so that it only appears as a button in the Wi askbar or size a window somewhere in between This lesson explains how to he size of a window by maximizing minimizing and restoring let s look at how to maximize a window Some programs such as word processors and Maximize button eb browsers are easier to work with and fill the entire screen To enlarge a window to fill our computer screen click the Maximize button 1 Click the WordPad window s Maximize button the middle button in WordPad s titlebar The WordPad program maximizes filling the entire screen You can change a maximized window back to its original size by clicking the Restore button The Restore button appears in place of the Maximize button w

12 Microsoft Windows XP

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents